Digital PDFs

EK-PTA90-MG-002-A01

2000

201 pages

Original

13MB

Document:	TA90/E Magnetic Tape Subsystem Maintenance Guide Volume A01
Order Number:	EK-PTA90-MG-002
Revision:	A01
Pages:	201
Original Filename:

OCR Text

--'"

-"".,.........,_:

.."'»iji!ItJ: . . . .

13F5764

""It)

u.
('I)
~

PUBLICATIONS REFERENCE DRAWING
MACHINE TYPE/MODEL NO. TA90
MACHINE NAME

- Magnetic Tape Subsystem
-_.......

----

E C NO.
-----C04824
---C13764

DESCRIPTION I COMMENTS
_., ---" ."-

VOL. A01 - Maintenance Guide

-- ...
--~

V~OL. A01 - Maintenance Guide

mamaama
NAMEi

DETAIL

DATE

PUB'REF DWG (PRO)

DESIGN

---- ---

--,

SHT

- --

CHECK

CLASSIFICATION

APPRO

REL,

-- ---

4/28/89

. _ _ _ _ ' _ ' _ . ' r. . _ _ _ _ _ ._

~1/15/90

C13764

CHANGE NO

C04824

---

------.--.-- -"

"''''L."=''--,,:=,,-_,.r:''.~.~~_

MUST CONFORM TO ENG SPEC

DATE

CHANGE NO

•

.....-_._....

......

."
U1

"'en"

LOGIC PG NO

DE!VELOPMENT NO

RDOO1

mamaama

Maintenance Guide

TA90/E

SIN

MAINTENANCE
GUIDE

GLOSS
PLAN
INTRO
START
CART

PWR
SENSE
PANEL
CE/HSC
LOC
CARR-TCU

CARR-DR

LGND
SPROC
MD/SDISK
DIAG
DF
OPER

FSI
EAD

PNEU
MSG
INST
INSP
INDEX

lamaama mamlalD

I
I

I VOL. A01 I I VOL. A02 I

mamaama mamaama

I VOL. A03

I I VOL. A04 I

Maintenance Library

TA90/E Magnetic Tape Subsystem

Maintenance Guide

Vols. A01 to AOS

Logic Diagrams

Vols. C01 and 001

EK-PT.A90-MG-002

mamaama
VOL. ADS

Preface
This manual contains maintenance information about the Digital
T A90 Magnetic Tape Subsystem and is intended for customer
engineers responsible for servicing the T A90 tape subsystem.
Portions of this document contain material copyrighted oy IBM
Corporation.

Prerequisite Knowledge
It is assumed that you have a background in data processing
concepts and that you are familiar with the hexadecimal
numbering system, stored program concepts, and have a basic
understanding of tape subsystems and their relationship within a
system/cluster.

Related Documents
TA90 Operator's Manual, EK-OTA90-0M.

Preface

PREF 1

Preface

PREF 1

The information in this document is subject to change without
notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Digital
Equipment Corporation. Digital Equipment Corporation assumes
no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this
document.
The software described in this document is furnished under a
license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the
terms of such license.
No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software
on equipment that is not supplied by Digital Equipment
Corporation or its affiliated companies.
Copyright ·C1989 by Digital Equipment Corporation.
All Rights Reserved
Printed in U.S.A.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:
mD~DDmD .

DEC
DECmate
DECUS
DECwriter
DIBOl

HSC
MASSBUS

Rainbow
RSTS
PDP
RSX
P/OS
RT
Professional STI

TMSCP
UNIBUS
VAX
VMS
VT
Work Processor

Portions of this document contain material copyrighted of the
International Business Machines Corporation.

TA90 MG EC C13764

Safety 20

Safety 10
Soldering parts

Safety

•

Cuttinq wire or removing steel bands
This product meets Digital safety standards.
The following information has been included in this publication
fo~ the use and safety of Digital personnel.

Cleaning parts with solvent, chemicals, or cleaning
nuids

Ensure that another person, who is familiar with the
power-off controls, is near you.

Working in any other conditions that might be hazardous
to your eyes.

Remember: Another person must be there to switch off
the power, if necessary.

Use these rules to ensure general safety:
•

Observe good housekeeping in the area of the machines
during maintenance and after completing it.

•

Use only field-supply items (such as adhesives, cleaning
fluids, lubricants, paints. and solvents) that have been
approved by Digital. that is, are supplied under a Digital part
number.

•

Some Digital hand tools have handles covered with a
soft material that does not insulate you when working
with live electrical circuits.

Before you start the machine, ensure that other service
representatives and the customer's personnel are not in a
hazardous position.

Use only those tools and testers that are suitable for the
job you are doing.

After maintenance, reinstall all safety devices such as
shields, guards. labels, and ground wires. Exchange any
safety device that is worn or defective for a new one.

Use only one hand when working with powered-on
electrical equipment; keep the other hand in your pocket
or behind your back.

Remember: Safety devices protect personnel from hazards.
You destroy the purpose of the devices if you do not reinstall
them berore completing your service call,

1. Ensure that you can stand safety without slipping.
•

Remember: There must be a complete circuit to cause
electrical shock. By observing the above rules, you may
prevent a current from passing through the vital parts of
your body.

Reinstall all covers correctly before returning the machine to
the customer.

3. Use a slow lifting force. Never move suddenly or twist
when you attempt to lift.

Safety with Electricity

When using testers, set the controls correctly and use
the Digital-approved probe leads and accessories
intended for that tester.

Observe these additional rules when working on equipment
powered by eI ectrici ty:

CAUTION:

4. Lift by standing or by pushing up with your leg muscles;
this action removes the strain from the muscles in your
back. Do not attempt to lift any objects that you think
are too heavy for you.
•

Do not perform any action that causes hazards to the
customer or that makes the equipment unsafe.

•

Put removed covers and other parts in a safe place, away
from all personnel. while you are servicing the machine.

•

A!ways keep your too! case away from walk areas so that
other persons will not trip over it. for example. put it under a
desk or table.
.

•

Find the room emergency power-off (EPO) switch or
disconnecting switch. If an electrical acci~ent occurs, you
can then operate the switch quickly.

•

Do not work alone under hazardous conditions or near
equipment that has hazardous voltages. Always inform your
manager of any possible problems or if you must work
alone.

•

Insert the ends of your necktie or scarf inside other clothing
or fasten the necktie with a clip. preferably nonconductive,
approximately 8 centimeters (3 inches) from the ends.

•

Wear safety glasses when you are:
Using a hammer to drive pins or similar parts
Drilling with a power hand-drill

Disconnect all power:
Before removing or installing main units

Do not wear loose clothing that can be trapped in the moving
parts of a machine. Ensure that your sleeves are fastened or
are rolled up above the elbows. If your hair is long, fasten it
Do not wear jewelry, chains, metal-frame eyeglasses, or
metal fasteners for your clothing.
Remember: A metal object lets more current flow if you
touch a live conductor.

•

Before you start to work on the machine, unpiug the
machine's power cable. If you cannot unplug the cable
easily, ask the customer to switch off the wall box switch that
supplies power to the machine. and lock the wall box switch
in the off posi ti on.

•

If an electrical accident occurs:
Use caution: do not become a victim yourself.
Switch off power.
Send another person to get medical aid.
If the victim is not breathing. decide whether to give
rescue breathing.

Stand on suitable rubber mats (obtained locally, if
necessary) to insulate you from grounds such as metal
floor strips and machine frames.
•

Use extreme care when measuring high voltages.

•

Do not use tools or· testers that have not been approved by
Digital. Ensure that electrical hand tools, such as power
drills and Wire-Wrap' tools, are inspected regularly.

•

Do not use worn or broken tool s and testers.

•

Never assume that power has been disconnected from a
circuit. First, check that it has been switched off.

•

Always look carefully for pos'sible hazards in your work
area. Examples of these hazards are: moist Hoors,
nongrounded power extension cables, power surges. and
missing safety grounds.

•

Do not touch live electrical circuits with the glass surface of
a plastic dental mirror. The surface is conductive; such
touching can cause personal injury and machine damage.

Before doing a mechanical inspection of power supples

and similar units. (This rule ensures correct grounding of
the units.)

Many customers have, near their equipment. rubber
noor mats that contain small conductive fibers to
decrease electrostatic discharges. Do not use this
wrong type of mat to protect yourself from electric
shock.

Before working near power supplies

Before installing changes in machine circuits.

Unless the maintenance information specifically lets you, do;
not service the following parts with power on them when
they are removed from their normal operating places in a
machine:
Power supply un; ts
Pumps
Blowers and fans
Motor generators

CAUTION:

When lifting any heavy object

2. Balance the weight of the object between your two feet

If you need to work on a machine that has exposed electrical
circuits, observe the following precautions:

SAFETY 10

Using spring hooks or attaching springs

Trademark of the Gardner-Denver Co.

TA90 MG EC C13764

Safety 10

SAFETY 10

Safety

Safety 20
DANGER

Safety

DANCER

Hazardous electrical voltages are present In the
receptacle.
.------------------------------~

Danger Notices
A d.mQer notice is used to hOtHy the ellston-lei efigine€:i that
potentially lethal or extremely hazardous conditions exits.
The danger safety notices and their page locations contained in
the MG are shown below.
DANGER
Electric shock. The Drive Power switch removes dc
voltages to that drive only, and does not affect the other
drive in the tape transport unit

DANGER
Hazardous electrical voltages are present in the
connector. Do not touch the outlet case with anything
other than test probes until step 3 is completed.

INST6.
DANCER
Electric shock. Hazardous voltages can be present in
the ac line cord connectors.
CARR-TCU 1440. 1490.

DANGER

Electric shock. When setting the control unit ac power
circuit breaker off, hazardous voltages are still present
on the ac power circuit breaker and on the ac power line
cord.

INST S.

DANGER
Hazardous voltages are present. If the measured
voltage values are less than 1.0 V ac, you can touch the
outlet Avoid contact with the Internal parts (pins and
sockets) of the outlet
INSTG.

DANGER
Dangerous voltages are present at the ac power cable
socket. The safety cover must be on when the socket is
not being used.

Hazardous electrical voltages are present. Do not touch
the internal parts (pins and sockets) of the outlet until
step 5 is completed.
INSTS.

- ------------------------,

Make sure the circuit breaker that supplies power to the
customer receptacle Is off.
lf you are installing a Dual Tape Control Unit SUbsystem,
power to both customer receptacles must be ofr.
INST 60.

DANGER
Lethal voltages are present in the power servicing area.
Safety is most important. Treat all circuits as live until
measured.
Capacitors are possible exploding devices. Wear safety
glasses when working in the power area. Always Install
all safety covers before powering on the machine.

PWR 130-1, 400-1.
DANGER

DANCER

CARR-OR 8.

DANGER

Hazardous electrical voltages are present. Do not touch
the outlet before meeting the following requirements of
steps 1 and 2 .

INST 6.

CARR-OR 8.

Electric shock. Hazardous voltages are present on the
ac power circuit breaker and the line cord.

I
I

DANCER

SAFETY 20

!NST 10.
CAUTION:
.
TILT HAZARD. Do NOT open both drives of a tape transport unit
that is not bolted to another tape transport unit or tape control
unit. With the automatic cartridge feature installed and both
drive drawers fully extended, a tape transport unit that is not
bolted to another unit will tilt forward with about 20 Ibs. of force
appfied to the top of either automatic cartridge loader.

High Voltage.

PWR 400-7.

INST 4, 11,20. 135, 180.
INSP 15.

CARR-TCU G.

TA90 MG EC C13764

Safety 20

SAFETY 20

Tab List

Volume A01

Volume A02

Volume A03

GLOSS

Glossary

PWR

Power Maps

CARR-DR

PLAN

Maintenance Plan

SENSE

INTRO

TAgO Introduction

TAB 1

Volume A04
LGND

Legend

Sense/Status

SPRoe

Support Procedures

PANEL

Panel

MDfSDISK Maintenance Oevice/MD Support Diskette

START

Start Mainter.ance

CE/HSC

Customer Engineerlng Panel/HSC Diagnostics

CART

Cartridge Analysis

LOC

Locations

PNEU

Pneumatic Analysis

CARR-TCU Tape Control Unit

MSG

Errorlog messages

INST

Installation/Removal

INSP

Safety Check Procedures

INDEX

Index

ChecksfAdjustments/Removal/Replacement

Drive Checks': Adj us tments/Removal iReplacement

Procedures

DIAG

Support Diagnostic Descriptions

Data Fields and Registers

OPER

Theory of Operation

Volume AOS
FSI

Fault Symptom Index

EAD

Error Analysis Diagrams

TA90 MG EC C04824

Tab List

TAB 1

Glossary and Abbreviations
This glossary defines the special terms, abbreviations. and
acronyms that are used in this publicalion.

Glossary and Abbreviations
available. One state of a mass storage device used on the STI
bus. When powered on, the device is considered available (but
not online) to any controller in a configuration.

BOC. Bus-out check.

COR. Channel data register.

BOM. Bill of materials

CDTI. Channel diagnostic tag-in register.

backhitch. A slight motion in the backward direction just before
moving tape in a forward direction.

boot. To bring a device or system 10 a defined state where it can
operate on its own. See also bootstrap.

CEo Customer engineer; field engineer

backup. To make additional copies of documents or software for
safekeeping. in case the original copy is accidentally damaged or
desiroyed.

bootstrap. To cause an operating system to load itself and
prepare itself.

This glossary includes definitions from:
•

•

The American National Dictionary for Information
Precessing. published by the Computer and Business
Equipment Manufacturers Association. This material is
reproduced from the American National Dictionary for
Information Processing, copyright 1977 by the Computer and
Business Equipment Manufacturers Association, copies of
which may be purchased from the American National
Standards Institute, 1430 Broadway, New York. New York
10018. These definitions are identified by an asterisk (.).
The ISO Vocabulary of Data Processing. developed by the
International Standards Organization, Technical Committee
97, Subcommittee 1. Definitions from p'Jblished sections of
this vocabulary are identified by the symbol "(ISO)"
preceding the definition. Definitions from draft proposals
and working papers under development by the ISOrrC97
vocabulary subcommittee are identified by the symbol
u(TC97)," indicating that final agreement has not yet been
reached among its participating members.

CE Panel.

BOR. B~i nni ng-of-record.
BCC.

BCPH. Buffer channel pointer high register.

bpi. Bits per inch.

char. Character.

BSS. Backspace block.

checklist. A list of items to be checked.

BSF. Backspace file.

CHK.

buffer. • A routine or storage used to compensate for a
difference in rate of flow of data, or time of occurrence of events,
when transferring data from one device to another.

CHL. Channel.

BCSE. Buffer channel status/error register.

BCSL. Buffer channel stop low register.

bus. A group of signal lines that convey information from source
to destination. Ther:e may'be many destinations. but only one
source at a given time.

BCSS. Buffer channel storage sars register.
adj. Adjustment
Buffer data not real register.

ALD. Automated logic diagram.
BOC.

Buffer device command register.

allocation. See resource allocation.
BOCO.

Buffer diagnostic 0 register.

alter. To change.
BOC1. Buffer diagnostic 1 register.

CMD. Command.
card extractor. A field engineer tool.
CMR. Channel modifier register.
Card. Logic card (Board).

BOPH. Buffer device pointer high register.
BDPL. Buffer device pointer low register.
Buffer device remainder register.

ANAlVZEfERROR. The VMS command that invokes ERF.

A word to ca1f attention to possibfe persona!
harm to people. Contrast with DANGER.

CAUTf{)fIf (Notice).

CB. Circuit breaker.

ASCII. American National Standard Code for Inrormation
Interchange.

BOSS. Buffer device storage sars register.

centimeter. One hundredth of a meter. See meter.

assigning a device. The establishing of the relationship of a
device to a running task, process, job or program.

beginning-or-tape (BOT). The location on a magnetic tape that
indicates the start of the permissible recording area.

eeA. Channel card address register.
CCB. Communication control block.

asynchronous. Pertaining to events that are scheduled as the
results of a signal asking for the event; pertaining to that which is
without any specified time relation.

bfr.

Buffer.
CCC. Channel card control register.

BM/bill of materials. A list of specific types and amounts of
direct materials expected to be used to produce a given j<..--b or
quantity of output.

TA90 MG EC C13764

contingent connection. A connection between a channel path
and a drive caused when a unit check occurs during an I/O
operation.
control unit. A devke that controls input/output operations of
one or more devices.
controller. The part of a mass storage system responsible for
interfacing between drives and host computers.
CPo Circuit protector.

Counterclockwise.

Buffer mode register.

CPS. Cycles per second. See Hz.
CCW. Channel command word.

BOB. Beginning-of-block.
att Attachment

concurrent Refers to diagnostic procedures that can be run on
one tape control unit while the resl of the subsystem remains
avaifabte for customer applicalions.

CCR. Channel command retry.
CCW.

BMR.

command. A control signal that initiates an action or the start of
a sequence of actions.

contaminant. Something that contaminates.

BOSE. Buffer device status/error register.

assistance. Aid.

cluster. A collection of processors called nodes. attached to
each other by a high-speed bus.
cm. Centimeter.

CARR. Checks-Adjustments-Removal-Replacement.

BDR.

assignment The naming of a specific device to perform a
function.

elk. Clock.

CA. Channel adapter.

CART. Cartridge Analysis.
analog. Pertaining to data in the form of continuous variables.
which are related to measur.able physical quantities.

CHPIO. Channel path identification.

BWRP. Buffer wrap register.
BOAT.

amplinl!r. A device whose output is an enlarged reproduction of
its input

Check.

Buffer channel remainder register.

BCSH. Buffer channel stop high register.
access method. A technique for moving data between processor
storage and inp..:~output devices.

CER. Channel error register.

BOT. Beginning-or-tape.

BCPL. Buffer channel pointer low register.
aCR.

Hand held diagnostic tool.

channel command. An instruction that directs a data channel,
control unit, or device to perform an operation or set of
operations.

Buffer channel command register.

BCPC. Buffer channel pad counter register.

GLOSS 1

CRC. Cycli c redundancy check.

Glossary and Abbreviations

GLOSS 1

Glossary and Abbreviations

GLOSS 2

CRR. Channel request register.

deserialize. To change from serial-by-bit to parallel-by-byte.

ECC.

Error correction code.

FE.

Field engineer; customer engineer.

CS. Control storage.

designed. Has as a purpose.

ECO.

Engineering change order.

FEALD. Field Engineering automated logic diagram.

CSC. Customer Support Center

detent. A mechanical device for holding moving parts in
position.

EDF. Extented Data Format (Improved Data ReGording
Capabili ty)

field replaceable unit (FRU). An assembly that is replaced in its
entirety when anyone of its components fails.

detented. Held in position by a detent

elsewhere. To or at another place.

FiFO.

DEV. Device.

end of block (EOB). A code that marks the end of a block or data.

file. • (ISO) A set of related records, treated as a unit. for
example. in stock control, a file could consist of a set of invoices.

OF. Data Fields and Registers.

end of file (EOF). A code thai marks the end of a file of data.

DGHELO. Diagnostic hardware error log.

end of tape (EOT). The end of the recording area on a tape.

file protection. Prevention of the destruction or data recorded on
a volume by disabling the write head of a unit.

DGOVLY. Diagnostic overlay log.

EOB. End of block.

FIPS. Federal Interface Processing Standard.

DIAO. Diagnostic.

EOF.

End of file.

DIDO. Data in data out bus.

EOJ.

End of job.

firmware. Software that is stored in a fixed (wired-in) or 'firm'
way. usually in a read-only memory; a set of instructions
designed to help hardware perform its assigned functions.

DIR. Device interrupt register.

EOR. End of record.

direct access storage. (1)· A storage device in which the
access time is in effect independent of the location of the data
(2) (TC97) A storage device that provides direct access to data
(2) See also immediate access storage.

EOT. End of tape.

CST. Commar.d status table.
First ih first out.

CSW. Channel status word.
CTO. Channel tag out
ctr. Counter.
ctr!. Control.
CU. See rcu.
CUA. Channel unit address.
CUT. Controi unit operations labie.
DANGER (Notice). A word to call attention to possible lethal
harm to people. Contrast with CAUTION.
data. • Any represent~tions such as characters or analog
quantities to which meaning is, or might be, assigned.

EPO. Emergency power

formal • (ISO) The arrangement or layout of data on a data
medium.

off.

formatter. Part of a magnetic tape subsystem that performs data
conversion, speed matching. encoding, first level error recovery.
and interfaces to one or more tape Iransports.

EqC. Equipment check.
data ~ffer. The storage buffer in the tape (:ontrol unit. This
buffer is used to increase the data transfer rate between the tape
control unit and the channel.

FP.

DLR. Device level register.

File protect.

EQU. Equate.
frayed.

DOT. Device operation table.

Damaged as if by an abrasive substance.

equipment check. An asynchronous indication of a malfunction.
data check. A synchronous or asynchronous indication of a
condition caused by invalid data or incorrect positioning of data.
Some data checks can be suppressed.
OBI. Data buffer in.

Double-stick cellophane tape. Cellophane tape that has
adhesive on both sides of the tape.

FRU. Field replaceable unit
ERA. Error register A register.
FSB. Forward space block.

drive, magnetic tape. (ISO) A mechanism for moving magnetic
tape and controlling its movement.

ERB. Error register B register.
FSC. Fault symptom code.
ERF. A VAXNMS utility that selectively reports the contents of
an error log file.

FSF. Forward space file.

DBO. Data buffer out

DSC.

dc. Direct current.

DSE. Data security erase.

ERG. Erase gap.

FSI. Fault symptom index.

DCB. Data control block.

DSE (register). Device status and error register.

ERPA. Error recovery procedure action.

functional.

OCI<. Data check.

DSH. Control unit serial high register.

Error log. A binary file that is used to record hardware and
software failures and a selected amount of context of the failure.

Functional microcode. Microcode that is resident in the machine
during normal customer operation.

OCR. Device control register.

DSL. Control unit serial low register.
DSR. Device secondary register.

exchange. (1) The act of removing an old or imperfect part and
installing a new or perfect part (2) Conl.rast with swap.

FVP. Functional verify program.

DE. device end.
degauss. To demagnetize an object.

DTR. Device tag register.

explosive. Can explode or cause to explode.

degradation. A decrease in quality of output or throughput, or
increase in machine error rate.

dual porting (dual access). Ability of a disk or tape drive to be
accessed by two controllers.

F. Fuse.

degraded. Decreased in quality of output or throughput or
increased machine error rate.

EAD.

Device secondary clock register.

Of. connected with. or being a function.

GMP. Good Machine Path

Error Analysis Diagrams.

EBCDIC.
demark.

Extended binary-coded decimal interchange code.

fault symptom code (FSC). A hexadecimal code generated by
the drive or tape control unit microcode in response to a detected
subsystem error. This code is used as an MG entry point by the
field engineer.

gnd. Ground. A voltage reference point in a system that has
zero voltage potenti a!.
g. Gram.
hertz (Hz).
second.

Unit of frequency. One hertz equals one cycle per

Mark to show that the buffer segment is not usable.
EC. Edge connector. Engineering change.

TA90 MG EC C13764

hex. Hexadecimal.

Glossary and Abbreviations

GLOSS 2

Glossary and Abbreviations
HV. High voltage.

Glossary and Abbreviations
within the system, and would include human action such as
analysis by a program support representative.

maintenance package. The maintenance aids that Digital
supplies for servicing the TA90 subsystem.

ITA. Interval timer A register.

MAP. Maintenance analysis piOcedure.

ITB. Interval timer 8 register.

mask. • (ISO) (1) A pattern of characters that is used to control
the retention or elimination of portions of another pattern of
characters. (2) To use a pattern of characters to control the
retention or elimination of portions of another pattern of
characters.

Hz. Hertz (cycles per second).
1/0. Input/output.

IBG. Interblock gap.
ITC. Interval timer C register.

10. Identification.
JAL. Jump address low register.

GLOSS 3

Note: The term microprogram represents a dynamic
arrangement or selection of one or more groups of micro
instructions for execution in order to perform a particular
function. The term microcode represents micro
instructions used in a product as an alternative to
"hard-wired" circuitry to implement certain functions of a
processor or other system component.
microprogram load. See initial microprogram load.
milli. One thousandth of.

identifier. That difference by which one thing can be
distinguished from another.

JAH. Jump address high register.

IlEXER. HSC diagnostic that simultaneously exercises up to 12
tape drives. ILEXER does not provide for fault isolation.

K. (1)· When referring to storage capacity, two to the tenth
power; 1024 in decimal notation. (2) Kelvin.

master file. ,. (ISO) A file used as an authority in a given job and
that is relatively permanent. even though its contents may
change. Synonymous with main file.

millimeter. One thousandth part of a meter.
MlC. Machine level control.

MeR. Maintenance control register.
ILTAPE. HSC diagnostic that tests a specific tape formatter
dedicated to the test.
ILTCOM. An inline compatibility test for tapes possibly written
on different system and different drives.

kb. Kilobyte; a unit of 1024 bytes.

mm. Millimeter.
MD. Maintenance device. Microcode diagrams.

land paHern. Wires and connections on or below the surface of
a circuit board.

MDA. Maintenance device adapter.

LO. load.

MOO. Maintenance device display.

mount a device. To assign an 110 device by means of a request
to the operator.

modifier. That which changes the meaning.

iMl. Initial microprogram load same as boot.
I

LED.' light-emitting diode.

MOt Maintenance data in register.

MP. Microprocessor.

Immediate access storage. • A storage device whose access
time is negligible in comparison with other operating times.

LGNO. Legend.

MOO. Maintenance data out register.

MPL. Microprogram load.

IMR. Interrupt mask register.

load point. See beginning of tape.

media capacity. The amount of data that can be contained on a
storage medium, such as tape, expressed in bytes of data.

ms. Millisecond.

inertia. Tendency to remain at rest or continue in the same
direction.

LOC. Locations.

MSB. Most-significant bit.
meter (m). A unit of measure equal to 0.9144 yard.

locate block. A subsystem operation in which a tape is moved
so that a specific block is available for processing.

MG. Maintenance Guide

LRC. Longitudinal redundancy check.

MICR. Micro instruction register.

INST. Installation.

LSB. least-significant bit.

micro. One millionth of.

interblock gap (IBG). (1)· An area on a data medium to indicate
the end of a block or physical record. (2) (TC97) The space
between two consecutive blocks on a data medium.

LSI. Large scale integration technology.

MICRO. Microcode.

LSP. local storage page register.

mIcrocode. (1) One or more micro instructions. (2) A code,
representing the instructions of an instruction set, implemented
in a part of storage that is not program-addressable. (2) To
design. write, and test one or more micro instructions. (3) See
also microprogram.

initial microprogram load (IML). The action of loading a
microprogram from an external storage to writable control
storage; see bootstrap.

MSG. Message.
MTE. Multiple track error.
..TI
""11.

lA~;"+on"'!ll:n"'o.
IYlCiloIII,g'IQ,I •

i", rorti~+or
..,'W t"!:'ln
.a:::fi 141
.....
IW~I

~a.

MTO. Maintenance tag out register.

interface. • A shared boundary. An interface might be a
hardware component to link two devices, or it might be a portion
of storage or registers accessed by two or more computer
programs.

multlpath. Pertaining to using more than one path.

lSR. Local storage register.
LWR. Loop write-to-read.
m. Meter.

intervention required. Manual action is needed.

microdlagnostlc routine. A program that runs under the control
of a supervisor, usually to isolate field replaceable units.

INTRO. Introduction.

magnetic recording. • (ISO) A technique of storing data by
selectively magnetizing portions of a magnetizable material.

microdlagnostic utility. A program that is run by the customer
engineer to test the machine.
micro instruction. A basic or elementary machine instruction.

ips. inches per second.
irrecoverable error [n.]. (1) (TC97) An error that makes
recovery impossible without the use of recovery techniques
external to the computer program or run. (2) In item (1), the
recovery techniques would be external to those that are
incorporated, not only within the program that failed but also

TA90 MG EC C04824

magnetic tape. (TC97) A tape with a magnetizable surface layer
on which data can be stored by magnetic recording.
maintenance agreement A contract between Digital and a
customer for supplying service to the customer.

N/A. Not applicable.
net wire list. A Jist that shows the wiring connections for the
logic boards.
net. Network.

MIT. Multiple track.
INTlK. Interlock.

nano. One billionth part of.

microprogram. • (1) (ISO) A sequence of elementary instructions
that corresponds to a specific computer operation, that is
maintained in special storage, and whose execution is started by
the introduction of a computer instruction into an instruction
register of a computer. (2) A group of micro instructions that.
when executed, performs a preplanned function.

network. The interconnection of electrical components.
node. Intelligent entities in a distributed computing
configuration.
NOP. No operation.
NRZI. Non-return-to-zero change-on-ones recording.
ns. Nanosecond.

Glossary and Abbreviations

GLOSS 3

Glossary and Abbreviations
OCP. Operator control panel; contains any switches and
indicators necessary to provide operator information and control
over the drive.
offline. (TC97) Pertaining to the operation of a functional unit
without the continual control of a computer. Contrast with online.
online. (TC97) Pertaining to the operation of a functional unit
that is under the continual control of a computer. Contrast with
offline.

Glossary and Abbreviations
PNEU. Pneumatics.

ref. Reference.

pneumatic. The parts of the subsystem that control the
pressurized air and vacuum.

reg. Register.
reinstall. To put back the original part that was removed.

pOlling. (1) A process in which the microcomputer interrogates
certain command or status registers, one at a time, to determine
if service is required. (2) A process in which the STI-FIPS
adapter sequentially senses each drive, one at a time, to check
for a change of status.

GLOSS 4

servomechanism [n.]. .. A feedback control system in which at
least one of the system signals represents mechanical motion.
special feature. A feature that can be ordered to enhance the
capability, storage capacity, or performance of a Digital product,
but is not essential for its basic work.

remove. To take a part off of the machine.
SNERRH. Sense error history table.
RER. Read error register.
SNS. Sense.
resource allocation. (ISO) The assignment of the facilities of a
data processing system for the accomplishment of jobs .

SPEAR. Standard Package for Error AnalYSis and Reporting

OP. Operator panel.

. POR. Power-on reset.

OPER. Operation.

resume. To continue.

SS. Status store.

OSC. Oscillator.

primed. Pertaining to a condition of a tape drive when the
controlling computer has addressed the drive but the drive was
not in a ready state.

retry. To attempt again.

ST. Store.

OSCillator. A device that periodically varies a voltage.

PS. Power supply.

REW. Rewind.

standard feature. The significant design elements of a Digital
product that are included as part of the fundamental product.

OSU panel. Operator setup panel.

PSR. Processor status register. Program support
representative.

ROS. Read-only storage.

outstanding. Waiting for processing.

START, Stl1lrt maintenance.
RPM. Revolutions per minute.
STI. Standard tape interconnect

PST. Product support trained.
ov. Over voltage.

RPR. Read pattern register.
PT. Product trained.

overrun. Loss of data because a receiving device is unable to
accept data at the rate it is transmitted.

PWR. Power.

owner. One who owns something.

RIW. Read/write.

parameter. * (ISO) A variable that is given a constant value for a
specified application and that may denote the application.

RAM. Random access memory.

RRC. Read residual count register.
RSR. Read status register.

Stoplock. A position-hold mode used when the tape is in a
stopped position and under tension.

RUN. Rewind-unload.

subsystem. A secondary or subordinate system, usually capable
of operating independently of, or asynchronously with, a
controlling system.

SAR. Storage address register.

SUPP. Support.

S8. Sense byte.
SCR. Silicon-controlled rectifier.

swap. (1) The act of interchanging two identical
field-replaceable units within the same machine for test
purposes. (2) Contrast with exchange.

SDR. Statistical data recorder. Storage data register.

sync. Synchronous, synchronize.

s. Second(s) of time.

synchronous. (1) (ISO) Pertaining to two or more processes that
depend upon the happening of specific events such as common
timing signals. (2) Occurring with a regular or predictable time
relationship.

Random access memory. See direct access storage.
part. Part number.
RCR. Read control register.
p bit. Parity bit.
RD. Read.
PC. Parity check.
ROB. Read backward.
PCR. Processor control register.
PDR. Processor diagnostic register.

ROC. (1) Read diagnostic control register. (2) Remote Diagnosis
Center.

saturate. To completely fill.

PE. Parity error.

RDF.- Read forward.

sel. Select.

PER. Processor error register.

RECl. Record length.

segment. A part.

PG. Parity generator.

reconnect. To physically or electrically put back together.

SERDES. Serializer/deserializer.

tachometer. A device that emits pulses that are used to
measure/check speed or distance.

pgm. Program.

record. * (ISO) A collection of related data or words, treated as
a unit; for example, in stock control, each invoice could constitute
one record.

serialize. To change from parallel-by-byte to serial-by-bit.

tailored. Changed to meet individual specifications.

seriallzer. (ISO) A device that converts a space distribution of
simultaneous states representing data into a corresponding time
sequence of states.

tape cartridge. A container holding magnetic tape that can be
processed without separating it from the container.

tach. Tachometer.

PGIO. Path group identification.
PGM (map). Path group map.

recording density. The number of bits in a single linear track
measured per unit of length of the recording medium.

PGT. Path group 10 table.
PLAN. Maintenance Plan.
PM. Preventive maintenance.

TA90 MG EC C04824

SR. Service Representative, see also CEo
recoverable error. (1) An error condition that permits continued
execution of a program. (2) Contrast with irrecoverable error.

servo [n.], servos. An adjectival noun for use in qualifying some
part or aspect of a servomechanism.

tape void. An area in the tape in which no signal can be
detected; may be caused by a machine failure.
TB. Terminal board.
TCC. Top-card connector.

Glossary and Abbreviations

GLOSS 4

Glossary and Abbreviations
tape cartridge. A container holding magnetic tape that can be
processed without separating it from the container.
tape void. An area in the tape in which no signal can be
detected; may be caused by a machine failure.

Glossary and Abbreviations

GLOSS 5

Glossary and Abbreviations

GLOSS 5

VRC. Vertical redundancy check.
WARNING (Notice). A word to call attention to possible damage
to a program, device. or system.. Contrast with CAUTION.

WCR. Write control register.
TB. Terminal board.
TCC. Top-card connector.

word. (1) (ISO) A character string that is convenient ror some
purpose to consider as an entity. (2) In TA90 and VAX. 16 bits. or
2 bytes.

Teu. Tape Control Unit
WSE. Write status/error register.
tension [n.]. (1) The force tending to produce elongation. (2)
The condition of being stretched.
thread/load operation. A procedure that places tape along the
tape path.

WRITE. Write command.
WTM. Write tape mark.

XR. External register.
TW. Tape indicate.

XRA. External register address register.
TIE. Track in error.
TM. Tapemark.
tp. Test point

iT"'. Tape Transport Unit
TU. Tape Unit
TUBI. Tape unit bus in.
TUBO. Tape unit bus out
UEPO. Unit emergency power off.
unload. Prepare the tape cartridge for removal from the drive.
utilities. Utility programs.
Utility programs. (1)· (ISO) A computer program in general
support of the processes of a computer: for instance. a diagnostic
program. (2) a program that enables the field engineer to
maintain (or prepare to maintain) data or other programs.
uv. Under voltage.
VAXsimPLUS. VAX system integrity monitor; an interactive error
reporting tool.
VES. Volume error statistics.
virtual circuit. A logical connection path between two nodes in a
cluster.
volume. (ISO) A certain portion of data, together with its data
carrier, that can be handled conveniently as a unit.
VOM. Volt ohmmeter.

TA90 MG EC C13764

Glossary and Abbreviations

GLOSS 6

Glossary and Abbreviations

GLOSS 6

This page intentionally left blank.

TA90 MG EC C04824

Contents
TAgO Maintenance Summary . . . . . .
Special Tools and Test Equipment .. .
DC Test Tool
Card Extractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tape Removal Tool . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . ..
PressureNacuum Gauge
......
. . . . . ..
PressureNacuum Kit . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . ..
ESO Grounding Wrist Strap Tool
. . . . . ..
Cleaning Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leader Block Replacement Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attachment Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clutch Tool
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Hose Clamp Tool
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Protect Gauge .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6

6
6

TA90 Maintenance Package Summary

. . . . . . . . . . 25

Main Menu display

. . . . . . . . . . 30

T A90 Product Support Summary

Contents

PLAN 1

Contents

PLAN 1

. . . . . . . . . . . 50

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Take Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55
How to Take a Drive Offline (Single or Dual Subsystem)
55
How to Take a Tape Contiol Unit Offline (Single Oi Dual
Tape Control Unit Subsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Intermittent Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Scoping (Using Oscilloscope) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Maintenance Information Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Volume A01-Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
GLOSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
INTRO (Introduction)
.....................'0
START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
CART (Cartridge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
PNEU (Pneumatics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
MSG (Message)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
INST (Installation/Removal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
INSP (Safety Check Procedures) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Volume A02-Maintenance Procedures and Tape ContrOl
Unit Checks, Adjustments, Removals and Replacements 10
PWR (Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ' 0
SENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '0
PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
CE/HSC (CE Panel, HSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
LOC (Locations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , 0
CARR-TCU (Tape Control Unit Checks. Adjustments.
Removals. and Replacements) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Volume A03--Drive Checks. Adjustments, Removals. and
Replacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , 0
CARR-DR (Drive Checks. Adjustments, Removals, and
Replacements) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ' 0
Volume A04-Support Procedures .. ,. , . . . .. . . . . . 10
LGND (Legend) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
SPROC (Support Procedures) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '0
MD/SDISK (Support Diskette Procedures)
10
DIAG (Support Diagnostics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
OF (Data Fields) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
OPER (Theory of Operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
Volume AOS--Error Analysis Diagrams . . . . . . . .
"
FSI (Fault Symptom Index) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
'1
EAD (Error Analysis Diagrams) . . . . . . . . . . .
11

TA90 MG EC C13764

TA90 Maintenance Summary
The TA90 maintenance package has two parts, the maintenance
diskettes and the TA90 Maintenance Guide manual.
The TA90 maintenance package supplies two diskettes. GMP
(concurrent) di agnostics are resident on the TeU functional
diskette. Non-concurrent ("standalone") diagnostics are resident
on the TeU support diskette.

Card Extractor

Pressure/Vacuum Gauge

This tool (PN 29-27466-01) is shipped with the subsystem. It is
used to remove logic cards from the subsystem.

This tool (PN 29-27268-01) is used to measure the pneumatic
system pressure or vacuum. See PNEU 5 for instructions on how
to use the pressure/vacuum gauge.

TA90 Maintenance Summary

PLAN 5

TA90 Maintenance Summary

PLAN 5

There is a third diskette available for use with the maintenance
device (MO) for area support This diskette contains subsystem
display and alter controls, support utility programs, and
microcode patch programs.
o

Special Tools and Test Equipment
DC Test Tool
This tool (PN 29-27465-01) is shipped with the subsystem. Use
this tool to determine if subsystem power supplies are supplying
output voiiages. See P'v·vR iO or P'vVR i2 jor a description 0; ihis
tool and a description of how to use it.

''''COo,s ";; ..... t..
C"IC_.. ,c"Io"

Card Extrtlctor

Tape Removal Tool
456

This tool (PN 29-27467-01) is shipped with the subsystem. Use it
to rewind tape into the cartridge when the tape must be rewound
by hand. See CART 12 for instructions on how to use the tape
removal tool.

Pressure/Vacuum Gauge

Pressure/Vacuum Kit
This kit contains hoses, fittings and the PressureNacuum gauge
(shown above) for measuring the pneumatic system pressure or
vacu':!m. This kitis not shipped with the subsystem and must be
ordered.

DC Test Tool

Tape Removal Tool

TA90 MG EC C13164

TA90 Maintenance Summary (Continued)
ESD Grounding Wrist Strap Tool

Leader Block Replacement Kif

Hose Clamp Tool

This tool (use the most current part number available) is used to
prevent damage when you work with electrostatic discharge
(ESO) sensitive parts. See CARR-TCU 1-9 or CARR-DR 1-9 for
information on using the ESO grounding wrist strap tool. This
tool is shipped with the subsystem.

The Leader Block Replacement Kit (PN 29-27468-01) is shipped
with the subsystem. It includes the clutch tool and the
attachment tool. See Cart 20 for information on using these tools.

This tool (PN 29-27469-01) is used to clamp various air pressure
hoses for use in FRU isolation and for concurrent maintenance.
See CARR-DR 3-1 for information on how to use the hose clamp
tool. This tool is shipped with the subsystem.

TA90 Maintenance Summary

PLAN 6

TA90 Maintenance Summary

PLAN 6

Figure 1. Clutch Tool

File Protect Gauge
This tool (PN 29-27470-01) is used to adjust the file protect switch
to ensure correct contact is made with the tape cartridge. This
tool is shipped with the subsystem.

Cleaning Cartridge
This tool (PN 30-30326-01) is used to clean the head guide
assembly. To use, load the cartridge on a drive, and the cleaning
procedure occurs automatically. The cartridge unloads when the
cleaning procedure is done. This tool is shipped with the
subsystem.

Figure 2. Attachment Tool

Figure 3. File Protect Gauge

TA90 MG EC C04824

Maintenance Guide Description

Volume A03 - Drive Checks, Adjustments,
Removals, and Replacements

This section descr~bes the TA9~ Maintenance Guide and explains
how to use the maintenance gUIde to repair the T A90.

CART (Cartridge)

PWR (Power)

The maintenance guide (MG) is a five-volume manual that
~upplies. mainte!"a.nce prc:x:ed~res and theory of operation
information. This Information IS contained in the following five
volumes:

This section contains analysis and error-recovery procedures for
tape cartridge problems. The START section or the CE panel will
send you to the CART section to perform specific repair
procedures.

This section contains the MAPs to isolate failures in the power
areas. It also contains voltage reference tables and charts,
wiring diagrams, and a description of the dc test card. The
START section or the CE panel will send you to the PWR section
to analyze power failures.

•
•
•
•

A01·-Maintenance procedures
A02--Maintenance procedures and tape control unit checks
•
adjustments, removals, and replacements
A03--Drive checks, adjustments. removals. and
replacements
A04--Support procedures
A05--Error analysis diagrams.

Each volume of the maintenance guide is divided into sections
that are marked with tabs for quick identification and access
The following describes the sections contained in each of th~
maintenance guide volumes.

Volume A01 - Maintenance Procedures
The sections contained in this volume supply maintenance
procedures and repair information needed to diagnose and
repair the TA90.

GLOSS
This section supplies descriptions of terms and abbreviations
used in ~e TA90 Maintenance Guide. Use this section to look up
the meamng of any word or abbreviation that you do not
understand.

PLAN
Thi~ section (the. section you are now using) describes the TA90

Maintenance GUide, supplies a summary of the maintenance
pack~ge, and explains ~ow to use the maintenance guide to
re~alr the TA90. Use th,s section to learn what aids the
maintenance package supplies and how to use the maintenance
package to service the subsystem.

INTRO (Introduction)
This section supplies a summary of the TA90 Magnetic Tape
Subsystem, describes the tape cartridge, and describes the
subsystem features. Use this section to learn what the
subsystem consists of and what it does.

START
This section supplies the ini ti al entry into the maintenance
package.. It contain~ problem-finding procedures that guide the
field. engmeer to a diagnostic or repair procedure. Use this
~ectlon t~ start your analysis of a problem. This section aids you
In analYZing the problem or instructs you to use the CE Panel to
analyze the problem.

TA90 MG EC C13764

PNEU (Pneumatics)
This section supplies analysis procedures to isolate failures in
l~e pneumatic system. The START section or the CE panel will
send you to :he PNEU section.
•

INST (Installation/Removal)
This section supplies the information necessary for you to install
or remove the subsystem. Use this section when the customer
wants the subsystem (or a machine from the subsystem)
installed, removed, or relocated.

INSP (Safety Check Procedures)
This section supplies the safety check procedures to ensure that
a machine that has not been under a Digital Maintenance
Contract has the needed safety items installed and that no other
changes were made to make it unsafe.

INDEX
This section supplies an alphabetic list of key words and phrases
in maintenance information volumes A01, A02, A03, A04. and
A05. Use this section to find the subject you want

Volume A02 - Maintenance Procedures and Tape
Control Unit Checks, Adjustments, Removals,
and Replacements
The sections contained in this volume supply maintenance
procedures and repair information needed to diagnose and
repair the TA90 and the removal and replacement procedures for
all FRUs in the tape control unit.
.

This volume contains the section that supplies the drive removal
and rept acement procedures.

CARR-DR (Drive Checks, Adjustuents,
Removals, and Replacements)

SENSE
This section supplies summary charts and descriptions of the
subsystem sense bytes and the channel status byte. This section
describes how to analyze the sense bits. Use this section to
determine the correct entry point to the START section.

MSG (Message)
This section describes the error log messages and VAXsimPLUS
summaries. It contains examples of error log printouts and
explai.ns how to use the information. Use this section to analyze
the printouts from the error log report program. This analysis
will send you to the correct entry in the START section.
.

PLAN 10

PANEL

This section supplies the removal and replacement procedures
for all FRUs in the tape transport unit. The check or adjustment
procedures are included. Ai. the front of the section is a list of all
FRU numbers. which you can use for FRU identification and to
find required procedures. Use this section when the START
section instructs you to check, adjust, or exchange a FRU in the
tape transport unit.

This section describes the switches and indicators on the tape
control unit and tape transport unit panels, and supplies tape
drive operating instructions. Use this section to learn the
fa,.,:nct:on of th~ tape centre! unit and tape transpart un!! panels.
You can also use this section for directions about performing
operations as instructed by the START section.

The sections contained in this volume supply diagnostic
procedures and information, theory of operation, microcode data
field, and register information to aid you in diagnosing problems.

CEIHSC

LGND (Legend)

This section describes the maintenance device (MD), MD
messages, and MO menus. Instructions on how to use the MD
are provided. use of the CE Panel and HSC to run subsystem
diagnostics and GMP. Use this section to learn about the CE
Panel and how to use it with the TA90 subsystem.

This section describes with graphics the symbols used in the
maintenance guide. In addition, examples and descriptions of
logic, net wire, and voltage pin lists are supplied. Use thi s
section to learn how to read the diagrams in the maintenance
package.

LOC (Locations)

SPROC (SUpport Procedures)

This section shows the location
FRUs. assemblies, and parts in
the tape control unit and tape transport unit Use this section to
find the locations of items you are sent to by other sections of
this manual.

Volume A04 - Support Procedures

This section provides a step by step procedure for entering and
using the support maintenance package. It reminds you of what
error data is available and gives hints on analyzing that data.

MDISDISK (MD Support Diskette Procedures)
CARR-TCU (Tape Control Unit Checks,
Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements)
This section supplies the removal and replacement procedures
for all FRUs in the tape control unit. The check or adjustment
procedures are included. At the front of the section is a list of all
FRU numbers, which you can use' for FRU identification and to
find required procedures. Use this section when the START
section instructs you to check, adjust, or exchange a FRU in the
tape control uni t.

This section describes the MO support diskette procedures and
gives directions on using the maintenance device (MO) to display
registers, run the trace program, and do other support MD
operations that are resident on the support diskette.

DIAG (SUpport Diagnostics)
This section contains a description of the diagnostic control
program and the diagnostic tests resident on the TCU Support
diskette.

Maintenance Guide Description

PLAN 10

(
Maintenance Information Description (Continued)

Maintenance Information Description (Continued)

PLAN 11

Maintenance Information Description (Continued)

PLAN 11

DF (Data Fields)
This section describes the tape control unit and drive microcode
data fields. logs. and registers that are useful to you in diagnosis
of subsystem hardware failures.
The data field definitions are predominantly used to define bit
meanings within a register or field when EADs make reference to
them. Additionally. support diagnostics display register contents.
and the data fields section can be used to define their meanings.

OPER (Theory of Operation)
This section supplies the theory information necessary to
understand subsystem operations. Included are card. command.
and data flow descriptions.

Volume A05 - Error Analysis Diagrams
This volume contains a Fault Symptom Index (FSI) and Error
Analysis Diagrams (EAD) that are used to diagnose problems
when detailed troubleshooting is necessary.

FSI (Fault Symptom Index)
This section contains a listing of error codes generated by the
tape control unit or drive. A description ~f each error code, a
FRU list associated with the error code, and troubleshooting
references are provided. Use this section when you are sent
here by the Support Procedures to diagnose problems that were
not corrected by running GMP.

EAD (Error Analysis Diagrams)
This section contains error diagrams, error condition theory. and
troubleshooting guides for error codes that are generated by the
tape control unit or drive. Use this section when you are sent
here by the FSI for diagnosing problems that were not corrected
by running GMP.

T A90 MG EC C13764

TA90 Maintenance Package Summary

PLAN 25

T A90 Maintenance Package Summary

PLAN 25

The flowcharts on pages PLAN 30 through PLAN 51 show the
process that the maintenance package follows to lead you to a
repair. The flowcharts do not make up a repair procedure. The
repair procedure is completely contained in the sections starting
at START.
PLAN 30 shows the process up to the selection of the GMP.
PLAN 35 shows the process the maintenance package follows for
an interrupted service procedure. PLAN 35 also shows the
procedure that the maintenance package follows when you want
to test the subsystem for correct operation.
PLAN 50 and PLAN 51 describe the maintenance package tools
available to the service representative with support education.

TA90 MG EC C04824

TA90 Maintenance Package Summary (Continued)

Troubl e Call Informati on Source:
Drille message display check msg.
I Internal subsystem error logs.
I Error log report.
I Audible/Visual indications.
I Customer descri pti on of probl em.

SllbSY5:e~

Failure

Check Out

Miscella!'1eo~S Proced:Jres

START indicates MG sections that define non-repair procedures or
provide supplemental information to assist repair. I ncl uded are items
such as: Predictive maintenance; Operating the tape drive; CE panel use;
Install ati on/Removal procedures; Anal ysi s of system consol e messages;
Error log; Sense; I\tlanual cartri dge removal procedures .

START identifies those failures that do not require the CE panel
making reference to the MG sections to use. or defines actions to be
performed before you use the CE panel

....

MG procedures prior to use of
I CE panel, For repair follOW
MG repair procedures.

I
I
I

,-------------------_!

ST ART 10 defi nes proper determi nati on and
FE actions to follow in the MG.

!
:
I

r----------------------------------~

All mai ntenance acti on begi ns at the
Maint~nance Guide (MGI START section.

PLAN 30

Non- CE panel repai r
procedures; follow MG repai r
.,
procedures untl. fixed .

....

M G sections for r:on-re;;air prccec\.Ires.
t·
+ r In
• ,'"
M G sew.lor.s for supple ... en.a.
.... rrna.lon
.

Use CE panel or HSC console
to invoke GMP tests.

Use CE panel or HSC console
to involke GM"P tests.

R un Diagnostics

Run Diagnostics

PLAN 35

TA90 MG EC C13764

TA90 Maintenance Package Summary (Continued)

PLAN 30

TAgO Maintenance Package Summary (Continued)

TA90 Maintenance Package Summary (Continued)

PLAN 35

Run Diagnostics
PLAN 30

r
Y
Power On Reset
- -POR

1. Processor
2. External Register
3. Buffer
4. Loop write-to-read
5. Status store
6. Hardware checkers

Good Machine Path
GMP

TCU Support Diskette'

FRU Mapping

HSC Diagnostics

FRU mapping is
accomplished by the
use of:
1. V AXsimPLUS
2. SPEAR
3. System error log
and FSI

HSC subsystem
diagnostics
1.ILTAPE
2.ILEXER
3. GMP
4. TCU support

1. Short loop-write-to-read
2. Long loop-write-to-read
3. Write to tape 4.
4. Read from tape
5. Tape motions
.... --.
Note: GMP routines are
concurrent.

See DIAG section

TA90 MG EC C04824

1. External register
2. Data buffer
3. TCU to drive
4. Data path
5. Status store
e.-TapeMovement

See CE/HSC section

' Note: Non-current,
if a two TCU configuration
both TCU's must be OFFLINE.
See CE/HSC section

See MSG and FSI
sections

See CE/HSC and DIAG
sections

T AgO Maintenance Package Summary (Continued)

PLAN 35

TA90 Product Support Summary

T AgO Product Support Summary

PLAN 50

Note: Registers displayed by programs/diagnostics on the
support diskettes are useful in isolating hardware failures
and are explained in the OF (Data Fields) section. See
"Contents" on OF 1.
Plan

\J
I

Support Diskette Main Menu
The support diskette is used with the MG EAD section or independently as a tool
for independent troubleshooting. However, immediately after using all of the aids
of the support MG and diskette, the FE must request the next level of support,
instead of continuing self·analysis. This is to decrease down time and customer
dissatisfaction.

Product package has failed to repair a
subsystem failure. FE is instructed to
request next level of support.

1. Subsystem Diagnostics
(Run options are suppl ied
for diagnostics such as
Stop on Error, Loop, and
others).

You must go to the Suppor: Procedures
(SPROCl section and the Fault Symptom
Index (FSI) section for direction.

2. Subsystem
Display/Alter
(MD only)

3 Support Utilities
(~ID onl'l)

II
I,

Plan 51

EADS are listed sequentially, 2·digit tape
transport unit codes through 4·digit tape
control unit codes. Based on the error code, I
the EAD supplies error discription, error
detection theory, error diagram, and
tr~~bleshootin~ g~ide. The troubl~sh~oting
gUlae refers to lOgiC, power, net pm hstsL
and support diagnostic setup and use, __
if needed. The support FE diagnoses the
problem using the EAD or takes independent
action, using the support diskette as an
added support tool. For some error codes
the Fault Symption Index (FSI) defines
the error.

i--

Select~d

10----------

0 iagnostics

Entering a 4-digit
code selects single or
multiple diagnostics.

Plan 51

Drive Command Exerciser

I Tak~s a user·se!e:::~d
a

chain of up to cornrnar.ds.
The ccmmar.c! format is
lisi:ed on the rafer~nce display'
This dia~r.cs:;c runs
cor.c~rrantly. Command
:hains :an :e rec::lmmenc!ec!
;11 the EAJs rcr error codes.
(~ID only)

Y~s

I f the product support package fails to repair
the del/ice failure, cal! for the next higher
level of aid.

Run Diagnostics
I

Plan 35
An aided repair is made.

TA90 MG EC C13764

,-----------,

--;

Note:

I The ur:i~ ~es: ootior. re~t;eS:3 ~hat 'I"U

IML the tape c;m:rol uni: rJnctior.al
code jf needed.'

L-.-... ........... .._._ ....... . - . - - - -

I
-J

TA90 Product Support Summary

PLAN 50

lA90 Product Support Summary (Continued)

TASO Product Support Summary (Continued)

Plan 50

PLAN 51

Plan 50

1. Storage
Display/Alter

2. Register
Display/Alter

Supplies access to
the tape control unit
tables, tape control
unit storage, channel

Supplies access to the
tape control unit and
drive external
registers and local

...... " ..age

t"i"'!I". I~

;t~~age: ;~d~~trive
storage.

~torage registers, and

the tape control unit
scan ring

1. Tape control unit
trace/match
control

2. Microprocessor
control

Prompts the user for
setup data. Act ion
taken at the time
selected errors occur.

Permits control opera:ior.s in t!"lese areas:
maintenance adapter
reg!ster"s Md
microprocessor. control storage. and
maintenance adapter
commands.

Tape control unit
subsystem dump

I
Dump fi les can be
written for the
tape control unit
and drives. in long
a short format.
Dump files are
written on the
support diskette.

I
Product maintenance adapter registers

TA90 MG EC C13764

Microprocessor
corrmands

Control storage
commands

Product maintenance
adapter commands

Displays the fo Ilowregisters: MeR I MSS.
MTI, ADR. and DREG.

Provides microprocessor control similar
to an SR panel. (For
example: stop, step,
start, reset, etc.)

Allows control
storage read and
write operations.

Allows product maintenance adapter control via commands.
(For example: set
address, comp
sync/stop, ignore
errors, etc.)

TA90 Product Support Summary (Continued)

PLAN 51

Procedures
Dismount Procedures
Before you perform a maintenance action on a drive, the drive
address must be offline to the operating system. Before you
perform a maintenance action on a tape control unit, all drives
attached to the tape control unit must be offline to the operating
system in a single tape control unit configuration or have the
paths offline for all drives in a dual tape control unit
configuration. Failure to do so could affect customer operations.

Procedures

PLAN 55

Procedures

PLAN 55

2. If the Offline green LED does not light. press the IMLlReset
switch to the Reset position.
Note: Check with the customer to ensure that the subsystem
has been taken offline completely before pressing
Reset.

How to Take a Drive Offline (Single or Dual Tape
Control Unit Subsystem)
Have the customer:
1. Deallocate all of the systems that have access to the drive.
2. Dismount each of these addresses offline to the operating
system.
Be sure to verify that the customer has completed the offline
procedure before starting the maintenance procedure.

How to Take a Subsystem Offline (Single or Dual
Tape Control Unit Subsystem)
Have the Customer:
1. Deallocate all channel paths that have access to the
subsystem.
2. Dismount all channel path addresses, to each drive that is
attached to the tape control unit, offline to the operating
system.
Be sure to verify that the customer has completed the offline
procedure before starting the maintenance procedure.
Do the following:
1. Switch the tape control unit Online Test/Offline Test switch to
the Offline Test position.
Note: A delay can be expected because the Offline green
LED does not light until all channel processes have
stopped.

TA90 MG EC C13764

Procedures (Continued)

PLAN 65

Procedures (Continued)

PLAN 65

Scoping (Using Oscilloscope)
An oscilloscope, Tektronix 1 454A, 475, or equivalent, may be
used.
Set the oscilloscope controls as follows:
Use a X10 probe, sync'" auto, volts =1 volt/em. sweep = as
required.

1. Probe the points as directed by the MAPs.
2. If the MAP indicates the UP light is on, the line level should

be in the up signai levei area. See the vOitage signal levels
below.
3. If the MAP indicates the DOWN light is on, the line level
should be in the down signal level area. See the voltage
signal levels below.
4. If the MAP indicates the light is flashing, the line level should
be changing between up and down level. Ensure that the up
and down levels are within limits. See the voltage signal
ievtJis below.

+5.0

+2.2
+5V

+0.7
+0.1

Trademark of Tektronix, Inc.

TA90 MG EC C04824

Contents
Introduction to the T A90 Subsystem
Operating Characteristics
Optional Features . . . . .
Operating Systems
Physical Characteristics .
Cartridge . . . . . . . . . .
Drive Message Display ..
Addressing . . . . . . . . .
Initial Microprogram Load (IML) . . . . . . . . .

5
5
5
5

5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
10
10
10

15
Introduction to the TA90 Tape Control Unit
Tape Control Unit Diagram
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
20
Data Buffer . . . . . . . . .
20
Write Data Flow Card .. .
Read Control . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Maintenance Adapter . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Status Store and Status Store Communication
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Microprocessor and Control Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Voltage Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Power-On-Reset and Undervoltage Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Writing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Buffered Write Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Tape Write Mode ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Reading Data .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Single Tape Control Unit Subsystem Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Channel Adapter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
STI-FIPS Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Drive-Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Read Data Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Dual Tape Control Unit Subsystem Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Dual Tape Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Drive Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40

TA90 MG EC C13764

Contents

INTRO 1

Contents

INTRO 1

Introduction to the T A90 Tape Transport Unit . . . . . .
45
Tape Transport Unit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50
Pneumatic Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Drive Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Drive Control Card
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Microprocessor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Digital Servo
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Adapter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Message Display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Write Card
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Read Preamplifier Card
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . 50
Power Amplifier Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SO
Loader Control Card
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Drive Transport Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Tape Loading and Unloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Motion Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Stoplock Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Tape Transport Sensors . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Introduction to Channel Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Channel Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Introduction to the TA90 Subsystem
The TA90 is a high performance buffered magnetic tape storage
subsystem.
The subsystem consists of a Tape Control Unit and up to four
Tape Transport Units. Each tape transport unit contains two
drives. Therefore, each tape control unit can have a maximum of
eight drives connected to it By adding the Dual Tape Control
Unit Communication feature, a second tape control unit and up to
four tape transport units can be connected to the first tape control
unit to form a two-tape control unit, sixteen-drive subsystem.
The TA90 subsystem attaches to the HSC/HSX controller. The
STI-FIPS Adapter card interconnects the FIPS-60 interface of the
tape control unit with the STI interface bus. The TA90 subsystem
attaches to the VAX processors via the HSCIHSX.
The TA90 provides dual porting capability at all
levels-Transport, Tape Control Unit and STI-FIPS adapter.

Introduction to the T AgO Subsystem
Operating Systems

Physical Characteristics

The programming support for the subsystem is provided within
the following operating systems and their future extensions:

Dimensions

•

VMS

•

ULTRIX

Optional Features

•

Some of the subsystem operating characteristics are:
•

A compact design with front loading

•

A small reel of half-inch tape enclosed in a compact
cartridge for greater tape protection

•

Automatic tape threading

•

A tape control unit with a 1024K-byte data buffer and a
microprocessor that controls the data flow within the
subsystem

•

A Dual Tape Control Unit Communication feature that has the
ability to interconnect two tape control units into a single
subsystem configuration

•

A drive with microprocessor control that moves tape without
capstans or vacuum columns

•

A message display panel for each drive that provides visual
information for the operator or service representative.

TA90 MG EC C13764

Tape Control Unit:
Height 1.000 m (39.37 in.)
Width: .660 m (25.98 in.)
Depth: .750 m (29.53 in.)

•

Improved Data Recording Capability

The TA90 tape drive has the following optional feature:

Tape Transport
•

Type: Reel-ta-reel, automatic self threading

•

Number of tracks: 16

•

Reading speed: 2000 mm/sec (78.7 in.lsec)

•

Load time:
Without Automatic Carlridge Loaders,
5 to 10 seconds.
With Automatic Cartridge Loaders,
7 to 30 seconds

•

Unload time: 5 to 10 seconds

•

Rewind speed: 4000 mm/sec (157 in.lsec)

•

Rewind time: maximum 48 seconds.

Tape Transport Unit
Height 1.000 m (39.37 in.)
Width: .517 m (20.11 in.)
Depth:
Without Automatic Cartridge Leaders,
.750 m (29.53 in.)
With Automatic Cartridge Loaders,
.930 m (36.63 in.)

The TA90 Subsystem has the following optional feature:

• An automatic cartridge loading feature that handles up to six
cartridges that load and unload automatically.

Operating Characteristics

•

iNTRO 5

Recording Media
•

Tape cartridge
Tape width: 12.7 mm (0.5 in.)
Mean usable tape length: 154 m (505 ft)

Introduction to the T AgO Subsystem

INTRO 5

Introduction to the T AgO Subsystem

INTRO 10

Cartridge

Drive Message Display

Addressing

Initial Microprogram Load (iMl)

The drive uses a compact cartridge that has a nominal data
capacity of 200 megabytes.

Each drive has an operator panel on the top of the tape transport
unit. which contains an eight-character visual message display.
The operator panel is mounted on a swiveling fixture that can be
adjusted by hand to make the message display visible from
various operator positions.

The drive addresses and tape control unit address are set duiing
installation.

During an IML. a microcode image that permits the subsystem to
become functional is loaded into the tape control unit

The tape control unit address can be ei ther 0 or 1.

The IML diskette contains the microcode image and patches for
the tape control unit This diskette must be kept in the IML
device at all times. The microcode image and patches contained
on ihe iML diskette are related to the EC level or the tape control
unit and attached drives, therefore. only the specific IML diskette
designated for a tape control unit should be used in that tape
control unit.

The tape cartridge remains closed during storage and handling
to protect the tape from external contaminants. When a cartridge
is inserted into a drive, the drive automatically pulls the tape
from the cartridge and threads it onto a fixed machine reel.
Each cartridge has a physical file protect selector. When the
selector is set to file protect. data is prevented rrom being written
on or erased from tape. For additional cartridge information see
the CART section.

The drive microprocessor, the error sensing logic, and the host
software can cause the following types of messages to be
displayed for the operator or the service representative.
•

Error message

•

Service representative information

•

Drive status

The drive address can be any value in the range of hexadecimal
o through I for a singie tape controi unit subsystem (tape coniroi
unit 0) . When dual control units are installed, the address can be
any address within the range of hexadecimal 0 through F.
However, all drives physically attached to a tape control unit
must be addressed within the group of hexadecimal 0 through 7
or the group of hexadecimal 8 through F.
Two STI-FIPS adapter cards are included with each tape control
unit, left (L) and right (R). The L adapter controls those drives
attached to its TCU which have even drive address (not TCU unit
numbers). The R adapter controls odd numbered drives. These
numbers are set by thumbwheel switches located by the TIU
bottom door.

Tape Control Unit

I1 I

A
..

R Adapt~r

Channel B

HSX POi~

I
IS

TCU 1

I5 I

Channel A

Leader Block

Note: Ensure following an IMl command. that the tape control
unit is in the online test position.

Drives

I
TCU 0

Anytime the tape control unit is powered on, or the IML button is
pushed on an omine tape control unit. the tape control unit will
attempt to IML itself from the diskette in its IML device. The IML
device is also accessed when drive patches are loaded.

8 j

B
A

L Adapter

R Adapter

Channel A

Channel B

TA90 MG EC C13764

- - - - - HSX Ports

Introduction to the TAgO Subsystem

INTRO 10

Introduction to the TAgO Tape Control Unit
The tape control unit, under control of the microprocessor,
moves read and write data between the STI-FIPS adapter, the
data buffer, and the attached drives. In addition, the tape control
unit:
•

Receives, interprets, and executes data commands from the
STI-FIPs adapter
Generates and sends cOntroi commands to the attached
drives

•

Processes read and write data into and out of the data buffer

•

Schedules various 1/0 and drive operations

•

Detects tape control unit errors

•

Collects and sends sense and status information to the
STI-FIPS adapter

•

Stores the sense and status information for error recovery or
analysis

•

INTRO 15

Introduction to the TA90 Tape Control Unit
Tape Control Unit Diagram

This is a high level drawing
showing theory only. For
detailed point-to-point
wiring see the machine logics.

rape CQl"!!ro! Ul"!it

To and from
Maintenance ~_ _ _~ mainenance device
(See MO/SDISK Section)
Adapter

Microprocessor

Status
Store

Performs stand alone error recovery on some subsystem
failures.

I
Control ~
Storage

Storage

Drive
Adapter

Write Data

To and from
HSC/HSX

STI·FIPS

Channel

Adapter

I I

Read Data

Write Data
Data Buffer

Write Data
Flow

Write Data

~__I~~ To and from
drives

CE Panel

STI·FIPS
Adapter

Channel
Adapter

B
Read Control
Read Data

TA90 MG EC C04824

Read Data

t4----- From drives

Introduction to the TA90 Tape Control Unit

INTRO 15

Introduction to the T AgO Tape Control Unit (Continued)

Introduction to the TA90 Tape Control Unit (Continued)

INTRO 20

Data Buffer

Maintenance Adapter

Microprocessor and Control Storage

Power

The data buffer provides data burfering between the drives and
the STI-FIPS adapter.

The maintenance adapter (MA) card provides a means for the
maintenance device (MO) to monitor and change the status of the
tape control unit The adapter logic permits the MD to
communicate with the subsystem components, to load and run
diagnostics, and to interrogate registers.

The microprocessor card contains the microprocessor, storage
for the local store register, and associated logic for control of and
communication with the other areas of the tape control unit In
addition, all processor related external registers, the external
interrupt hardware. and most of the processor error detection
and reporting logic are located on this card. The processor
executes microprograms to cont;ol and monitor tape control unit
activity through external registers that are accessed by way of
the external register bus.

The power area of the tape control unit consists of an AC power
supply and two DC power supplies. The AC power supply
furnishes power for the DC power supplies, the cooling fans, and
the AC power for each of the tape transport units. The DC power
supply PS02 furnishes dc power to the tape control unit only. The
dc power supply PS03 furnishes power to the gate containing the
STI;FtPS adapter cards. DC power for the tape transport units is
developed within the tape transport units.

Control storage consists of tables accessible only by the
microprograms and the microprocessor. It contains the initial
microprogram load (IML) data that has been read rrom the IML
diskette. Any time the microprocessor needs a microprogram to
perform a function, it communicates with control storage to
obtain the microprogram.

Voltage Regulator

All data transferred between the STI-FIPS adapter and the tape
control unit passes through the data buffer.

If improved Data Recording Capabiiiiy is instaiied, dala is
compacted before entering the buffer on a write operation and
uncompacted after leaving the buffer on a read operation.

Write Data Flow Card
The write data flow card receives data that is to be written on
tape from the data buffer. It contains the logic required to
process and format the data and to control the write operation. It
also generates clocking and parity lines that are transferred with
the data to a selected drive through the tape control unit drive
adapter.

Read Control
The read control area consists of.

• A read clock and format card
•

A read ECC/correction card

Note: The MD is used as an engineering support tool in the
laboratory. It is used for integrating, testing, and
debugging, as well as continuing product engineering.

Status Store and Status Store Communication
The status store provides a common storage area for status
information in the tape control unit and contains the status of
each drive. Drive status information is used by the
microprocessor and channel adapter areas for allocation of
common resources. The channel adapter and microprocessor
use this drive status information to keep track of each drive's
status. The status store communication card provides a
communication path between tape control units when the
dual-control-unit communication cables are installed.

The voltage regulator card, located in the 01A-A1 logic board
controls the voltages needed for the storage cards in the tape
control unit

Power-On Reset and Undervoltage Detector
The power-on reset (POR) card contains POR and undervoltage
circuitry. In addition to resetting the tape control unit circuitry
power on, the POR and undervoltage pulses are used to provide
POR to the channels and the STI-FIPS adapters. A POR during a
power off cl amps the channel interface off before power is lost
DUiing a powei-on sequence, the STt. . FIPS adapter (Reset) is
clamped off for approximately 800 ms to permit the voltages to
stabilize.

- A read detect card
•

Three read skew cards

•

A read buffer card.

The read area receives data from the drive; interprets, verifies
and formats the data; and transfers it to the data buffer.

TA90 MG EC C13764

Introduction to the T AgO Tape Control Unit (Continued)

INTRO 20

Notes

INTRO 21

TA90 MG EC C13764

Notes

INTRO 21

Introduction to the T A90 Tape Control Unit (Continued)
Writing Data
Two modes of writing can be selected by the host system when
using this subsystem: buffered write and tape write. When in
buffered write mode, the tape control unit signals completion as
soon as the data has been written correctly to the buffer. The
subsystem does any error recovery required to physically write
the data block on tape. Tape write mode is for writing critical,
non-restartable data files.

Buffered Write Mode (Cached Operation)
When the tape control unit receives a write command from the
channel in buffered write mode, write data is accepted from the
STI controller and acknowledged. This frees the STllink for other
operations while the data is transferred to the tape control uni~
and eventually, the tape media. The tape control unit writes the
buffered data blocks when the drive is available. This increases
channel efficiency by freeing the channel before the data is
written.

Tape Write Mode
Tape Write Mode (Non-Cached Operation)
When the tape control unit receives a write command in tape
write mode, it moves the data from the channel adapter into the
buffer at channel speed. As soon as the drive is moving tape at
recording speed L'ie data is sent to the drive.
Ouring non-cached operation, write data is accepted and
transferred to the tape control unit, the drive, and the tape media.
Acknowledgement is sent to the STI controller, making for
uHra-reliable operation at the expense of time. Non-cached
operations can be much slower than cached operations. Errors
in writing to the tape media are reported in both cases.

Introduction to the TA90 Tape Control Unit (Continued)

INTRO 22

Reading Data
Data is read from the drives into a tape controi unit buffer. On
STI read commands, records are requested from the TCU and
are transferred to the STI controller (HSX). The STI-FIPS adapter
prereads and maintains the next record to be read in its buffer.

Read Caching
For good performance, whenever STI read operations are
performed, "read ahead" records are maintained in the adapter.
This ensures the next record is immediately available.

.. Improved Data Recording Capability
The Improved Data Recording Capability feature supports both
buffered and tape wri te modes but does not support read
backward or synchronous write mode.

During cached operations. sending data between the STI-FIPS
adapter and the tape control unit can occur simultaneously (can
overlap) with data operations between the TA90 ·and its STI
controller (HSX). Data can be loaded into the buffer for the next
record while the current write operation finishes; drive motion is
maintained and writing continues. This is called streaming.

TA90 MG EC C137S4

Introduction to the TA90 Tape Control Unit (Continued)

INTRO 22

Introduction to the TA90 Tape Control Unit (Continued)

Introduction to the T A90 Tape Control Unit (Continued)

INTRO 25

Single Tape Control Unit Subsystem Diagram
This is a high level drawing
showing theory only. For
detailed point-to-point
wiring see the machine logics.

Tape Transport Unit

Tape Control Unit

STI·FJPS
Adapter
L

Channel

Adapter
A

Detect

t
To and from

HSC/HSX

RC!3d Preamp

. Read Preamp

Local lRlr:ioce

Local IRemote

FIQ.w ____

Device In:erconnac:ion
Local

Remote
Inte~ •

STI·FIPS
Adapter
I

From ot:,e:-

crives

Write-Data

TA90 MG EC C04824

Drive 1

CE P~nel

Drive a

Read Data Bus

Rwaad

-..

Channel
Adapter
B

I Rer:-:ote

De'/ice Interconnection
Remote
Local

~:lnnectton

Local
Inter·
connection

Device Control Bus local
, .....

To and from
ot.'''Ier drives

Introduction to the TA90 Tape Control Unit (Continued)

INTRO 25

Introduction to the T AgO Tape Control Unit (Continued)

Introduction to the TA90 Tape Control Unit (Continued)

Channel Adapter

Drive Adapter

Read Data Bus

The tape control unit has two channel adapters as part of the
base equipment.

The drive adapter provides the write data and control information
path between the tape control unit and:

The read data bus sends analog read data from the drives to the
tape control unit. The read data bus is a single flat cable that
connects the drive read buffer directly to the tape control unit
read clock/detect cards. The devices are connected to this bus
similar to the way the devices are connected to the device
control bus. The read data bus consists of two selectable groups,
A and 8. Each group has 16 line pairs that send the analog data
on the 18 read data tracks to the tape control unit.

The channel adapter connects the tape control unit to the
STI-FIPS adapter. The STI-FIPS adapter has command retry
capability .
The channel adapter moves data between the STI-FIPS adapter
and the tape control unit buffer. Data is also compacted and
uncompacted if the data compaction feature is installed. The
following type of channel and its rate is used:
•

3 Megabyte Data Streaming: The ~ape control unit clocks the
data rate to 3.0 megabytes per second,
5 percent.

Each channel adapter operates as an asynchronous unit. It
decodes all commands and provides initial status for each
command. The channel adapter also causes the channel to
disconnect, using channel command retry, if the command
cannot be executed immediately.
When a channel adapter is processing an I/O operation for a
specific drive, the other channel adapter in the tape control unit
can process 1/0 operations for other drives.

STI-FIPS Adapter
The STI-FIPS adapters are housed within the tape control unit
Each tape control unit holds two adapters (L and R). as shown in
the diagram on INTRO 15. Each STI-FIPS adapter:
•

Receives, interprets, and executes STI commands from the
STi controiler (HSC or HSXj

•

Generates and sends FIPS commands to the TCU·

•

Buffers data to be transferred to the TCU or STI controlier

•

Passes drive and tape control unit error information to the
host for logging

•

Records significant local errors in its own EEROM for use by
Digital maintenance

•

Converts drive addresses from the numbers set on the
drives to unit numbers for a cluster.

TA90 MG EC C13764

•

One serial string of up to eight drives in a single tape contrOl
unit subsystem

•

Two serial strings of up to eight drives each in a dual tape
control unit subsystem.

INTRO 30

The tape control unit drive adapter contains two
interconnections, local and remote. In a single-tape control unit
subsystem, the drives must be connected to the local
interconnection. The remote interconnection is not used. In a
dual-tape control unit subsystem, each tape control unit has one
set of drives connected to the local interconnection and another
set at drives connected to the remote' interconnection.
The drives physically attached to a tape control unit are
connected to that tape control unit's local interconnection. The
drives physically attached to the other tape control unit are
connected to the remote interconnection. Therefore, each drive is
connected to the local interconnection on one tape control unit,
and the remote interconnection on the other tape control unit. at
the same time.

The primary drives attached to tape centre! unit 0 (TCUC) are
addressed hexadecimal a through 7, and the primary drives
attached to tape control unit 1 (TCU1) are addressed
hexadecimal 8 through F. Drives 0 through 7 are attached to the
local interconnection of TCUO, and the remote interconnection of
TeU1. Drives 8 through F are attached to the local
interconnection of TCU1 and the remote interconnection of TCUO.
The device control bus is a single flat cable that connects the
tape control unit drive adapter to the drives. There is one device
control bus for the drives attached to the local interconnection,
and another device control bus for the drives attached to the
remote interconnection. The device control bus is terminated at
the last drive on a set ot drives.
Note: Due to STI constraints, the STI-FIPS adapter can
physically address only four drives. The "Lit adapter
interfaces with channel adapter A and addresses the even
numbered drives locaiiy (normaliy) connected to its TCU.
The "R" adapter interfaces with channel adapter 8 and
addresses the odd numbered drives locally (normally)
connected to its TCU.

Introduction to the TA90 Tape Control Unit (Continued)

INTRO 30

Introduction to the TA90 Tape Control Unit (Continued)

INTRO 35

Dual Tape Control Unit Subsystem Diagram
This is a high 1evel drawing
showing theory only. For
detailed point-to-point
wiring see the machine logics.

Adresses 8 through t

Tape Control Unit 1
STI-FIPS

Channel

Adapter

t
To and from.
HSC/HSX

Tape Transport Unit

Read Data Bus Local
Raad
Data Bus R~mote
,

Write Data
Flo.'l.L. ___

CE Panel

Local
Int~r •

t
STI-FIPS
Adapter
R

Read
Oe:sc:

connection

.
"'

Channel
Adapter
B

Drive 0

Drive 1

Read Preamp

Local rRemote

Local (Remota

•
•

Remote
Inter·

Device Interconnection

T Remote

Local

[Drives a-FI

connection

Device Control Bus Local
.

I I De'lic! Control Bus Remote
.

(Drives a-F)

S~atus

De'Jice Ir.t!rconnnec!:ion

Local

4 ,..

I Remote

I
I

.. ~

4 ro.

} From other drives

To and from
} other drives

Store
Featt.:re

Adresses a through 7

Tape Control Unit 0

Channel
Adapter
A

STI-FIPS
Adapter
L

t
To and from.
H$C/HSX

.... _- - ... ---.

Write Data
.Flow- -

CE Panel

.
.J

Channel
Adapter
B

Drive 1

Read Preamp

Local laemote

•

•
Local

Local
Inter connection

(Drives 0-7)
Device Control Bus local

I I I Device Control Bus Rerrt:Jt: ......
(Drives 0-7)

Read
Detect

•

Device Interconnection

TA90 MG EC C04824

Drive 0

Local Remote
I
I

Read Data Bus Local

Remote
....
Inter.
connection

t
STI:FIPS
Adapter

Tape Transport Unit

ScatiJS
Score
Fe3ture

Remote

t1
I

} From ot"er drives

De'lice Interconnection
Local

.. .

I Remote

tt
I -.

To and from
} other drives

Read Data Bus
Remote

Introduction to the TA90 Tape Control Unit (Continued)

INTRO 35

[

Introduction to the TA90 Tape Control Unit (Continued)
Dual Tape Control Unit

Drive Attachment

Two tape controi units can be connected together for dual tape
control unit operation. With dual tape control units, load
balancing between the resources or the two tape control units is
automatically performed under control of the microprocessors in
the tape control units. When I/O operations are directed to a
drive, they can be handled in either tape control unit, depending
on the internal subsystem load.

The drives are anached to each tape control unit as shown in the
following table:

Each tape control unit will have two channel adapters, permitting
the entire subsystem to be accessible from a maximum of four
STI paths. Each channel adapter on either tape control unit can
communicate at full internal data path speeds with the data buffer
in either tape control unit. While such data movement is going
on, each tape control unit data buffer can also move data to or
from a drive. Therefore, the entire dual-tape control unit
subsystem can move data with four operations occurring at the
same time. The microprocessors in each tape control unit agree
and establish the internal data paths to be used between the
drive and the STI path. This agreement is independent of VMS
program control.

Teu 10

ADAPTER

DR ADR

BUS

9,2,4,6

locai

1,3,5,1

local

8-F

Remote

9-7

Remote

8,A,C,E

local

9,B.D.F

local

Introduction to the TA90 Tape Control Unit (Continued)

INTRO 40

Introduction to the TASO Tape Control Unit (Continued)

INTRO 40

The status store communication card provides the tape control
unit-te-tape control unit communication path. It also permits the
two tape control units to share control and status information
about all the drives in the subsystem.

TA90 MG EC C13764

Intro~uction to the T AgO Tape Transport Unit

Introduction to the TA90 Tape Transport Unit
A tape transport unit consists of two drives (drive 0 and drive 1).
The drives operate independently of each other, except for the
shared use of the tape transport unit pneumatic supply and the
tape transport unit dc power supply.

r--------------------------,

A drive, under control of the tape control unit:
•

Receives, interprets, and performs motion control
commands sent from the tape control unit

•

Sends and receives read and write data to and from the tape
control unit

•

Sends sense and status information to the tape control unit.

Device
Control Bus
. to and fram
Tape Control Unit

Tape Transport Unit Diagram

I These
are hi ah 1evel draw;
snowing theory only. For -

nQS

nt
I detari ngi 1edseepoithent-to-poi
mach; ne log; cs.
wi

Read Bu s to
Tape Control1Jnit

I
I
I
I

I
I
I
I
.- I

'. t

I
Wri te Data and
I
com mands to and
I
from next drive
I
I
I
I
I
!

Read Data from
the next drive

+
I Remote

02A·Al G2
Write
Power

02A·Al H2
Read Pre·
roo- Amplifier
~

po}_,

[

Local -'"

I I I I Remote"

02A-A1 B2
Drive
Control

•

02A-A1 G2
Write
Power

Read/Write
Head
~

Pneumatic Supply

•
t

02A·A1 H2
Read Pre·
Amplifier

u-o

Read/Write
Head

I -

Transport Assembly

I
I
I

Power
Amplifier
Board

Mechanical
Position
Sensors

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I Optional Feature
I
Loader
I .. Control

....

02A·A1J4
Write

Local

Mechanical
Position
Sensors

..
..-

Loader
Control
Card

DRIVE 1

I
I

Power
Amplifier
Board

Message
Display
Board

:l !

Transport Assembly

02A·A1J4
Write

Local

B2 .. 02A·A1
Drive
.. Control --

II I

Optional Feature

I Remote ..

-= I I I
-- I

:•

DRIVE 0

Message
Display
Board

Local

-•
- .
I
-I

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.I

TA90 MG EC C04824

Receives, interprets. and performs data commands sent
from the tape control unit

•

INTRO 45

I
I
I
I
I
I

Card
I~

I
I
I
I
I

I
L__________________________
J
I Remote

Introduction to the TA90 Tape Transport Unit

INTRO 45

Introduction to the TA90 Tape Transport Unit (Continued)

Power

Drive Control Card

Message Display

The tape transport unit ac power is suppiied by the tape control
unit. Up to 4 tape transport units (8 drives) can be connected to a
single tape control unit, and the ac power is cabled from the tape
control unit to the first tape transport unit then cabled from that
tape transport unit to the next tape unit and so on.

The Drive control card controis all functions within the drive.
Write data and commands are received by the adapter section
and are passed, under control of the microprocessor section, to
the digital servo section and the write card. Read data is read
from the tape by the read head and sent to the read preamplifier
card, under control of the digital servo section, as directed by the
microprocessor section. All motion controls are controlled by
the digital servo section, power amplifier card, and the
microprocessor section.

The message display provides the operator with visual messages
sent from the host processor or the tape subsystem. The
message display, using eight LEOs and two bar LEOs, displays
messages sent from the microprocessor through the digital
servo.

The dc power for the tape transport unit is developed in each
tape transport unit's de power supply. The dc power supply
furnishes the de power for both drives in that tape transport unit.

Pneumatic Supply

Microprocessor Section

The tape transport unit contains one pneumatic supply that is
shared by both drives. The pressure side of the pneumatic
supply consists of a pump, a regulator, and an output filter. The
vacuum side of the pneumatic supply uses the same pump and
an inlet filter.

The microprocessor section of the drive control card contains the
microprocessor, storage for the local storage register, and
associated logic ror contro! and communication.
Some external registers (XRs), the external interrupt hardware,
and most of the processor error detection and reporting logic are
located in this part of the card.

Drive Logic
The drive logic controls the data flow and tape motion within the
tape transport unit

The write card contains the 18 write drivers, the head connector,
parity checking circuits, and error checking circuits. The error
checking circuits check for open head or head cable, shorted
write drivers, and various other write problems.

Read Preamplifier Card
The read preamplifier card amplifies the 18 read signals
generated at the read/write head. The card sends the read data
to the tape control unit by way of read bus local or remote. The
bus is selected by the tape control unit.
The read preamplifier card .also provides isolation from the read
bus when the drive is powered off.

Digital Servo Section

Power Amplifier Board

The digital servo section of the drive control card serves as a
buffer and interconnection to and from the processor and the rest
of the drive. The digital servo section gathers information from
sensors, mechanical switches, and error lines from other cards
in the drive and presents these to the drive processor.

The power amplifier board accepts digital current inputs from the
processor through the digital servo, converts them to analog
signals, and applies necessary gain and phase shifting to drive
the reel motors.

Adapter Section

A drive can attach to one or two tape control units. The adapter
section of the drive control card contains two buses and the
controls that permit communication between the drive and one or
both of the tape control units.
In the two-control-unit environment, only one tape control unit is
permitted to communicate with a specific drive at anyone time.
The other tape control unit cannot access the drive until the first
tape control unit has finished its operation.

TA90 MG EC C13764

Write Card

The microprocessor performs microcode to control and monitor
control unit activity through the external registers, which are
accessed by way of the external register interconnection.

Because the drive is a microprocessor based system operating
in a real time mode and because tight control is needed to
maintain proper tape tension and tape velocity, high speed
control processing is required. The digital servo section is
designed to relieve the processor of having to do certain simple
housekeeping work.

INTRO 50

The power amplifier board uses the input from the tension
transducer to keep correct tension on the tape. The power
amplifier board also controls power on, power off, and power-on
reset

Loader Control Card
The automatic cartridge loader - loader controf card has its own
microprocessor and storage. The storage is loaded from the
tape control unit IML diskette using the "Patching Path" each
time the drive patches are loaded: Thi s code is used by the
loader control card to control the functions within the automatic
cartridge loader. The loader control card uses the information
from sensors, mechanical switches, and cards in the drive to
control the loading and unloading of the tape cartridge.

Introduction to the TA90 Tape Transport Unit (Continued)

INTRO 50

Introduction to the TA90 Tape Transport Unit (Continuedj

Introduction to the TA90 Tape Transport Unit (Continued)

Drive Transport Assembly

Motion Control

•

The drive transport contains the read/write head, the mechanical
components, sensors, and motors necessary to thread the tape,
and move Ihe tape forward or backward. The microprocessor
controls all mechanical motion in the drive transport, using the
digital servo and power amplifier to change the digital signals
into anaiog signais and to drive the motors. The sensors feed
back information to the digital servo to indicate motion errors
and tape position so the digital servo can modify the velocity or
direction of tape motion. The sensors also signal irrecoverable
tape motion errors.

The drive motion control logic is used for tape tension control.
velocity control, back hitch (reposition) control, and stoplock
(position) control.

Machine reel tach sensor B. which senses the position of the
machine reel. Machine reel tach sensor B is used in
conjunction with machine reel tach sensor A.

•

The tension control (unction provides constant tape tension,
essenliai for molion control.

Tension transducer, which senses tension of the tape. The
microprocessor uses the tension transducer to control lhe
reel motor power amplifiers.

•

Fi!e ree! tachometer (tach 2). which monitors speed and
direction of the file reel motor.

Tape Loading and Unloading
On drives without the automatic cartridge loaders tape loading is
an automatic operation. The operation starts after a cartridge
has been inserted, latched in place. and the sensors in the tape
transport have been checked by the sensor checking circuits of
the digi tal servo.
On drives with the automatic cartridge loaders tape loading
starts after a cartridge has been inserted. the load assembly
cammed down to the load position. and the sensors in the tape
transport have been checked by the sensor checking circuits of
the digital servo.
To load tape. the threader arm pulls the leader block from the
cartridge. After the threading operation begins. the machine reel
is positioned so that it can receive the leader block. A tach pulse
senses when the leader block is eontained in the machine reel
hub. Once the leader block is contained. tho tape is moved to
BOT.
BOT is the beginning-of-tape and is the first place that a record
can be written on tape.
Tape unloading begins when the Unload switch is pressed with
the Ready/Not Ready switch in the Not Ready position. Tape
unloading can also result from a Rewind/Unload command. Tape
rewinds onto the file reel at high speed until BOT is detected. At
this point tape motion is slowed to permit the threader
mechanism to pull the leader block from the machine reel and to
remove the tape from the transport The threader motor is driven
clockwise until tape path sensor A is blocked. at which point the
cartridge is automatically unlatched.
Note: On drives without the automatic cartridge loaders the
cartridge I atch should be closed when the tape drive is not
being used. (A cartridge need not be in the drive.) When
the tape drive is needed. open the cartridge latch by
pressing the Unload switch.

The velocity control provides controlled acceleration up to
recording speed or rewind speed, precise control of recording
. speed independent of the distribution of tape on the reels. and
controlled deceleration. Control is provided for both forward and
backward tape movement.
l-4----~----...;.-- Head Assambly

The stoplock (position-hold) condition is used when the tape is
stopped and under tension.

stoprock Positions
Once ioaded. the drive maintains one of three stopiock positions
in anticipation of the next command:

~~--=- Cleaner A.iiembly

Read forward stoplock, ready for a read forward.
•

Read backward stoplock. ready for a read backward.

•

Write stoplock. ready for a write.

Machine Rael -.;----~~

All of lhese stoplock positions are achieved automatically by the
drive and are based on the command just executed. At the end
of a particular command where no similar command is
immediately following, the drive always prepares for the next
command to be performed to be of the same type as the last one.
The drive therefore repesi tions to the correct stoplock to
accomplish the next (like) command. The exception to this is a
Backspace Block command. which repositions to the read
forward stoplock to prepare for a subsequent Read command.

Machine Re~1 Tach Sensor A -.;---~~

Machine Reel Tach Sensor 8 _~..;.r_.._.-..::..;....;:~-----.

Sensing devices in the drive transport area monitor tape velodty
and tension, protection status of the tape. and loading and
unloading operations. Transport monitoring is accomplished by:
•

Cartridge present sensor. which indicates that a tape
cartridge has been inserted into the drive.

•

Cartridge latched sensor. which indicates that the cartridge
is latched in pi ace.

•

Tape path sensor A. which indicates that the tape leader
block is at the file reel.
Tape path sensor B, which indicates when the tape leader
block is at the machine reel.
Machine reel tach sensor A, which senses the position of the
machine reel. Machine reel tach sensor A is used in
conjunction with machine reel tach sensor B to generate a
tach pulse.

1--

......:-_..;-- Tape Path Sensor A

1.....

Tension Transc!ucer __

Tape Transport Sensors

•

TA90 MG EC C13164

INTRO 51

Fe~d Complete Sensor
(Part of ACL Assembly

----I

Cartridge Present Sensor -';--~,--':"!

File Protect Switch _+-_______----J

-----..;.;...-....:.- File Reel
Sensor

CartridgeLatched Sensor ~:--------",.(:J

"-~- File Ree!

L~ac! ~lotor Gomplete Sensor

·(Part of ACL Assembly)

Introduction to the TA90 Tape Transport Unit (Continued)

INTRO 51

Introduction to Channel Commands
Introduction to Channel Commands
The tape control unit operates on the FJPS-60. The TA90 tape control unit executes the
channel commands described in the following channel command summary table.
The STI-FIPS adapter converts standard STI Level 1 and Level 2 commands to the
FIPS-60 commands.

Channel Command Summary
i

I CHANNEL

CO~ND

HEX
I CODE

Assign

Backspace B10ck

27
2F

Backspace File
Control Access

CHANNEL COMMAND

HEX
CODE

DESCRIPTION

Rewind

Causes the dr; \Ie to rew; nd the
tape to the load point.

Rewi nd Unload

Causes the drive to rewind the
tape and unload the cartridge.

Sense

DESCRIPTION

Reserves the addressed dri ve to a
specifi ed channe 1 path.

~au~es ~h~ d:~ ve. to m?~e ~h: tape
oaCKwara to toe last D!OCK 1D.

Causes the dri ve to move the tape
backward to the 1ast tape mark.

I used by a host processor to whi ch

Permits a specified drive to be

Data Secur; ty
Erase

Ii Causes
the dr; ve to erase the
tape to the end of the tape.

Erase Gap

I Causes the drlYe to Wrl te an

I Sense ID
,
i

Causes the lCU to send 32 bytes of

~.
•
~TT
FT~~
~
•
I..lIe ~I J- • r.:l auap.er.
SEnse UQI..C
",0 ~~

Causes the lCU to send 7 bytes of
subsystem IO information to the
STI-FIPS adapter.

Causes the lCU to send the path
state byte and the 11 bytes of
I path group 10 information to the
STI-FIPS adapter.

Set Path
Group ID

tape control unit.

Forward Space
Block

Causes the dr; ve to move the tape
forward to the next block 1D.

Forward Space
File

Causes the dr~ ve to move the tape
forward to the next tape mark.

Load Di sp 1ay

Causes· a message to be di sp 1ayed
on the message display panel and
is also used to con~trcl the
aut omat ; c ca rt ri dge loader.

Test I/O

Causes the lCU to send the status
byte to the STI-FIPS adapter.

Causes the dr; ve to move the tape
to the specified location of data.

Unassign

I C7

Re 1eases the add res sed dri ve from
the channel path group to wh; ch ; t
had been reserved.

Causes the dr; ve to wri te data on
the tape.

Mode Set

Suspend
Multi path
Reconnection

Synchron; ze

Write
83

No operation is performed.

Perform Subsystem Functi on

Passes up to 3 bytes of control
i nformati on to the subsystem.

Read Backward

Causes the dri ve to read ina
backward direction.

Read Block ID

Causes the tape block 10 to be
I, sent
to the host processor.

Read Buffer

Causes the buffer data to be sent
to the host processor.

Read Buffered Log

Causes the stored buffered log
data to be sent to the host
processor.

Read Device
Characteristics

Causes up to 64 bytes of data
containing installed feature
i nformati on to be sent to the
STI -FI PS adapter.

Read

Causes the dri ve to read ina
forward direction.

Causes a temporary connect; on
between the addressed dri ve and
the channel path that issued the
command.
I

Causes a dri ve to be set to a
II DB II spec;
fi ed operat i n9 mode.

No Operati on

I
!
!
byte
Sends
the
funct
ion
cont
ro
1
AF
I, and 11 patn group 10 bytes to the I!
I

erase gap pattern.

Locate Block

Sense Path
Group 10

I it is not assigned.

TA90 MG EC C04824

INTRO 55

Wri te Tape ~.ark

Causes the drive to be synchroni zed wi th the host processor
after a buffered operation.

Causes the dri ve to Wi; te a tape

I mark pattern on the tape.

Introduction to Channel Commands

INTRO 55

Notes

INTRO 56

TA90 MG EC C04824

Noles

INTRO 56

Contents

START 1

Contents

START 1

. . . . . 10

Maintenance Starting Point

Fault Symptom Codes Caused by other than TA90 Hardware Failures .... .
100
130
Actions for Possible Non-FRU caused Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
130
Possible Tape Media Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
130
Possible Software Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
135
Possible Channel Adapter Hardware or Firmware Problem . . . . . . . . . . . .
Possible EC Level Compatibility Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
TA90 Media Fault Determination Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description/Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1501 ation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Cartridge Fault Determination Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

140
140
140
140

Determining a Fault Symptom Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determining a Fault Symptom Code From the ACL LEOs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determining an Error Code From the A and B Faull Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determining a Fault Symptom Code From a Sense Byte Error Code . . . . . .

300

300
300
310

Action After a Fault Symptom Code Has Been Determined

325

........... .

Error Path Isolation
Error Path Sense Bytes Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Examples of Sense Data Identification of a Data Path
.......... .
Single TA90 Tape Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. ......... .
Dual TA90 Tape Control Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. ........ .

400
400
400
400

Determining the Tape Control Unit Involved

420

TA90 MG EC C13764

............ .

401

Notes

S1ART 2

TA90 YO EC C04824

Notes

START 2

Maintenance Starting Point

START 10

• See Note at bottom of page.
Begin all maintenance action here. Find the reason you're here in the left column and perform the stated action in the right column.

ACTION:
Write down any failing indications such as a "CHK XX" (XX equals a hexidecimal error code) or other
messages and indications on the drive message display for future use.

PERFORM THIS ACTION

IF YOU'RE HERE FOR THIS REASON
Service call (solid and intermittent failures).
I

Go to "TA90 Installation," see INST 1.

Install the TA90
Relocate or discontinue the TA90.

Go to "TA90 Relocate or Discontinue," see INST
1.

Inspection for maintenance agreement
quali fication.

See "General Instructions" on INSP 10 for safety
inspection procedures.

I PERFORM THIS ACTION

IF YOU HAVE THIS PROBLEM
Note: Go to ACTION: in the next column.

Device(s) failing with excessive temporary
Read/Write errors of ECC count.

MISCELLANEOUS PROCEDURES
Dismount a drive.

Go to PLAN 55

Dismount a device.

Go to PLAN 55

Operate the drive.

Go to Panel 5

Use the CE Panel with the TA90.

Go to CE/HSC 1

The tape control unit Power On indicator
is off.

-D

The tape control unit DC Power indicator is off.

Go to CE/HSC 1

Analyze sense bytes.

Go to SENSE 100

Remove a cartridge by hand.

Go to CART 10

Rep! ace a leader block.

Go to CART 20

Attach tape to a cartridge hub.

Go to CART 30

Review how to use the TA90 mainienance guide.

Go to pLAN 10

locate switches and indicators.

Go to LOC 1 (Tape Control Unit)
lOC 1 (Tape Transport Unit)

Drive operator panel messages.

Go to PANEL 30

LI~I

[!jl!J8
L

[!]lIE]
R

You suspect STI-FIPS Adapter power problems ...
If all LED's are off...

Go to "MAP 0300 - STI Power Check" on PWR
300-1,

The tape control unit Error Indicator is on or
blinking, or ...

1. If VAXsimPLUS or ERF indicate a COMTAB
entry, use the COMTAB entry. If
VAXsimPLUS provides a FRU callout,
change the indicated FRU. IfVAXsimPLUS
is not present, but ERF indicates a COMTAB
entr y . g o to START 22, entryp oint 007.

io l i

Use the CE Panei or riSC Console to invoke the GMP tests.
Note:

1S?j1:

I o·

u=-

3. GMP tests: see START 310 to determine the
FSC.

,',I

::::Ei:::2~:

I
I

Note: To read the COMTAB from the CE
Panel. go to CE/HSC 1.

.!==..- ...

If you are unable to run GMP, go to START
20.

"~.- II Ii:':

2. If changing the -indicated FRU's did not fix
the problem, or if there is no COMTAB entry,
use the CE Panel.

________________________________________________________________ 1

Go to "MAP 0400 - Tape Control Unit DC Power"
Entry A on PWR 400-1.

I!lamaamD I

If VAXsimPLUS or ERF do not indicate a
COMTAB entry and at least one of the
"Disable" indicators
is off, use the CE
Panel to access COMTAB.

Run HSC subsystem diagnostics

u "

Go to "MAP 0200 - Drive DC Power (Single
Drive" on PWR 200-1, or "MAP 0210 - Drive DC
Power (Same Symptom Both Drives)" on PWR
200-1,

See PANEL 10 for Information on IndIcators.

Go to MSG 100

100-1.

The tape control unit DC Power indicator in ON
and you suspect tape transport unit drive power
problems.

I Hardcopy analyze an error log printout.

! Go to "MAP 0100 - Power Start" Enlrv' A on PWR
. ..

::,

To find out how to use the CE Panel, see "How to use the CE Panel
with the TAgo" on CE/HSC 1.
• NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the automatic loader decorator cover from an adjacent drive for some service procedures. If it is
necessary to remove the decorative cover. go to CARR-DR 2-9.

i
I

--\1E]

TA90 MG EC C13764

EJ
Maintenance Starting Point

START 10

Start 20

START 20

Start 20

START 20

(Step eel continued)

START 20

PAGE

Start 20

1 OF

IS THE TAPE CONTROL UNIT ERROR
UGHT ON SOUD?
YN

G02

ENTRY POINTS

(ENTRY POINT C)

I ENTER THIS MAP
-------+---------------------MAP
I ENTRY PAGE STEP

IS THE TAPE CONTROL UNIT ERROR
LIGHT FLASHING?
YN

FROM

NUMBER +_==
POINT
NUMBER NUMBER_
___ - ______________
~a

_____

0010
0021
0021
e021

4
1

C
D

THE POWER ON RESET DIAGNOSTICS
HAVE EXE:UTED AND MAY HAVE
POSTED INFORMATION ON THE DRIVE
DISPLAY PODS. S~AN THE
DISPLAYS AT THIS TIME.

001
014
002
009

001

(ENTRY POINT A)

CHECK 1 ENTRY POINT.

GS3

MAP DESCRIPTION: THIS MAP IS USED
TO DETERMINE WHY THE TAPE CONTROL
UNIT ERROR LEO C~~E ON.

ARE THERE ANY MESSAGES POSTED
ON ANY DRIVE DISPLAY POD?
YN

THE FAILURE ORIGINALLY POSTED
DID NOT OCCUR AGAIN.

START CONDITIONS: YOU WERE DIRECTED
TO THIS MAP FROM START 19.
REMOVE THE DISKETTE CONTAINING THE
FUNCTIONAL MICROCODE FROM THE IML
DISK DRIVE AND INSERT THE SUPPORT
DISKETTE INTO THE DISK DRIVE.

GG4

RE~ER TO THE DIAG SECTION OF
THE MG ANO RUN DIAGNOSTIC
EGla.

NOTE: THE DISKETTE MUST NOT BE
WRITE PROTECTED. (SLIDE THE WRITE
PROTECT TAB AWAY FROM THE EDGE OF
THE DISKETTE SO THAT THE SMALL
WINDOW IS COVERED.)

SET THE ONLINE TEST/OFFLINE TEST
SWITCH TO THE OFFLINE TEST
POSITION.
PRESS THE IML SWITCH TO INITIATE
THE SUPPORT DISKETTE MICROCODE.

IMLING THE SUPPORT DISKETTE
CAUSES THE SAME SET OF POWER ON
DIAGNOSTICS TO EXECUTE AS THOSE
FOUND ON THE FUNCTIONAL MICROCODE
DISKETTE .

2 ZZ

ABC

. SET THE ONLINE TEST/OFFLINE TEST
SWITCH TO THE ONLINE TEST POSITION.
(Step 001 continues)

TA90 MG EC C13764

Start 22
START 29

START 22

Start 22

START 22

AB
1 1

1
PAGE

Z OF

I
005
THE MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED IN TWO
PARTS. ONE PART CONTAINS THE
DIAGNOSTIC WHICH DISCOVERED THE
ERROR CODE. THE OTHER PART
DISPLAYS THE ERROR CODE.

II
088
THE POWER ON OIAGNCSTI CS HAVE
DETECTED A PROBLEM BUT ARE UNABLE
TO REPORT IT I N THE CONVENTIONAL
I MANNER.

YOU MAY NOW ATTEMPT TO REPAIR THE
PROBLEM OR TO RUN FURTHER TESTS.

THE FIRST MOST LIKELY SUSPECT IS
THE INTERFACE BETW!EN THE TAPE
CONTROL UNIT AND THE TAPE
TRANSPORT UNIT.

DO YOU WANT TO REPAIR THE PROBLEM
BEING REi'ORTED?
Y N

REFER TO THE FSI SECTION OF THE
MG AND USE D4NN AS THE ERROR CODE
TO GET A SUGGESTED FRU LI ST.

806

Start 22

TO RUN FURTHER TESTS. REFER TO
THE DIAG SECTION OF THE MG AND
RUN THE DIAGNOSTIC SUGGESTED BY
THE DISPLAY.

097
REFER TO THE DIAG SECTION (POR
CODES) OF THE MG TO CONVERT· THE
FSC (POR) CODE DISPLAYED TO A
SUPPORT ERROR CODE (FAILURE 10).
THEN REFER TO THE SUGGESTED
DIAGNOSTIC IN THE DIAG SECTION TO
GET A FRU LIST FOR THE ERROR CODE.
AFTER FRU REPLACEMENT. POWER UP
WILL CAUSE THE POWER ON DIAGNOSTICS
TO RE-EXECUTE.
GO TO PAGE 4. STEP 814.
ENTRY POINT B.

AFTER FRU REPLACEMEXT. POWER UP
WILL CAUSE THE POWER ON
DIAGNOSTICS TO itE-EXECUTE.
GO TO PAGE 4, STEP 814.
ENTRY POINT B.

099
(ENTRY POINT 0)
THE POWER ON DIAGNOSTICS HAVE
DE~ECTEO A PROBLEM BUT ARE UNABLE
TO REPORT IT I N THE :::ori','ENiI ONAl
MANNER.
THE MOST LIKELY SUS?ECT IS A FAULTY
DISKEiiE OR OISK DRIVE
HAVE YOU REPLACED THE DISKETTE YET?
Y N

3 3
DE

T A90 MG EC C13764

Start 24
DE

Start 24

START 24

Start 24

START 24

START 20

PAGE

3 OF

013

018

REMOVE THE DISKETTE FROM THE IML
DISK DRIVE AND INSERT A NEW
SUPPORT DISKETTE INTO THE DISK
DRIVE.
PRESS THE IML SWITCH TO INITIATE
THE SUPPORT DISKETTE MICROCODE.
GO TO PAGE 4, STEP 014.
ENTRY POINT B.

REPLACE THE DISKETTE DRIVE.
GO TO PAGE 4. STEP 014,
ENTRY POINT B.

I
I
011

A LOGIC CARD PROBLEM IS NOW
INDICATED.

REFER TO THE FSI SECTION OF THE MG
AND USE E1ee AS THE ERROR CODE TO
GET A SUGGESTED FRU LIST.
HAVE YOU REPLACED FRUS AS
SUGGESTED?
YN
012

THE PRIMARY FRU BUCKET IS:

SEE LOC FOR LOGIC BOARD POSITIONS
(CARD SIDE).

117.115,134,135
THE SECONDARY FRU BUCKET IS:

114.118,121.119.116,120.122.

EXCHANGE FRUS.
AFTER FRU REPLACEMENT, POWER UP
WILL CAUSE THE POWER ON
DIAGNOSTICS TO RE-ExECUTE.
GO TO PAGE 4, STEP 014,
ENTRY POINT B.

TA90 MG EC C04824

Start 26

4 OF

START 26

Start 26

START 26

START 20

PAGE

Start 26

III I

I 019

014

(ENTRY POINT B)

I
I, STEP 002,
II GOENTRYTO PAGE
POINT C.
I

ENTRY AT THIS POINT IS TO VERIFY
THAT FRUS REPLACED HAVE CORRECTED
THE FAILURE.
POWERING UP AFTER FRU REPLACEMENT
OR RE-IML HAS CAUSED THE POWER ON
DIAGNOSTICS TO RE-EXECUTE.

020

CALL YOUR NEXT LEVEL OF SUPPORT.

IS THE TAPE CONTROL UNIT ERROR LED
ON?
YN
015
THE REPAIR ACTION WAS SUCCESSFUL.

REFER TO THE DrAG SECTION OF THE
MG AND RUN DIAGNOSTIC E010.
015

CURRENT REPAIR ACTION FAILED.
HAVE YOU COMPLETED ALL RECOMMENDED
REPAIR ACTIONS?
YN

917

CONTROL UNIT ERROR
II ISLIGHTTHEONTAPESOLID?

I YN
t

018

!I GOENTRYTO PAGE
2, STEP 009,
POINT D.

Ii
GH

TA90 MG EC C04824

Start 40

START 40

Start 40

START 40

PAGE

Start 40

1 OF

2
fl04

OPEN THE ACL FRONT COVER(S) AND
CHE:K rOR [KROR CO~ES iN THE AC~
LEOS.
AilE ANY ACL ERROR COOES PRESENT?
YN

ENTRY POINTS
FROM I ENTER THIS MAP
-------+---------------------MAP
I ENTRY PAGE STEP
NUMBER

_______ *__POINT NUMBER NUMBER

AN ACL IS ATTACHED

e05

~_~_.~~a~~====~==~~=

0010

RUN THE GOOD HACHINE PATH
01 AGNOST! CS (GMP).

001

SEE CE/HSC

006

001

(ENTRY POINT A)

START4G ENTRY POINT.

MAP DESCRIPTION: THIS MAP IS USED
TO DETERMINE THE NEXT COURSE OF
ACTION.
START CONDITIONS: YOU WERE DIRECTED
TO TMrS MAP ~RCM START lS.

TO REPAIR, REFER TO THE FSI
SEC7ION OF THE HG AND REPLACE
FRUS SUGGESTED BY THE ERROil CODE
POSiEO ON THE DISPLAY.

ee7
THE MESSAGE DISPLAYED MAY BE A
CHECK CODE POINTING iO DRIVE FAULTS
OR ACL FAULTS IF AN ACL IS
INSTALLED.

THE FUNCTIONAL MICROCODE MAY HAVE
POSTED INFORMATION ON THE DRIVE
DISPLAY PODS. SCAN THE DISPLAYS AT
THIS TIME.

PREFiX THE ACL ERROR CODE WITH E7
AND USE THE RESULT AS AN ERROR CODE
FOR THE FSI REFERENCE.

ACL CHECK CODES ARE
CHKEC, CHKED. CHKEE OR CHKEF.

ARE THERE ANY ACL CHECK CODES
PRESENT?
YN

ARE THERE ANY MESSAGES POSTED ON
ANY DRIVE DISPLAY POD?
YN

I a08

002

TO REPAIR. REFER TO THE FSI
SECTION OF THE HG AND REPLACE
FRUS SUGGESiED BY THE ERROR CODE
POSTED ON THE DISPLAY.

IF AN ACl IS ATTACHED, THERE MAY
BE MESSAGES IN THE ACL LEOS WHICH
ARE LOCATED UNDER THE ACL COVER.
IS AN ACL ATTACHED TO A TAPE
TRANSPORT UNIT?
YN

REPLACE THE CHAilACTERS CHK WITH eo
AND USE THE RESULT AS AN ERROR CODE
FOR THE FSI REFERENCE.

063

RUN THE GOOD MACHINE PATH
DIAGNOSTICS (GMP).

SEE CE/HSC
2
C

TA90 MG EC C13764

Start 42
C

Start 42

START 42

Start 42

START 42

START 40

PAGE

2 OF'

009

OPEN T~E ACL FRONT COVER AND RECORD
THE ERROR CODE IN THE ACL LEOS.

AN ACL ERROR IS FLAGGED BY THE
DRIVE.

TO REPA!R. REFE!~ Hi THE FSI SECTION

PREFIX THE ACL ERROR CODE WITH El
AND USE THE RESULT AS AN ERROR CODE
FOR THE FSI REFERENCE.

OF iHE MG AND REPLACE FRUS
SUGGESTED BY THE ERROR CODE POSTED
ON THE DISPLAY.

T AgO MG EC C13764

Fault Symptom Codes Caused by other than TA90 Hardware Failures

FSC Caused by other than TA90 Hardware Failures

START 100

You are here because of FSC data received after you had entered requested sense data. or by the FSI section. This is a listing of fault
symptom codes (FSC) that can also be caused by other than TAgO hardware failures. It also provides a definition of the FSC. the causes.
and the action you should perform.
Find your fauli symptom code in the FSC column (beginning on this page) and do the actions in the Action column.
Causes Other than TA90 Hardware Failures
This error could result from operating condition.

FSC Oefinitlon
The two tape control units are not at the same
ievei.
microcode
The two tape control units do not have the same
Checksums. (The two tape control units are not
at the same microcode EC leveL)
A channel transfer time-out between the adapter
and TeU occurred on a write operation.
A channel transfer time-out between the adapter
and TCU occurred on a read operation.
A System Reset was received on the last path of
a path group.

FSC

1600

1601
2200
2201
2600
3300

This error is an operating condition.

A channel command retry has been stacked or
refused by the channel after a channel adapter
command retry attempt.
The addressed drive is assigned to a path group
that does not contain the channel path on wh.ich
the command was received.

33E4

33ES

A command reject occurred because of an
invalid command code.

Action·

The EC level of the tape control unit microcode is different in a two tape control
unit subsystem. Check the diskettes and ensure they are at the same EC !eve!.
The EC level of the tape control unit microcode is different in a two tape control
unit subsystem. Check the diskettes and ensure they are at the same EC level.

Possible STI-FIPS adapter problem or overrun condition.

See ··Possible STI-FIPS Adapter Problem or Overrun Condition" on START 135.

Possible STI-FIPS adapter problem or overrun condition.

See "Possible STI-FIPS Adapter Problem or Overrun Condition" on START 135.

The HSC or STI-FIPS adapter caused a system reset during
error recovery.

1. Search your sense data for a previous record for the same device.

2. Refer to the CE/HSC section and run GMP.

Possible STI-FIPS adapter problem or overrun condition.

See "Possible STI-FIPS Adapter Problems or Overrun Condition" on START 135.

Possible software problem or STI-FIPS adapter problem or
overrun condition.

1. See "Possible Adapter Firmware Problem" on START 130.

Possible software problem or STI-FIPS adapter problem or
overrun condition.

2. If the GMP runs error-free. see "Possible STI-FIPS Adapter Problems or Overrun
Condition- on START 135.
1. See "Possible Adapter Firmware Problem" on START 130.

2. If the GMP runs error-free. see "Possible STI-FIPS Adapter Problems or Overrun

33E7

The drive is not online.

lA90 MG EC C13764

I
I

The Power OnlOff switch is set to Off.
The Online/Offline switch is set to offline.
The Drive Address switch is not set to the correct address.

Condition" on START 135.
1. Verify that these switches are set to the correct position; if not. set the switches to
the following position:

•
•
•

The Power OnlOff switch to On
The Online/OHline switch to online
The Drive Address switch to the correct address.

2. Refer to the CE/HSC section and run GMP.

FSC Caused by other than TA90 Hardware Failures

START 100

Fault Symptom Codes Caused by other than TA90 Hardware Failures (Continued)

FSC Caused by other than TA90 Hdw. Failures (Cont.)
Action

Causes Other than Hardware Failures
The Ready/Not Ready switch is set to Not Ready. the tape is
not loaded in the drive or the drive dc power supply voltages
are out of tolerance.

FSC Definition
The drive is not ready.

START 101

1. Verify that the Ready/Not Ready switch is set to the Ready position
·and that tape has been loaded; if not, set the Ready/Not Ready switch
to Ready and insert a cartridge into the drive.

2. Do one .of the following:
•

If the Ready/Not Ready switch was determined to be in the
wrong position at the time this error occurred. run GMP.

•

I
The drive is file protected.

33E9

3A10

The cartridge File Protect switch is set to File Protect.

A channel command was received before
I the
adapter firmware error recovery actions
completed after a permanent write
I were
error had occurred on a different channel.

i a channel-to-control-unit operation.

3eSe I! An incorrect byte count was detected during II Possible adapter fjrmware problem.
3F13

Information only; shows that a prevIous
permanent write error had occurred.

The adapter firmware error recovery actions did not
complete or were not started.

3F14

The drive is not online to either tape control
unit.

The Power On/Off switch is set to Off.
The Online/Offline switch is set to offline.
The Drive Address switch is not set to the correct address.

1. Search your sense data for a previous record for the same device.

The STI-FIPS adapter error recovery actions had not
completed. were not desired, or a second STI-FIPS adatper
attempted to gain access to a shared device.

If the Ready/Not Ready switch was determined to be in the
correct position at the time this error occurred, measure the
drive dc power supply voltages using a voltmeter. Reference
PWR 20 for tolerance charts. If the voltages are out of tolerance.
exchange the drive de power supply (FRU 095), then run GMP.
Verify that the File Protect switch, on the customer's volume being
used at the time this error occurred, was set to the File Protect
position.

2. Refer to the CE/HSC section and run GMP.

i See "Possible Adapter Firmware Problem" on START 130.
II

1. Search your sense data for a previous record for the same device.

2. Refer to the CE/HSC section and run GMP.
1. Verify that these switches are set to the correct position; if not. set
the switches to the following position:
•
•
•

The Power OnlOff switch to On
The Online!Off!ine switch to online
The Drive Address switch to the correct address.

2. Do the following:
•

TA90 MG EC C13764

It any of these switches were determined to be in the wrong
position at the time this error occurred, run GMP.

FSC Caused by other than TA90 Hdw. Failures (Cont.)

START 101

Fault Symptom Codes Caused by other than TA90 Hardware Failures (Continued)

FSC Caused by other than TA90 Hdw. Failures (Cant.)

FSC

FSC D.finition

Ca" ••• Olhe, than TAIO Ha,d • .,. Fail", ••

Aclio"

4200

An invalid tape-Iormat bit combination was delected in
the T A90 Mode Set command

Possible software problem.

See -Possibl. Sottware Problem- on START '30.

4204

Bil " of a mode set command, Specifying wrile dala
should be In the &dci. mode. it was issued 10 a tape
control unit thaI does nol have the &dci. lea lure.

Possible sottware problem.

See -Possible Software Problem" on ST ART 130.

I 4260
II

No channel paths In the grouped stale for this drive thai
have a path group 10 matcl'lIng Ihe path group received
as the argumenllo Ihe Assign command.

Possible soltware problem.

See -POSsible Soltware Problem- on ST ART '30.

4261

The Channel palh that issued an Unassign command did
nol have assignment of the drive.

Possible soltware problem.

4262

The Unassign command was issued and no channel
paths with path group IDs matching the Unassign
command aq;umenl have assignment of the drive.

4263

The drive is not online.

I
I

Possible softwar.e prOblem.

Sea -Possible Software PrOblem- on START '30.

See -Possible Software Problem" on START 130.

1. Verily Ihat these switches are set to the correcl position; if not sellhe swilches 10 the
lollowing positions:

The Power OnlOIl swilch is sel to Off.
The Online/Omine switch is set to ollline.
The Drive Address switch is nol set to the correct address.

·
I

·
·

The Power OnlOff switch to On.
The Online/Ottline switch to Online.
The Drive Address swilch to the correct address.

2. Do one of the follOWing:

·
·

II any of Ihese switches were determined to ~e in Ihe wrong position at Ihe time this
error occurred, correct Ihe switch settings. Refer to the CEIHSC seclion and run GMP.
If these switches were determined 10 be in the correct position at Ihe time this error
occurred. refer 10 Ihe CE/HSC section and run GMP.

See "Possible Software Problem" on START ~30.

4280

An invalid lunction-control byte has ~••n received; an
invalid function was specified.

4780

The Space File operation is not making any progress
down the lape.

4820

A Set Palh Group 10 command was received with an
invalid lunction conlrol byte in Ihe argument; bits 3
through 7 were not O.

Possible sort ware problem,

A palh group 10 in Ihe argument of the Set Palh Group 10
command is equal 10 O.

Possible software problem.

4B22

The path group 10 in the argument of the Sel Palh Group
10 command does not match the path group 10 received
in a prior Sel Palh Group 10 command over the same

Possible software pro~lem.

See -Possible Software Pro~lem" on START 130.

4823

The received path mode bit in the function-control byte
does nol match the path mode set in a prior Sel Path
Group 10 command addressed to a channel interface
with the same path group 10 as the inlerface Ihat issued
the current command.

Possible s::lftwar. problem.

See -Possible Software PrOOlem" on START '30.

4824

The received path mode bil was on. indicating multipa!h
mode. Multipath mode is nol supported by Ihis machine.

Possible soltware problem.

See ·Possible Software Problem" on START '30.

4D70

The received password lor Ihe Control Access command
is zero. Mllitipath mode is not supporled bV this
machine.

Possible software problem,

See -Possible Software Pro~lem· on START 130.

4D71

An invalid function byte has been received for the
ContrOl Access command.

Possible soltware prOOlem.

See ·Possible Software Problem" on START 130.

4D72

The password received wilh Ihe Control Access
command does not match Ihe password received during
a prior Control Access command.

Possi!)le software prot:lem.

See -POSSible Software PrOblem" on START 130

4073

A Conlrol Access commanC! attempted 10 eslablish a
password, but Ihe channel path thai issued the command
did nol have assignmenl of the drive.

Possible soltware problem.

See -Possible Soltware Problem" on START 130.

4821

START 105

Possible soltware proOlem.

Th. tape was blank or the lape had been positioned beyond the lasl written
dala.

ReIer to Ihe CE/HSC section and run GMP.
See ·Possible Software Problem· on START ~3O.

See -Possible Software Problem" on START ~3O.

Channel.

TA90 MG EC C13764

FSC Caused by other than TA90 Hdw. Failures (Cont.)

START 105

Fault Symptom Codes Caused by other than TA90 Hardware Failures (Continued)
FSC

FSC Definition
A Control Access command attempted the
temporary unassign function. but a prior
I
I command had not established a password.
A Control Access command attempted the
4075
generalized unassign function, but the
channel path that issued the command did
not have assignment of the drive.
The Perform Subsystem Command received
408D
an invalid order or fla" b teo
An invalid function-control byte has been
4E80
received.
The drive is not online.
4EBA

Causel Olher than TA90 Hardware Failures
Possible software problem.

4074

FSC Caused by other than TA90 Hdw. Failures (Cont.)

Action
See "Possible Software Problems" on START 130.

i
I

Possible software problem.

See "Possible Software Problems" on START 130.

I Possible software problem.

I See "Possible Software Problems" on START 130.

Possible software problem.

See "Possible Software Problems" on START 130.

The Power OnlOff switch is set to off.
The Online/Offline switch is set to offline.
The Drive Address switch is not set to the correct address.

1. Verify that these switches are set to the correct position; if not. set
the switches to the following position:

START 106

The Power On/Off snitch is set to on.
The Online/Offline switch is set to online.
The Drive Address switch is not set to the correct address.

I 2. Do one of the followin g:

If any of these switches are determined to be in the wrong
position at the time this error occurred. correct the switch
settings. Refer to the CE/HSC section and run GMP.
If these switches were determined to be in the correct position at
the time this error occurred. refer to the CE/HSC section and run
GMP.

The addressed drive is assigned to a path
group that does not contain the channel
path on which the command was received.

TA90 MG EC C13764

Possible software problem.

See" Possible Software Problem" on START 130.

FSC Caused by other than TA90 Hdw. Failures (Cont.)

START 106

Fault Symptom Codes Caused by other than lA90 Hardware Failures (Continued)
FSC
52nn
5343

FSC Definition
The channel command did not match.
A TCU·TCU message was invalid or lost.

FSC Caused by other than TA90 Hdw. Failures (Cont.)
Action
See "Possible Software Problem" on START 130.
See "Setting the Tape Control Unit Addresses" on PANEL 12.-

Caus.s Other than TA90 Hardware Failure.
Possible channel adapter hardware or firmware problem.
Both TCU 10 switches are set to the same 10.

•

·
5605
5AD4

The channel adapter detected a parity error
on a channel command.
A Collision Detect was sensed as the tape
controi unit was coming up.

Possible channel adapter hardware or firmware problem.

I Both TCU 10 switches are set to the same 10.

START 110

If the switches are correct, run GMP.
If the switches are incorrect:

1. IML the tape control unit (see PANEL 7).

2. Refer to the CE/HSC section and run GMP.
See "Channel Adapter Hardware or Firmware Problems" on START 135.
See "Setting the Tape Control Unit Addresses" on PANEL 12.

If the switches are set correctly, refer to the CE/HSC section and run
GMP.

•

If the switches are incorrectly set:

1. IML the tape control unit (see PANEL 7).

5880

5881

I
I

7093

7094

I 70C2

I
70C3

The buffer switch was made free because of
no activity on the channel path. Sense byte
9 contains the failing channel adapter
address.

BO = Channel adapter A
40 = Channel adapter B
The buffer switch was made free because of
no activity on the channel path. Sense byte
9 contains the failing channel adapter
address.
BO = Channel adapter A
40 = Channel adapter B
In read mode, an interblock gap was not
detected within 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) after 'gap
in'.
The status from the drive did not indicate
'beginning of tape' or 'density mark
successfully written' at 'gap in' time in a
write operation. The tape control unit ERP
will be called to rewind and retry the write
density mark operation.
A block 10 mismatch occurred on a read
forward operation. The block just read from
the tape does not have the expected block
10 sequence number.
A block 10 mismatch occurred on a read
backward operation. The block just read
from the tape does not have the expected
block 10 sequence number.

T AgO MG EC C13764

Possible channel adapter hardware or firmware problem.

2. Refer to the CE/HSC section and run GMP.
See "Channel Adapter Hardware or Firmware Problems" on START 135.

Possible channel adapter hardware or firmware problem.

See "Channel Adapter Hardware or Firmware Problems" on Stan 135.

Possible tape media problem.

See "Possible Tape Media Problems" on START 130.

Possible tape media problem.

See "Possible Tape Media Problems" on START 130.

The tape was written with the wrong 10 or a permanent write
error ERPA was ignored; or a read was done after the end of
current data on the tape.

Run GMP.

The tape was written with the wrong 10 or a permanent write
error ERPA was ignored.

Refer to the CE/HSC section and run GMP.

FSC Caused by other than TA90 Hdw. Failures (Cont.)

START 110

Fault Symptom Codes Caused by other than TA90 Hardware Failures (Continued)
FSC

FSC Definition

Causes Other than T A90 Hardware Failures

7093

In read mode, an interblock gap was not
detected within 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) after 'gap
in'.

Possible tape media problem.

I
7094

The status from the drive did not indicate
'beginning of tape' or 'density mark
successfully written' at 'gap in' time in a
Write operation. The tape control Unit ERP
will be called to rewind and retry the write
density mark operation.
~

70C2 ! A block 10 mismatch occurred on a read

I
I

rOC3

forward operation. The block just read from
the tape does not have the expected block
10 sequence number.

I A block 10 mismatch occurred on a read
backward operation. The block just read

I from the tape does not have the expected

7003

FSC Caused by other than TA90 Hdw. Failures (Cont.)
Action
See uPossible Tape Media Problems" on START 130.
I

I
I

I
Possible tape media problem.

See "Possible Tape Media Problems" on START 130.

I
I The tape was written with the wrong 10 or a permanent write
error ERPA was ignored; or a read was done after the end of
I current data on the tape.
The tape was written with the wrong 10 or a permanent write
error ERPA was ignored.

Refer to the CE/HSC section and run GMP.

Refer to the CE1HSC section and run GMP.

I
I!
1

block 10 sequence number.

A block 10 mismatch occurred on a read
forward operation in extended data format. .
The block just read from the tape does not
have the expected block 10 sequence
number.

The tape was written with the wrong 10 or a permanent write
error ERPA was ignored.

Refer to the CE/HSC section and run GMP.

A biocK iO mismatch occurred on a read
backward operation in extended data
format. The block just read from the tape
does not have the expected block 10
sequence number.

The tape was written with the wrong ID or a permanent write
error ERPA was ignored.

Refer to the CE/HSC section and run GMP.

TA90 MG EC C13764

START 111

FSC Caused by other than TA90 Hdw. Failures (Cont.)

START 111

Fault Symptom Codes Caused by other than lA90 Hardware Failures (Continued)
FSC Definition

Causes Other than TA90 Hardware Failures

Action

7141

A density mark criteria was not met after
five retries. A valid density pattern must be
detected in 40 out of 50 samples of the read
pattern register (RPR) (every 500
microseconds).

Possible tape media problem.

See :'Possible Tape Media Problems" on STAAT 130.

7142

A time-out occurred after waiting 2.5
milliseconds for the 'density separator'
(beginning of block interrupt, level 2
interrupt).

Possible tape media problem.

See "Possible Tape Media Problems" on STAAT 130.

7143

A time-out occurred after waiting 1.3
milliseconds for the 'interblock gap' that
follows the 'density separator'.

Possible tape media problem.

See "Possible Tape Media Problems" on STAAT 130.

7144

A time-out occurred atter waiting 1.3
milliseconds for 'write end' in the write
status/error (WSE) register when trying to
write a 'density separator'.

Possible tape media problem.

See "Possible Tape Media Problems" on STAAT 130.

7152

A rsad b~ck check of an -intsrblock gap·
detected that the 'interblock gap' was too
long. Maximum 'interblock gap' length is
3.0 mm (0.12 in.).

Possible tape mad:a prob!em ..

I See ·Possible Tape Media Problems" Q~ START 130_

7153

A void was detected during a read
operation.

The tape was blank or the tape had been positioned beyond
the last written data.

A data transfer time-out was detected
during a read operation. No vaiid
'interblock gap' was detected within 67
milliseconds after 'beg sync' was detected.
(The timer is not set if the subsystem is in
synchronous mode).

Possible tape media problem.

I FSC

7154

I
I

7155

A read back check time-out occurred
waiting for the 'interblock gap' following an
'erase gap'. 'Interblock gap' must be
detected with 6.1 milliseconds after the
'write erase gap' is stiirted.

Possible tape media problem.

See "Possible Tape Media Problems" on START 130.

7161

'Density separator' was not detected before
45 sets of samples were taken (1025 mm 40.4 in.).

At1empted to read a blank tape.

Run GMP.

7162

'Density separator' was detected, but no set
of samples met the read criteria.

Possible tape media problem.

See "Possible Tape Media Problems" on START 130.

TA90 MG EC C13764

START 115

I
See "Possible Tape Media Problems" on START 130.

FSC Caused by other than TA90 Hdw. Failures (Cont.)

I
I See "Possible Tape Media Problems" on START 130.

Possible tape media problem.

7159

START 115

Run GMP.

A data transfer time-out was detected
during a read back check operation. No
valid 'interblock gap' was detected within 67
milliseconds after 'beg sync' was detected.
(The timer is not set if the subsystem is in
synchronous mode).

FSC Caused by other than TA90 Hdw. Failures (Cont.)

Fault Symptom Codes Caused by other than T AgO Hardware Failures (Continued)
I FSC
7171
74nn

A read back check error occurred on the last
record.

7503

During the read back check of a record, the
microprocessor received a level 3 interrupt
because 'end sync' timed out waiting for
, Hiler
.•
c'10C ... ga...- "\1\1
11nl'\ ",i
- i 0 ;oaeanus,.
...

I
76nn

I
i

! Possible tape media prOblem.

I
i See 'Posslble Tape Media Problems" on START 130.

Possible tape media problem.

See ~Possible Tape Media Problems· on START 130.

Possible tape media problem.

See -Possible Tape Media Problems" on START 130.

I FSC Definition
When in synchronous mode. the device transfer
overran the channel transfer.

A read error occurred on the last record. A level 3
interrupt was received because 'end sync' timed
out waiting fer 'interblock gap' (100
microseconds).

FSC Caused by other than TA90 Hdw. Failures (Cont.)

Causes Other than T.l9O Hardware Failure.

Possible STI-FIPS adapter hardware or firmware problem.

! .lction
I
I! See ~STI-FIPS Adapter Hardware or Firmware Problems" on START 135.

7702

256 'erase gaps' have been read without detecting
a block or tape mark.

Tape was written with only 'erase gaps'.

Refer to the CE/HSC sec1ion and run GMP,

8100

No patches are available for this drive's EC level.

Possible EC compatibility problem.

See "Possible EC level Compatibility Problems" on START 135..

I 8101

Possible hardware EC compatibility problem.

Possible EC compatibility problem.

See -Possible EC Level Compatibility Problems" on START 135.

8102

Possible hardware EC compatibility probiem.

Possibie EC compatibility problem.

See "Possible EC level Compatibility Problems" on START 135.

8202

The Unload switch was pressed.

The operator manually unloaded a drive.

1. Search your sense data for a previous record lor the same device.

START 120

!
I
I

2. Refer to the CE/HSC section and run GMP.
8204

Manual rewind.

The operator pressed the Rewind switch.

86CO

Bit 0 of status byte 2 from the drive did not indicate
the correct interface. tape control unit

A drive or drives are set to the wrong range of logical addresses.
Drives attached to tape control unit 0 must be addressed from 0-7.
Drives attached to tape control unit 1 must be addressed from ~F.
Both Tape Control Unit ID switches are set to the same ID.

Check the drive logical address and the Tape Control Unit ID switches.

i If the drive address and Tape Control Unit ID switches are set correctly, return to the

!I procedure that sent you here and continue with that procedure.

I If the drive address or Tape Control Unit 10 switches are set incorrectly, set the

I switches correctly. Refer to the CE/HSC section and run GMP.

I
9000

Two drives with logical address in sense byte 9
and sense byte 30 are indicating the same
physical address.

Two drives may have the same physical address set in their Physical
Address switches.

Check the drive physical address switch settings for the two indicated drives.

II the physical address switches are not set to the same value. return to procedure
that sent you here and continue with that procedure.
If the physical address switches are set to the same value. change one or both
physical address switches to a unique value. Refer to the CE/HSC section and run
GMP.

A112

Refer to the CE/HSC section and run GMP.

A packet ID mismatch occurred on a read
operation in T A90 extended data format. The data
read from the tape does not have the expected
packet 10 sequence number,

The tape was written with the wrong packet ID or a permanent write
error ERPA was ignored.

A130

A butfer-to-channel transfer caused a check 2
condition.

Possible STI-FIPS adapter hardware or firmware problem,

See ·STI-FIPS Adapter Hardware or Firmware Problems" on START 135.

A170

A channel-to-buffer transfer caused a check 2
condition.

Possible STI-FIPS adap1er hardware or firmware problem.

See "STI-FIPS Adapter Hardware or Firmware Problems" on START 135.

TA90 MG EC C13764

·1

FSC Caused by other than TA90 Hdw. Failures (Cent.)

START 120

Fault Symptom Codes Caused by other than TA90 Hardware Failures (Continued)

FSC Caused by other than TA90 Hardware Failures (Cont.)

FSC

FSC OelinlUon

Cau ••• Other than TA90 Hardwar. Fallur ••

Action

A2nn

A bufter·to-<:hannel transfer caused a check 2
condition.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrun condition.

See ·STI·FIPS Adapter Hardware or Firmware Problems· on STAAT 135.

A3nn

A butfcr·to-channellransfer caused a check 2
condition.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrun condition.

ASnn

A buffer·to-channel transfer caused a check 2
condition.

I Possible host processor channel problem or overrun condition.

.! See ·STI·FIPS Adapter Hardware or Firmware Problems· on STAAT 135.

A6nn

A butfer·to-channel transfer caused a check 2
condition.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrun condition.

I See ·STI·FIPS Adapter Hardware or Firmware Problems· on STAAT 135.

A7nn

A buffer·to-channel transfer caused a check 2
ccnd:!jon.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrun condition.

A8nn

A buffer·to-channel transfer caused a check 2
condition.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrun condition.

CCOD

Fifty consecutive errors have occurred.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrun condition.

START 125

See ·STI·FIPS Adapter Hardware or Firmware Problems· on STAAT 135.
I

See ·STI-FIPS Adapter Hardware or Firmware Problems" on STAAT 135.
I

See ·STI-FIPS Adapter Hardware or Firmware Problems· on STAAT 135.
Using VAXim PLUS or ERF. look for other sense records with a different FSe for this

I tape control unit. Use the newly determined FSe for troubleshooting.
CCEE

An error occurred during a synchronous read or
write operation.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrun condition.

Using VAXsimPLUS or ERF. look for other sense records with a different FSC for this
tape control unit. Use the newly determined FSC for troubleshooting.

See "Possible Tape Media Problems" on STAAT 130.

Note: Error recovery is not performed for errors
that occur ;r. ·syitchronous mode'.
DOnn

The read status register (RSR) contains active bits.
5.6. or 7. The nn indicates which bits are active in
the RSA.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrun condition.

0584

During channel/buffer communication, a buffer
checker had detected an error.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrun condition.

DAnn

The CMS register indicates an error. where nn ""
the SCSE register.

See ·STI·FIPS Adapter Hardware or Firmware Problems· on START 135.

Possible tape media problem.

See • Possible Tape Media Problems· on START 130.

The CMS register indicates an error. where nn =
the CTXE or CPEO register.

Possible tape media problem.

I See • Possible Tape Media Problems· on SiART 130.

The STI·FIPS adapter has failed to communicate
with the channel adapter.

Possible STI-FIPS adapter hardware or firmware problem.

See ·STI·FIPS Adapter Hardware or Firmware Problems" on START 135.

ES02

The STI·FIPS adapter has failed to communicate
with the channel adapter.

Possible STI-FIPS adapter hardware or firmware problem.

Se. ·STI·FIPS AC::apter Hardware or Firmware Pro~lems" on START 135.

ESOS

The STI·FIPS adapter has failed to communicate
with the channel adapter. Possible host processor
channel problem or overrun condition. Possible
STI·FIPS adapter hardware or firmware problem.

Possible ST-FIPS adapter hardware or firmware problem.

See ·STI·FIPS Adapter Hardware or Firmware Problems" on START 135.

Possible STI·FIPS adapter hardware or firmware problem.

See ·STI-FIPS Adapter Hardware or Firmware Problems" on START 135.

Possible STI·FIPS adapter hardware or firmware problem.

See ·STI-FIPS Adapter Hardware or Firmware Problems" on START 135.

Possible STI·FIPS adapter hardware or firmware problem.

See ·STI·FIPS Adapter Hardware or Firmware Problems· on START 135.

Possible STI·FtPS adapter hardware or firmware problem.

See "STI·FIPS Adapter Hardware or Firmware Problems" on START 135.

Possible tape media problem.

See "Possible Tape Media PrOblems· on ST.~RT 130.

DCnn
ES01
I

I
I
I

ES11

I
I

The STI·FIPS adapter has failed to communicate
with the channel adapter.

ES13

The STI·FIPS adapter has failed to communicate
with the channel adapter.

ES14

The STI-FIPS adapter has failed to communicate
with the channel adapter.

ES20

The STI·FIPS adapter has failed to communicate
with the channel adapter.

ESOO

There are 100 many temporary data errors based
on Format 21 sense records from error log
message information.

TA90 MG EC C13764

I
I

FSC Caused by other than TA90 Hardware Failures (Cont.)

START 125

(

Fault Symptom Codes Caused by other than TASO Hardware Failures (Continued)
Actions for Possible Non-FRU Caused Error
Codes.

Possible Adapter Firmware or Software
Problems

Possible Tape Media Problems

The following error codes can indicate possible software
problems.

The following error codes can indicate possible tape media
problems.

33E4
33E5
Je69

47Be
7993
7994
79C2
7eC3
7141
7142

7143
7144
7152
7153
7154
7155
7159

7161
7162
7163
74nn
75e3
76nn
7792

Oann
DAnn
DCnn
ESee

Errors detected in the data-flow area of the TASO subsystem can
also be caused by the tape media. The FSC/Error Code correctly
points to the possible subsystem hardware FRUs. However,
sometimes the replacement of these FRUs does not correct the
problem. You should determine if the problem was caused by
the tape media before replacing the subsystem FRU~.
This procedure assumes that you have an error code that is
listed in the above list. This error code came from the
VAXsimPLUS or ERF. To determine if the problem could be
caused by the tape media. do the following action.
Perform analysis to determine if the problem is related to a
unique tape volume.
•

If the VAXsimPLUS analysis indicates that the tape media Is
not the problem, continue with the maintenance specified for
the product trained service representative in the product
maintenance package. or for the support trained service
representative. the additional actions specified in the FSI for
the failing FSC.

•

If the VAXsimPLUS analysis indicates that tape media Is the
problem and multiple cartridges are failing. go to Media
Contamination Fault Determination Criteria on START 140.

•

If the VAXsimPLUS analysis indicates that the tape media Is
the problem and a single cartridge is failing, go to Single
Cartridge Fault Determination Criteria on START 140.

TA90 MG EC C13764

3Fl3

4299
4294

4269
4261
4262
4289
47B9

4B29
4B21
4B22
4823
4824

4079
4071
4072

FSC Caused by other than lA90 Hdw. Failures (Cont.)

START 130

FSC Caused by other than TA90 Hdw. Failures (Cont.)

START 130

4075
4ES9
4ESl

4073

4ESA

4074

4ES8

There are error codes that can be caused by either hardware or
software problems. For example:
•

The adapter sent an illegal TA90 TCU subsystem command.

•

The TA90 hardware could have a malfunction that decodes a
correct command as an illegal command.

For these possible software problems suspect

1. New VMS releases have been installed.
2. New applications of existing programs or jobs are bei ng run.
3. Configuration changes have been made and the description
of the error code relates to assignment or path group
problems.

Fault Symptom Codes Caused by other than TA90 Hardware Failures (Continued)
Possible Channel Adapter Hardware or Firmware
Problems
The following error codes can indicate possible channel adapter
hardware or firmware problems.

2200
2201
3300
33E4
33ES
52nn
5605

58BO
58Bl
7171

Al30
A170
A2nn
A3nn

ASnn
A6nn
A7nn
ASnn

E501 (CC=3)
ES02
ES03
ES13
ES14
E520

Run ILEXER to determine that the subsystem operates correctly
with the STI-FIPS adapter.

TAgO MG EC C13764

FSC Caused by other than TA90 Hdw. Failures (Cont.)

START 135

FSC Caused by other than TA90 Hdw. Failures (Cont.)

START 135

Possible EC Level Compatibility Problems
The following error codes can indicate possible EC compatibility
problems.

810e - Microcode patches not available
B101 - Possible hardware EC compatibility
problem
S102 - Possible hardware EC compatibility
problem
There are several types of EC level compatibility problems. The
most common mismatches are:
•
•

In the drive compared to the tape control unit
In the tape control unit functional microcode compared to the
hardware.

T A90 Media Fault Determination Criteria

TA90 Media Fault Determination Criteria
Note: You were sent to this page because of a possible media
problem with multiple cartridges andlor multiple drives.
There should be a pattern of similar unscheduled service
calls.

ISOLATION

Single Cartridge Fault Determination Criteria

ENSURE HARDWARE

The hardware has been verified by running all diagnostics error
free.

This procedure should be followed for each suspected media
service call. After following this procedure, do NOT approach the
customer about a potential media problem until further analysis
is completed by the next level of support. Notify your manager at
this time of a possible media problem.

The integrity of the hardware must be established. This requires
utilization of the maintenance package to ensure there are no .
hardware malfunctions in the subsystem which could be causing
the degradation, The hardware must be able to run all
diagnostics error free.

You were sent to this page because a single cartridge is failing
for one of the following reasons:

Description/Definition

Once hardware problems have been eliminated as the reason for
poor performance, and media is suspected, the following items
need to be verified:

2. A single cartridge fails on multiple drives.

Tape media can create a number of failure modes similar to
those caused by actual hardware problems and the severity can
be significant if not properly handled. For this reason, it is
important that careful analysis and problem determination be
made if a media failure is suspected.
One failure mode is media generated debris. Debris can be
caused by minute particles separating from the tape and will
normally appear as a thin line of deposits (very difficult to see
without magnification) across the tape, the ReadlWrite head or
the cleaner blade.

ENSURE ENVIRONMENT
Temperature and humidity of both the tape storage area and the
computer room should be observed to assure they are within
acceptable limits. The operating limits are given in the TA90
Owner's Manual, EK-OTA90-0M.

Customer drive cleaning procedures should be studied. The
drives should be cleaned by the customer:

•

whenever a 'CLEAN' message is displayed on the pod

deposits transferred to and from the cleaner blade

•

every 8 hours

transfer of media particles to the ReadlWrite head

•

after every permanent RIW error

media particles left on the tape surface may cause the
tape to be lifted from the head thereby causing a failure.

•

whenever an increase in temporary errors is observed.

•

Dropping records due to debris deposits and subsequent
loss of tape position indicated by block sequence errors.

•

High temporary error rate.

t. T.l"!e maintenance package has found a physicai defect with
this cartridge such as a broken tape.

3. VAXsimPLUS analysis indicates a single cartridge in the
tape library is causing a high number of read/write
problems.
If the failure is caused by a single cartridge, notify the customer
to purge the tape from the library.

ENSURE ADEQUATE DRIVE CLEANING

Some t'ipical failure modes commonly associated with media
problems include but are not limited to:
Permanent read or write errors caused by:

START 140

If the failure is the resuit of a medi a orienied probiem, contact
your next level of support for further media analysis. Notify your
manager of a possible media problem. DO NOT notify the
customer of the possible media problem at this time.

evidenced by highly erratic drive performance day to
day
not definable to a single drive, tape control unit or
subsystem
not the result of repeat failures on a particular volume.
The following information provides some basic considerations
and guidelines relative to handling media problems.

TA90 MG EC C13764

TA90 Media Fault Determination Criteria

START 140

Determining a Fault Symptom Code
The Determining a Fault System Code procedures are written to guide you through the process of determining which sense byte error
code to use as a fault symptom code (FSC). Normally, VAXsimPLUS identifies the fault symptom code, determines the corrective action,
and prompts you to perform the corrective action. However, there can be conditions where you would manually determine a fault
symptom code. The following is a list of these conditions:
•

To develop fault symptom codes from sense records in ERF reports.

•

To determine FRUs ahead of time for a problem when you are away from the subsystem.

•

To develop multiple fault symptom codes from several sense records in ERF reports.

If you have any of these conditions, or should you choose to manually determine a fault symptom code for any reason; use the following
table to determine the fault symptom code. After you have determined the fault symptom code, return to the procedure that sent you
here.
Look for sense error codes that are used to select an FSC in the following sense bytes: (four digit error codes) 10-11, 12-13, 14-15, 16-17,
(two digit error codes) 21, and 23. When the two digit error codes (from sense bytes 21 or 23) are described in the maintenance guide
(MG). they are preceded by two zeros (example: drive error code 82 in sense byte 21 becomes error code 0082).
If You Have This Error Code
or Indication...

00 This Action •••

VAXsimPLUS not available to
provide FSC/FRU callout.

Use ERF (Analyze/Error) to manually determine your fault
symptom code.

Determining a Fault Symptom Code
Determining an Error Code from the A, B and Fault Indicators

The FAULT indicator lights to show that a potentially fatal error has been detected in the formatter. When FAULT stays lit. perform the
foilowing procedure.
1. Press and release the FAULT button. All three TA90 control panel indicators light in a lamp test. The A, B, and FAULT indicators
stay on for as long as you press the FAULT button. After you release the FAULT button, the A, B, and FAULT indicators light (blink)
to display a binary error code. The code, defined in the following table, identifies one of four areas in the formatter that may have
caused the error.
2. Record the displayed fault number.
3. Press the FAULT button again for about one second and release it. The formatter then tries to clear the error. All three indicators
light as long as you press the FAULT button or until the clear attempt is finished. If the error is cleared, the FAULT indicator turns off
and PORT SELECT A and PORT SELECT B return to thier normal meaning. If the error remains, FAULT stays on and the PORT
SELECT A and PORT SELECT B are off.
4. If the FAULT indicator stays on, run GMP (see CE/HSC).

TA90 Control Panel Error Codes
Indicator

Audible/visual

Indicator

FAULT

Possible
Cause

Off

Reserved

Use the drive CHK code as the fault symptom code. Adding
two high order zeros (example: CHK21 = 0021).

Off

Reserved

Off

Reserved

All other sense records that indicate
a single drive failure.

Look at sense bytes 21,16-17, and 10-11 in sequence and use
the first non-zero data as the fault symptom code.

Off

Buffer RAM error

All other sense records that indicate
a multiple drive failure where there
are no drive CHK codes, sense byte
21 equals 00, or mul!iple sense
records have errors across multiple
drive addresses of the same
subsystem.

Look at sense bytes 16-17 and 10-1', in sequence. and use
the first non-zero data as the fault symptom code.

Off

STI interface error

Off

TCU interface error

CE panel interface error

Host detected errors
All other drive CHK codes that are
only displayed on a single drive.

Note: See "Error Path Isolation" on START 400 to determine
the failing path if you have a dual tape control unit subsystem
or if the FSC relates to a channel adapter problem.

START 300

Note: On = indicator blinking; Off = indicator always off

Determining a Fault Symptom Code from the ACL LEOs
A two position Error Display Indicator is located on the Loader Control Card.
•

Blank: Indicates the microcode for the Automatic Cartridge Loader is not loaded.

•

00: Indicates the Automatic Cartridge Loader is functional.

•

nn: Indicates the last error that occurred on the Automatic Cartridge Loader.
Note: E7 must be added to the beginning of the nn value.

For example, if the nn value is 28, the Fault Symptom Code is E728.

TA90 MG EC C04824

Determining a Fault Symptom Code

START 300

Determining a Fault Symptom Code (Continued)
This procedure is written to guide you through the complete
process of determining which sense byte error code to use as a
fault symptom code (FSC).

001
{Basic Starting Point}

Ell3
Check for sense data froal the
tape cont ro 1 un; t NOT phys i ca 11 y
attached (NOT bolted) to the drive
wi th the dri ve CHK 82.

Do you have a drive CHK code?
YES NO

YES NO

ee2
Is sense data available?

I !14
F01"'lllat 20 sense records
are not related to dri ve CHK 82.
Dr; ve CHK 82 can be an ; nterlIittent dri ve i nterconnecti on
problem. You should troubleshoot
the dr; ve CHK 82 problem. not
the cause of the format
29 sense data.

YES NO

e03
Use ERF (Analyze/Error) to
obtain sense data. Go to 9e4.
004
Does sense byte 7 equal 2E1?

YES NO

eEls
Go to MSG lee.
006
Go to SiART 315. Entry Poi nt A.
I

e07
Does the dri lie CHK code equal 821

Determining a Fault Symptom Code (Continued)

START 310

Use 8G97 as the FSC.
Go to SiART 325. Entry Poi nt D.

I eZ2
Go to step 92e.
S23
An FSC has been determined.
Record thi s tape control unit I s address and sense
bytes. You wi 11 need thi s i nformat; on to
detennine the correct unit connection
in a two tape control unit configuration.
Use 8eS7 as the FSC.
Go to START 325, Entry Poi nt D.

For th; s tape control un; t sense data
and th; s dri ve address.
do sense bytes 19-11 equal seen
YES NO

I !18
Does sense byte 21 equal 82?
YES NO

919
Go to step 914.

008
Use the dri ve CHK code as the FSC.
Go to START 325. Entry Point D.

929
An FSC has been determined.
Record the other tape control uni tis
address and sense bytes. You
wi 11 need thi s ; nformat; on to
determine the correct control
unit connect ion ina two
tape control unit configuration.

009
Check for sense data from the tape control un; t
that is physically attached (bolted)
to the dr; ve with the dri ve CHK 82.

Is format 29 sense data availab:e
for thi s dr; ve address and thi s
tape control un; t?

Use 8007 as the FSC.
Go to START 325, Entry Point D.

YES NO

Use drive a997 as the FSC.
Ge to SiART 325, Ei'ltry Poii'lt C.

921
An FSC has been determi ned. Record
this tape control unit's address and
sense bytes. You wi 11 need thi s
i nformat i on to determi ne the correct
tape control unit connection in a
dual tape control unit subsystem.

a17

YES NO

B1B

START 310

ABO

ABC

Is format 20 sense data
available for this drive address
and tape control unit?

Determining a Fault Symptom Code (Continued)

ABO

Go to step 013.
011
Do sense bytes Hl-ll equal 8ean
YES NO

012
Does sense byte 21 equal 82?

YES NO

ABC

TA90 MG EC C04824

Determining a Fault Symptom Code (Continued)

Format 20 Sense Analysis

023

034
Do sense bytes 12-13
equa 1 00El8?

1
I

(Entry Point A)

YES jO
e35
Use sense bytes 12-13
as the FSC.
Go to START 225. Entry Point O.

Does sense byte 21 equal 82?

I
~36
your next 1evel
I ofCallsupport.

YES ~O
I

024
Does sense byte 21 equal 64. 75. A3. or FF?

I ~25

I, Do~28 sense bytes 113-11 equal
I 33E7-33E9. 82132. or 8204?

Diem na~ a non-fRU cause.
any act10n as necessary.

Perfonn

062
Use dri ve CHK code 82 as the FSC.
Go to START 325. Entry Point D.

Is the problem a non-FRU?

ES NO

963

Do sense bytes 113-11 equal seen

YES jO

Do sense bytes 16 and 17
equal eeee?

064

i
I

YES NO

I
e51

YES jO

Use the 1as t non-zero error
code that sent you to thi s
step as the FSC.
Go to SiART 325. Entry Point D.

Do sense bytes 15-17
equal BeeS?

! ; I

I I

~3e

I I

Use sense bytes Hi-17
as the FSC.
Go to START 325. Entry Point D.
031
Do sense bytes 113-11
equal 2100 or 8E136?

052
Is othei'sense da.ta a.va.ilable fOi
this tape control unit's address?

YES NO

1341
Use sense bytes
12-13 as the FSC.
Go to START 325,
Entry Point D.

YES NO

042

Do sense bytes 14-15
equal ooee
or 8E06?

032
Do sense bytes 113-11
equal 2eee or 201e?

•

YES NO

Use sense bytes 19-11
as the FSC.
Go to START 325. En~ry Poin~ D.

Use sense bytes
14-15 as the FSC.
Go to START 325,
Entry Point D.

054

~o ~o STA~T 310, _~!e~ 69~: .
r:::ll..

tnlS

•

655
Call your next level of support.

. ..

a001-

Doe5 5eme byte 23 equal 82?

TES ~O

I ~57
,

Does sense byte 23 equal 00. 64. 75. or A3?

ES iO

646

Use 8007 as the FSC.
Go to START 325. Entry Point D.
i
665
An FSC has been detenni ned.
Record this tape control unit's adcress for
this sense record. You win need this
i iif anna t ; on to determi Me the correct
tape control unit connection.

856

845
Go to step 948.

Go to START 320. Entry Point B.
and determine if any other symptoms need to be analyzed to
detennine an FSC.

'to oe'ternnne an
Tor
I I tional sense data.

044
Go to step 048.

I ~33
I

I
I

I rl-ES I:3
,
I I

YES iO

,
,.

i
I

An FSC has been determi ned.
Record the tape control un it's
address for the sense record that
does not have sense bytes 21 or 23
equa 1 to 82. You will need thi s
information to detennine the correct
tape control unit connection.

Use 8007 as the FSC.
Go to START 325. Entry Point D.

., II ~53
I.

I
.

Point D.

I 040
Do sense bytes
I I 12-13 equal 8Ee6?

o E

I asGo the
FSC.
to START 325. Entry

equa 1 013Ge?

629

950

J Use sense bytes 16 and 17

00 sense bytes 12-13

ES iO

I - YES NO

660
Go to step 061.

yES ~O

I
I YES ~O
I I ~39
i

Go to step 827.

to this step (as an FSC). see
I you
~~e F?I and dete!'l'!ine if th~ p~o-

Do sense bytes 113-11
equal 21013?

YES NO

I I

059

061
Is format 19 or 20 sense data available for
thi s dr; ve address?

zero error code that sent

63B

byt" 21 ., the 'SC.
Go to START 325. Entry Point D.

Use sense bytes 12 and 13 as
the FSC.
Go to START 325. Entry Point D.

Q ~

I ~~;~::,~, ~:~'":!.:::;:t;~

rES jO

I;: """

I
947

949

027
Do sense bytes 113-11 equal 9eaO?

I
I

Do sense bytes 12-13
equal 2000 or 20161

Does sense byte 21 equal OO?

1I 11
I I

I
~37

YES NO

START 315

Call your next 1evel
of support.

958

Use sense byte 23 as the FSC.
Go to START 325. Entry Point D.

TA90 MG EC C04824

Determining a Fault Symptom Code (Continued)

START 315

Determining a Fault Symptonl Code (Continued)
(Entry Point B)

START 320

Determining a Fault Symptom Code (Continued)

START 320

(Entry Point C)

You are here because of a repeated problem without a drive CHK
code.

This ;s fonmat 21 sense for statistical data or frequent
temporary errors.

This procedure determines FRUs and FSCs for audible. visual,
and host-cielecled problems.

Is there other fonnat 29 sense data available for this
tape control unit address?

Use the FSC provided by VAXsimPLUS or ERF. If the FSC is not
available, go to START 325, Entry Point D.

Determining a Fault Symptom Code (Continued)

YES NO

- I

a66

Are you here because of frequent temporary errors?
YES
NO
I
I
I

967

Go to Entry Point B.

969

Perform ERF analysis for temporary errors.
See MSG lee.
Did the ERF error analysis indicate any
temporary error problems?
YES NO

969

Consult with ROC or remote support
for advice/assistance.
979

the FSC.
I GoUse toESSeSTARTas 325,
Entry Point D.

Go to START 315, Entry Point A, using the fonmat 2e sense data.

TA90 MG EC C13764

Action After A Fault Symptom Code Has Been Determined
An FSC has been determined; FRUs for this FSC can now be
identified and ordered.

001

(Entry Point D)

YES jO

IF ADDITIONAL CLEANING IS
NEEDED, PERFORM THE CLEANING PROCEDURE
DESCRIBED ON CARR-OR 139. REQUEST THE CUSTOMER CLEAN THEIR DRIVES MORE OFTEN.
1.

Follow the di smount procedure on
PLAN 55 and have the customer
dismount the units needed for corrective
action.

Run GNP.

GMP passed?

Maintenance Guide (MG) FSI FRU list
Use ERF to obtain the FSC.
Look up the FRUs and possible additional
causes of failure for the FSC in the FSI
and 00, if applicable.
Record the FRU list for later use in your
corrective action. Schedule, with the customer, a time for corrective action. These
FRUs can be obtained in advance so that when
you perform the corrective action, the FRUs
are available for exchanging. Also, have
the sense data available.
Return to the step that brought you here,
and continue any remaining actions.

I
II
I
I
I

003
Is this a two tape centrol unit configuration?

YES NO

BEFORE YOU START CORRECTIVE ACTION, YOU
SHOULD REVIEW THE CUSTOMER S CLEANING
PROCEDURE. THEN DETERMINE THE CLEANLINESS OF THE SUSPECTED DRIVE HEAD AND
GUIDE ASSEMBLY AS DESCRIBED ON CARR-DR 139
(SEE -HEAD, DECOUPLER, AND CLEANER BLOCK
CLEANING PROCEDURE-). IF THE HEAD AND GUIDE
ASSEMBLY NEEDS CLEANING, CLEAN THE DRIVE
USING THE TAPE CLEANER CARTR!DGE.
(SEE THE TAge MAGNETIC TAPE SUBSYSTEM
OWNER! 5 MANUAL. EK-OiA;G-OHj.

002
Use the FRU 1i st prov; ded by
VAXsimPLUS.

I 004
Does the FSC error descr-ipti on in
rel ate to a channel adapter probl
EAD

the FSI or
em?

005

Do you wish to perform corrective action and is
the subsystem hardware (TCU or drive) relating to
this fSC available for corrective action?

Action After A Fault Symptom Code Has Been Determined

lES

I
I

Has the complete list been
changed?

TA90 MG EC C04824

i !

ele

Change all the FRUs on the 1is t
provided by VAXsimPLUS and the FSI.

011
Follow the "Error Path Isolation- procedures
(see START 409) to determine the fai 1ing
channel adapter (A-B) for the channel adapter
FRU to be exchanged.

Go to step 992.
I

Go to the FSI/EAD for tn@ FSC.

Go to step 005.

el2

I
eas

Consider the error that was detected by the GMP
to be the same error that was i dentified by your analysis.

Follow the -Determining the Tape Control Unit
Procedure- (see START 420) to determine whi ch FRUs
should be exchanged in which tape control unit.

Go to step 005.

Any IIIOTe corrective actions to be
performed?

iES
I Repair action is completed.
Return to the procedure step
that brought you here, and
continue with any remaining
actions.

Change the FRU on the list
provided by VAXs;mPLUS and/or
by the FSI.

Run GHP again.

GMP passed?

009
Repeat thi 5 procedure for each
identified error that you are to
perform corrective action on.
I

u..

T ",

A B

, 1

Run GMP to veri fy subsystem
operation and to compl ete the
end of call actions.

Have the customer mount the
drives that were dismounted.

Return to the procedure step
that brought you here, and
continue with any remaining
actions.

YES NO
ABC

I I

YES NO

896

Reinstall the FRU just changed.
C~!'1ge the next FRU on the list.

'
I
I I I

Va.,

START 325

I I

A B

Action After A Fault Symptom Code Has Been Determined

START 325

Error Path Isolation

Error Path Isolation
Note: Bits 0 through 3 have very little meaning for troubleshooting. For
troubleshooting. bit 4. and for channel adapter problems. sense byte 9
provides useful information.

The purpose of the following procedure is to identify the failing path and to determine
which tape control unit and which channel adapter (CA) to test for a problem. and which
tape control unit FRUs are to be exchanged in which tape control unit.

Bit 4 - Indicates the tape control unit that detected the failure. This bit determines
in which tape control unit the tape control unit FRUs (except the channel adapter)
should be exchanged. and to which tape control unit GMP should be run on.

1. Analyze sense byte 2 bit 4 to determine the tape control unit that detected the failure.
This will determine in which tape control unit you should exchange the FRUs (except
for the channel adapter) and to which tape control unit you should run GMP.

0- Tape Control Unit 0 detected this error.
2. Use the error description theory of the EAD or the FSI for the fault symptom code
(FSC) selected by the CE or the FSC you determined from Determining a Fault
Symptom Code" procedure (see START 300).

1 - Tape ContrOl Unit 1 detected this error.

START 400

Assume the FSC is 5CC3. and sense byte 9 is 0100xxxx. In this example. sense byte 9
indicates channel adapter B, whiCh is attached to HSC 2.
If interface or HSC problems are indicated by the FSC. or other error indicators. run HSC
and STI-FIPS Adapter diagnostics.

To determine the STI-FIPS adapter connection to the TA90 tape control unit channel
adapter, see the customer's host processor channel configuration drawing or the 110
GEN.

If the error description relates to the channel adapter or a channel adapter FAU is

identified. look at sense byte 9. of the sense record for the FSC. This will determine
the failing channel adapter (A or B) for the tape control unit identified by sense byte
2 bit 4. You should replace the identified FRU in the channel adapter identified in
sense byte 9.

Sense Byte 9 - Failing Channel Adapter Identified for Channel Adapter FSCs

When errors occur in multi-path processors or in TA90 dual tape control unit subsystems.
it may be necessary to determine the actual path to the failing device. The system error
log lists the errors of its selected CUA while the T A90 subsystem is using another tape
control unit for a data path. For exam pie, data load balancing can cause this condition.

Error Path Sense Byte Definitions

HSC Z

For channel adapter FSCs. sense byte 9 identifies the failing channel adapter (A or B )
that is in the tape control unit that detected this error. as defined by sense byte 2 bit 4.
Only sense byte 9 bits 0 through 3 have meaning to identify the failing channel adapter
for channel adapter FSCs.

Fa i 1i n9
Sense Byte 9
Channel Adapter
Bits 0-3

3. Return to the MG section that sent you here. Run GMP diagnostiCS on the tape
control unit with the failure as defined by sense byte 2 bit 4.
4. Replace aU FRUs {except the chafinai adapier"j in the iape CDniroi unii speciiied by
sense byte 2 bit 4. For channel adapter FSCs. or when a channel adapter FRU is
identified. replace the channel adapter specified in sense byte 9, in the tape control
unit specified in sense byte 2 bit 4.

Attached to

1000
0109

The tape control unit is specified
by sense byte 2 bit 4.

AClO resseo

Attached to
HSC Z
Aodr essed as
00

...,
,I
,I

SiI-FIPS Adapter

Channel Adapter

'TAPE CONiROL UNIT e

L - - ..1----1
Local

Buffer

Not

Used

Device
Interconnections

Examples of Sense Data Identification of a Data Path
Single TA90 Tape Control Unit
See Figure 1 and assume the following conditions:
•

The drive selected at the time of the en'or is drive O.

I Local II Remote j
8

+DR e

Sense Byte 2 - Reporting Path and Failing Path (Except'Channel Adapter) Definitions
Bits O. 1 and 2 - Indicates the channel adapter reporting the problem for the tape
control unit that detected the problem as specified in bit 4.
001 = Channel adapler A reported the problem.
010 = Channel adapter B reported the problem.
Bit 3 -: Indicates the tape control unit location of the channel adapter reporting the
problem.

o = The channel adapter reporting the problem is in tape control unit O.
1 = The channel adapter reporting the problem is in tape control unit 1.

TA90 MG EC C13764

When instances such as the above occur. sense byte 2 has no useful information.
Because there is only one tape control unit. sense byte 2 bit 4 will always be zero. Only
the channel adapter must be determined if the FSC error description relates to the
channel adapter or a channel adapter FRU is identified. For channel adapter FSCs.
sense byte 9 bits 0 through 3 identify the failing channel adapter.

DR 7

Poss:ble failing data path determined by system
error log sense bytes.
Actual Failing Data Path
Figure 1. Single ia~e Control Unit

Error Path Isolation

START 400

Error Path Isolation (Continued)

Examples of Sense Data Identification of a Data Path

l Indicates
Does not
that TCU 1 was the
L-

See Page 420 and assume the following conditions:
•
•
•
•

•

The drive selected at the time of the error is drive 8.
In tape control unit 1, channel adapter A is addressed as 1.
Aii TA90 channei adapters in tape controj unit Q are addressed as O~
Drive 8 is selected in tape control unit 1, however, tape control unit 0 has the least
data load. The TA90 routes the data through the channel adapter in tape control unit
1, through tape control unit O's buffer and drive interconnections, to drive 8.
An error occurs while drive 8 is processing the data. The system error log will
report the PCUA as 180. which is not the true data path.

In cases such as the above, the actual data path will be defined in sense byte 2 bit 4, and
for channel adapter FSCs the actual failing channel adapter will be defined in sense byte
9 bits 0 through 3.
For the following two examples, the data path at the time of failure is the same, and is
shown in Figure 1 on START 401. However, because each example has a failure in a
different part of the subsystem, the sense data troubleshooting information is different.
Example A:
Assume the FSC is 70E4 (buffer problem). sense byte 2 is hexadecimal 30 and sense byte
9 contains no useful information.

In some cases an error can be caused by either tape control unit. When this occurs, it
may be necessary to use the maintenance package on both tape control units.

Sense Byte 2 • 08
I) 1 2 345 6 7
o I) 0 0 1 X X X

Dual rA90 Tape Control Units

START 401

apply.

failing tape control unitv
l Indicates
the reporting channel adapter

For single drive failures, the data path will have less meaning, and GMP can be used
with either tape control unit to troubleshoot the failing drive.
Use the FSC supplied by VAXsimPlUS or by or by following the "Determining a
Fault Symptom Code" procedure. See START 300.

and tape control unit at the time of the
error, not useful for troubleshooting.
looking up the see, FSe in the FSI indicates that the problem relates to a channel
adapter error. As a result, sense byte 9 identifies the failing channel adapter. In this
case. sense byte 9 contains 0100 xxxx and indicates the channel adapter is for channel B
in tape control unit' (as defined by sense byte 2 bit 4).
For any other FSCs in sense data, run GMP on the tape control unit specified by sense
byte 2 bit 4. For any other error condition. (audible. or visual), run GMP on the tape
control unit with the error condition,
•

Run HSC diagnostics to the identifie~ tape control unit channel adapter as
determined for channel adapter FSCs by sense byte 2 bit 4, and sense byte 9, in the
sense data or to the tape control unit and channel adapter connected to the host
processor that reported the host detected error. When a failure is found, isolation
between the tape control unit and the host processor channel or cables must be
determined. Use diagnostics as follows:
Run HSC (llEXER. IlTAPE) diagnostics.
Run STI-FIPS adapter diagnostics.

Sense Byte 2 = 30
G1 2 3 4 5 6 7
e 0 0 0 0 XXX

I
l

lL
Does not apply.
Indicates that TCU 0 was the

Run GMP diagnostics.
To determine which tape control unit is tape control unit 0 and which is tape control unit
1. look at the position of the TeU O/TCU 1 switch on the tape control unit. (See lOe 1).

failing tape control unit.
Indicates the reporting channel adapter
and tape control unit at the time of the
error, not useful for troubleshooting.

looking up the 70E4 FSC in the FSI indicates that the problem relates to a buffer error.
As a result. sense byte 9 has no useful meaning. In this case, all tape control unit FRUs
identified by the 70E4 FSC are in tape control unit 0, as defined by sense byte 2 bit 4.
Example B:
Assume the FSC is 5eC' (channel adapter problem). sense byte 2 is hexadecimal 08 and
sense byte 9 contains 0100xxxx.

TA90 MG EC C13764

Error Path Isolation (Continued)

START 401

Determining the Tape Control Unit involved

Determining the Tape Control Unit Involved

This nowchart determines which FRUs are exchanged in which
tape control unit, in a 2 tape control unit configuration, and in
which channel ildapter the channel adapter FRU should be
exchanged.

Determining the Failing TCU

elis

In the tape control unit specified
In sense byte Z bit _.
replace the channel
adapter fRU In the channel
adapter specl flt!d In sense
byte 9 bl ts &-3.

001 (Entry Point A)
Does the fSC equa I soen

YIES

909
Rep I ar.e fRU, 'n TeUl.

Use the following information to determine which is the failing
tape control uni t:
For any problem, the failing tape control unit is specified by
sense byte 2 bit 4.
Use the error description from Ihe EAO or the FSi.
If the error description indicates a channel adapter problem.
sense byte 9 (indicates the failing channel adapter). This is
the failing channel adapter that should be exchanged when a
channel adapter FRU is called out
For single drive failures, GMP can be used with either tape
control unit to troubleshoot the failing drive.

•

alB
Replace fRUs In lCU8.

882
Doe!; the fSC equa 1 a CIIK code or Oenn?

YES 110

184
Do sense I>ytes 10 and 11 or
12 and 13 equa I 2000?

START 420

81-1
Rep;,,,:e FRiis ;'t tl:e fallln9 drIve.
ane leu FRUs In the TeU that
detected an error.

SIS
Any tape contr01 unit FROs ca1led out are
for the tape contro1 unit specified by
this tape cnntrnl unit's address.

All Tape Control Unl t a
Channe I Adap t ers
Addressed as a

All rape Control
Un it 1 Chan 1\ el
Adapters Arldrened
as I.

ees

Do sense bytes 19 and 11 or
12 and 13 equal 2019?

~ I

966
Use sense byte 2 to fi nd
the failing path.
See START 488.

Local

See the fSI for the description of the fai ling
FSC.
Does the FSC relate to a
channel adapter probletl?
f.S

ABC

. - -- TAPE CONTROl lIIIlT 0

YES 110

jD
e07
Unless otherwise speel fled
by the FRO 1is t. exchange
all the tape contra 1 uni t
uni t FRIk sped ned by
sense byte 2 bl t 4.

Channe I Adapters

ITAPE CONTROL UNIT 1
Burrer
I

I Local

Rellote

Re_ote

Device InterconnecUons

_1
I

L __ .,

local

RellOte

local ;

ORa

'DR 8

DR7

DR F

"f!lBte

Failing Data . Path AssUlled
Actual Fa"Ing Data Path (As Established by the load
Balancing). and detailed In sense data
Figure 1. Dual Tape Control Units

TA90 MG EC C13764

Determining the Tape Control Unit Involved

START 420

Contents

CART 1

Contents

CART 1

Cartridge Description

Cartridge Removal by Hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Procedure A, Drives Without Automatic Cartridge.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Loader
Procedure B, Drives With Automatic Cartridge
10
Loader
Identifying the Cartridge and/or Tape Condition
10
.. n ..
Example of a Leadai Block Sapaiatad From the Magnatic Tapa
IV-I
Example of Magnetic Tape Pulled Out of the Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Example of the Leader Block and Threader Pin in the Machine Reel Hub . . . . . 10-2
Example of the Leader Block and Threader Pin Stopped in the Tape Path
10-2
Example of the Leader Block and Threader Pin at the Cartridge Latch Assembly 10-3
Example of Operation Stopped With Tape on the Machine Reel . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Leader Block and Threader Pin in the Machine Reel Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Procedure A, Drives Without Automatic Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Loader
Procedure B, Drives With Automatic Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Loader
Leader Block and Threader Pin Stopped in the Tape Path . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . 14
Procedure A, Drives Without Automatic Cartridge ..
14
Loader
Procedure e, Drives With Automatic Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Loader
Leader Block and Threader Pin at the Cartridge Latch Assembly
. . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Procedure A, Drives Without Automatic Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Loader
Procedure B, Drives With Automatic Cartridge
. . . . . . . . . 16
Loader
Leader Block Replacement Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Magnetic Tape Attachment Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Procedure to Determine if the Cartridge Caused the Failure

TA90 MG EC C04824

. . . . . . . . . . . 40

Notes

CART 2

TA90 MG EC C04824

Notes

CART 2

(

Cartridge Description

CART 5

A magnetic tape cartridge is used in the TA90 subsystem. Within
the cartridge is:
•

A single reei of magnetic tape

•

A leader block

•

The cartridge file protect mechani sm

•

The clutch surface.

!Home Po,ition! ~//

The leader block
is attached to the end of the magnetic tape.
During the threading operation, the leader block is pulled out of
the cartridge by the threader pin and moved along the tape path
to the machine reel.

D Leader Block

/,/

I'~/

fY{-';;::
~.~

(With Magnetic",
Tape Attached)

The cartridge file protect mechanism f) is a thumbwheellhat is
moved by hand to ei ther the File Protected or the Not File
Protected position. A white dot on the face of the thumbwheel
indicates that the cartridge is file protected.
The clutch surface
the tape reel.

II Leader Block

-..=,.-"

.":,.~ ",

;

II is engaged by the file reel clutch to rotate
• Front

On the outside of the cartridge housing can be found:
•

Space for the volume identification, which is at the rear of
the cartridge housing.

•

Cartridge manufacturing information, which is stamped on
the bottom of the cartridge housing.

Top View
Top View

EJ Clutch

~urface

fJ Thumbwheel
F"ile Protect
(File Protected)

fJ Thumbwheel
File Protect
(Not File Protected)

Front

Cartridge
Manufacturing
Information

Top View

Bottom View

TA90 MG EC C13764

Cartridge Description

CART 5

Cartridge Removal by Hand
This procedure aids you in removing a cartridge from a drive
when it cannot be removed following an unload operation.
Use this page and the following pages as an aid in determining
the condition of the cartridge andlor magnetic tape. After you
have determined the condition, you will be directed to a
procedure that will aid you in removing the cartridge.

Procedure A, Drives Without Automatic Cartridge
Loader
1).

Note: It may take up to 3.5 minutes for the cartridge to

Notes:

1. For drives without the automatic cartridge loader go to
procedure A.

2. For drives with the automatic cartridge loader go to
procedure 8.

3. If the cartridge latch
opens and you can remove the
cartridge, do one of the fOllowing:

•

Using a different blank cartridge, run GMP.

•

Return to the MAP or procedure that sent you here.

4. If the latch does not open and move the cartridge into
position for removal, go to step 1 of "Identifying the
Cartridge and/or TaDe Condition" on this page.

CART 10

Identifying the Cartridge andlor Tape Condition
Perform the following steps to determine the cartridge and/or
tape condition:

,. Remove a/l cartridges from the input stack, see lOC 1.

rewind and unload.
First, if you haven't already done $0, attempt to remove the
cartridge under power using the following procedure:

Procedure 8, Drives With Automatic Cartridge
Loader

1. Set the drive Ready/Not Ready switch to Not Ready (see lOC

2. Press the drive Unioad swiich (see LOC 1).

Before You Begin

Cartridge Removal by Hand

2. Remove a/l cartridges from the output stack, see lOC 1.

1. Set the Online/Offline switch to Offline (see lOC 1).

3. Set the mode selection switch to Manual, see lOC 1.
4. Set the drive Ready/Not Ready switch to Not Ready, see lOC

2. Go to CARR-DR 8 for the procedure to power
the tape transport unit.

the drive or

. 5. Press the drive Unload switch, see LOC 1.
Note: It may take up to 3.5 minutes for the cartridge to
rewind and unload.

6. If the 'feed assembly movesJhe cartridge back to the feed
and you can rerrtove the cartridge, do one of the
station
following:

•

Using a different blank cartridge, run GMP.

•

Return to the MAP or procedure that sent you here.

3. Open the drive drawer and remove the drive safety cover
(see CARR-DR 2-5).

4. Inspect the drive for the cartridge andlor tape conditions
shown on CART 10-1, CART 10-2, and CART 10-3. Match the
cartridge/tape condition with the example and follow the
directions given with that example.

7. If the feed assembly does not move the cartridge into
POSition for removal, go to step 1 of the Identifying the
Cartridge and/or Tape Condition on this page.

Cartridge latch

fa Feed Station

Drives without Automatic Cartridge Loader

Drives with Automatic Cartridge Loader

TA90 MG EC C04824

Cartridge Removal by Hand

CART 10

(

Cartridge Removal by Hand

Cartridge Removal by Hand (Continued)

CART 10-1

Example of a Leader Block Separated From the Magnetic Tape

Example of Magnetic Tape Pulled Out of the Cartridge

If the cartridge/tape condition matches this example, do the "Leader Block Replacement Procedure" on CART 20.

If the cartridge/tape condition matches this example, the magnetic tape has pulled out of the cartridge and has wound onto the machine
reel. Do the -Magnetic Tape Attachment Procedure" on CART 30.

Machine
Reel

Magnetic

Tape ----+--Ul~

reS

Cartridge
Latch
Assembly

Cartridge
Latch

~AssemblY

Top View

TA90 MG EC C04824

Top View

Cartridge Removal by Hand

CART 10-1

Cartridge Removal by Hand

Cartridge Removal by Hand (Continued)

CART 10-2

Example 01 the Leader Block and Threader Pin in the Machine Reel Hub

Example of the Leader Block and Threader Pin Stopped in the Tape Path

If the cartridge/tape condition matches this example, the leader block and threader pin are in the machine reel hub. Do the "Leader
Block and Threader Pin in the Machine Reel Hub" procedure on CART 12.

If the cartridge/tape condition matches this example, the leader block and threader pin have stopped in the tape path between the
machine reel hub and the cartridge latch assembly. Do the "Leader Block and Threader Pin Stopped in the Tape Path" procedure on
CART 14.

Magnetic
_ Tape

Machine
Reel
Hub ____-.!_

Cartridge
Latch

~AssemblY

Top View

TA90 MG EC C04824

wAssemblY

Top View

Cartridge Removal by Hand

CART 10-2

Cartridge Removal by Hand (Continued)

Cartridge Removal by Hand

CART 10-3

Example of the Leader Block and Threader Pin at the Cartridge Latch Assembly

Example of Operation Stopped with Tape on the Machine Reel

If the cartridge/tape condition matches this example, the leader block and threader pin are at the cartridge latch assembly (home
position), but the interlock has not rotated away from the latch. Do the "Leader Block and Threader Pin at the Cartridge Latch Assembly·
procedure on CART 16.

If the cartridge/tape condition matches this example. the operation has stopped with tape on the machine reel. Do the "Leader Block and
Threader Pin in the Machine Reel Hub" procedure on CART 12.

Cartridge
Latch

'h==:;:::....::::::::===~===::;:1y Assembly

Interlock

Latch
Assembly

Top View

TA90 MG EC C04824

Top View

Cartridge Removal by Hand

CART 10-3

Cartridge Removal by Hand (Continued)
Leader Block and Threader Pin In the M~chine
Reel Hub
Perform the following steps to remove the cartridge by hand
when the leader block and threader pin are still in the m~r.hine
reel hub.

Procedure A, Drives Without Automatic Cartridge
Loader
1. Press down on the latch assembly
latch.

to open the cartridge

2. If the latch opens and the cartridge has moved into position
for removal, remove the cartridge and return to the MAP or
procedure that sent you here.

1. Find the file reel motor shaft
Attach tho t::lPO r~lnoval
tool
to your socket wrench handle

2. From the bottom of the drive, slide the tape remov~1 tool
through the slot in the air baffle and onto the lile reol motor
shafl
3. Turn the tool clockwise (as seen from the top of thl) drive) to
wind the tape into the cartridge. Warning: 00 not touch the
magnetic tape because you may damage it and arr~ct tape
guiding.

If the machine reel motor binds so that the file re~1 lnotor
cannot move the tape, place your finger on the m;'lr.hine reet
hub
as shown.

3. Look at the top of the latch assembly and find the pivot
position
where the receiver
and the interlock
overlap. Move the pivot so the interlock rotates away from
the latch assembly, as shown

IJ
1IiJ.

4. Press down on the latch assembly
latch.

CART 12

Cartridge Removal by Hand

CART 12

Procedure 8, Drives With Automatic Cartridge
Loader
1. Remove all cartridges from the input stack, see LOC 1.
2. Remove all cartridges from the output stack, see LOC 1.

If the latch does not open, go to step 3.

Note: See CART 13 ;or the ioiiowlng iocations.
CAUTION:
The motor and shaft may be hot.

Cartridge Removal by Hand

m to open the cartridge

3. Set the mode selection switch to Manual. see LOC 1.

4. Turn the knurled knob
on the load motor
counterclockwise (as viewed from the end of the motor) "ntil
the latch is fully raised.

5. Place your finger on the cartridge at the point indicated

and push toward the front of the machine until the cartridge
can be removed from the feed assembly.

6. Continue the repair action by returning to the MAP or
procedure that sent you here.

If the latch does not open, request aid 'rom your next lewl of

..................
.........,........

5. If the latch bar opens and the cartridge has moved into
position for removal, remove it and return to the MAP or
procedure that sent you here.

4. Move the hub counterclockwise, and at the same time turn
the file reel motor shan clockwise to move the tape.

5. Turn the hub until the file reel motor shaft is free tf' turn.
6. Continue to turn the file reel motor shaft until the leader
is in position to leave the machine reel hub as
block
shown.

7. Find the threader arm pivot point
above the d'rp.ader
assembly. Move the arm clockwise and at the S301P. time
rotate the file reel motor shaft clockwise until the I~ader
block is in the cartridge.
The threader pin will move the receiver
block is in the cartridge.

IJ when the leader

Notes:
a. For drives with the automatic cartridgA loader go to
proce-:ftJre B.
b. For drives without the automatic cartridge lo~rl'-)r go to
procedure A.

TA90 MG EC C13164

Cartridge Removal by Hand (Continued)

II File Reel

Cartridge Removal by Hand (Continued)

"'B

Receiver

Motor Shaft

fka:::
.
~
III

. ijW ~

Load Motor

CART 13

Tape Removal

Wrench
Handle

Top View

Interlock

U~(--~\¥

LJ~(-_. .\jJ
.

Top View

Cartridge
Latch
Assembly

Top View

Knurled Knob

Threader
Pin

1m The
Receiver And Interlock In
Correct Position
iii Pivot
position
Cartridge Latch Assembly

Load Assembly (Drives With Automatic Cartridge Loader)

TA90 MG EC C04824

Cartridge Removal by Hand (Continued)

CART 13

Cartridge Removal by Hand (Continued)
Leader Block and Threader Pin Stopped In the
Tape Path

Cartridge Removal by Hand (Continued)

Procedure A, Drives Without Automatic Cartridge
Loader

1m to open the cartridge

Perform the following sleps to remove the cartridge by hand
when the leader block and threader pin have slopped in the tape
path between the machine reel hub and the cartridge latch
assembly.

t. Press down on the latch assembly
latch.

Note: See CART 15 for the following locations.

2. If the latch opens and the cartridge has moved into position
for removal. remove the cartridge and return to the MAP or

CAUTION:
The motor and shaft may be hot

II.

2. Find the threader arm pivot point
above the threader
assembfy. Move the threader arm clockwise and at the
same time turn the file reel motor shaft clockwise (as seen
from the top of the drive) to wind the tape into the cartridge.

3. Look at the lop of the iatch assembly and find the pivot
position
where the receiver
and the interlock
overl ap. Move the pivot so the interlock rotates away from
the latch assembly. as shown

II
II.

Procedure B, Drives With Automatic Cartridge
Loader
1. Remove all cartridges from the input stack, see LOC 1.
2. Remove all cartridges from the output stack. see LOC 1.

If the latch does not open, go to step 3.

procedure that sent you here.

1. Find the file reel motor shaft
Attach the tape removal
From the bottom
tool fJ to your socket wrench handle
of the drive, slide the tape removal tool through the slot in
the air baffle and onto the file reel motor shaft.

CART 14

3. Set the mode selection switch to Manual, see LOC 1.

4. Turn the knurled knob
on the load motor
counterclockwise (as viewed from the end or the motor) until
the latch is fufly raised.

5. Place your finger on the cartridge at the point indicated
and push toward the front of the machine until the cartridge
can be removed from the feed assembly.
6. Continue the repair action by returning to the MAP or
procedure that sent you here.

3. Continue winding the tape into the cartridge until the leader
block
is in the cartridge.

Notes:

a. The threader pin will move the receiver
leader block is in the cartridge.

D when the

b. For drives with the automatic cartridge loader go to
procedure B.
c. For drives without the automatic cartridge loader go to
procedure A.

TA90 MG EC C13764

Cartridge Removal by Hand (Continued)

CART 14

Cartridge Removal by Hand (Continued)

i
K

Threader

EJ File Reel

Arm
Pivot Point

Motor Shaft

l~,f'-----\

fJ Ta.,. Removal

j~ 1J~:et

~~ ~

Load Motor

CART 15

"----1IJ

Wrench
Handle

)

Receiver

Interlock

Cartridge

Top View

Latch
Assembly

Top View

Knurled Knob

Threader
Pin

II Receiver And Interlock In
Th. Correct Position

ElReciever

Cartridge Latch Assembly

Load Assembly (Drives With Automatic Cartridge Loader)

TA90 MG EC C04824

Cartridge Removal by Hand (Continued)

CART 15

Cartridge Removal by Hand (Continued)

Leader Block and Threader Pin at The Cartridge
Latch Assembly

Procedure A, Drives Without Automatic Cartridge
Loader

Perform the following steps to remove the cartridge by hand
when the leader block and threader pin are at the cartridge latch
assembly (home position), but the interlock has not rotated away
from the latch.

1. Press down on the latch assembly
latch.

II to open the cartridge

If the latch does not open, request aid from your next level of
support.

Note: See CART 17 for the following locations.

1. Look at the top of the latch assembly and find the pivot
position
where the receiver
and the interlock
overlap.

2. Move the pivot so the interlock rotates away from the latch
assembly, as shown

II.

2. If the latch opens and the cartridge has moved into position
for removal. remove the cartridge and return to the MAP or
procedure that sent you here,

CART 16

Procedure S, Drives With Automatic Cartridge
Loader
1. Remove all cartridges from the input stack. see LOC 1.

2. Remove all cartridges from the output stack, see LOC 1.

3. Set the mode selection switch to Manual. see LOe 1.

4. Turn the knurled knob
on the load motor
counterclockwise (as viewed from the end of the motor) until
the iatch is fully raised.

5. Place your finger on the cartridge at the pOint indicated
and push toward the front of the machine until the cartridge
can be removed from the feed assembly.

Noles:
a. For drives with the automatic cartridge ~oader go to
procedure B.

6. Continue the repair action by returning to the MAP or
procedure that sent you here.

b. For drives without the automatic cartridge loader go to
procedure A.

TA90 MG EC C04824

Cartridge Removal by Hand (Continued)

CART 16

(

Cartridge Removal by Hand (Continued)

Cartridge Removal by Hand (Continued) .

CART 17

Receiver

Cartridge
Latch
Assembly

Top View·

Load Motor

Threader

II The
Receiver And Interlock In
Correet Position

BReciever

Cartridge Lltd'l Assembly

Load Assembly (Drives With Automatic C.rtridge Loader)

TA90 MG EC C04824

Cartridge Removal by Hand (Continued)

CART 17

Leader Block Replacement Procedure
Perform the following steps to replace the leader block when it
has separated from the magnetic tape.
Note: See CART 20 and 21 for the following locations.
Warning: This procedure should be used only when data must
be copied onto another cartridge. Use of this procedure may
affect the performance of trle leader block during threading and
unloading. Recommend that the customer destroy the cartridge
after the data has been copied.
The use of any tool to remove the customer's tape may cause
damage to the tape. inform the customer before continuing with
this procedure.

Leader Block Replacement
1. Remove the leader block

2. Move the threader arm fJ clockwise until the threader pin
is at the cartridge and causes the receiver

II to move.

3. On drives with the automatic cartridge loaders go to CART
14 for the procedure to remove the cartridge by hand. and
when completed return to step 5.
On drives without the automatic cartridge loaders press
to open the cartridge latch.
down on the latch assembly

II to release the clutch in the cartridge.

Then turn the tool to unwind about 12 inches of tape from the
cartridge. Use care so as not to damage the tape.

6. Remove the clutch tool.
7. Cut the tape end so that it is 90 0 to the tape edge.
8. Place a new leader block in the cavity
tool

Ii! .

9. Place the tape so that the inside (the side facing the center of

and over the
the cartridge) is uP. in the guide groove
leader block. Move the end of the tape against the end of the
guide cavity.

10. Close the insert guide as shown

II. and then place the

ID into the opening of the guide.
11. Close the insertion lever II until it touches the insert pin.

17. Put the leader block in the cartridge.

18. Using the clutch tool carefully turn the tape reel to tighten
the tape inside the cartridge.

19. Remove the clutch tool.

insert pin

20. Continue the repair action by returning to the MAP or
procedure that sent you here.

12. Push on the handle of the insertion lever to force the insert
pin and the tape into the leader block.

4. Remove the cartridge.
5. Use the clutch tool

Do not damage the edges of the tape because edge damage can
affect tape guiding.

D from the threader pin.

CART 20

II of the attachment

13. Open the insertion lever and the insert guide.
14. Remove the leader block from the attachment tool.

15. Make sure that edges of the tape are aligned with the edges
of the leader block. If the edges are not aligned. go back to
.
step 7 and repeat the procedure.
16. Use the clutch tool to wind the tape back into the cartridge.

Interlock

Top View

TA90 MG EC C04824

Leader Block Replacement

CART 20

Leader Block Replacement

CART 21

Leader Block Replacement Procedure (Continued)

•

II Clutch
- - - - . . ~It~~
Tool
~l

Cartridge Latch Assembly

m Pin
Insert

Insertion
Lever

Insert Guide
(Open)

DGuide Groove

TA90 MG EC C04824

Leader Block Replacement

CART 21

Magnetic Tape Attachment Procedure
Perform the following steps when the end of the magnetic tape
has pulled out of the cartridge and has wound onto the machine
reel. Warning: This procedure should be used only when data
must be copied onto another cartridge. Use of this procedure
may affect the performance of the leader block during threading
and unloading. Recommend that the customer destroy the
cartridge after the data has been copied.
The use of any tool to remove the customer's tape may cause
damage to the tape. Inform the customer before continUing with
this procedure.
Do not damage the edges of the tape because edge damage can
affect tape guiding.

Magnetic Tape Attachment
1. Pull the tape by hand along the tape path until it is at the
opening to the cartridge.
Note: If the machine reel motor binds and does not allow
the tape to move, place your finger on the machine reel hub
as shown. Move the hub counterclockwise, and at the
same time move the magnetic tape.

2. Attach a 5 centimeter (2-inch) piece of double-stick
cellophane tape to the shiny side of the magnetic tape.
Leave a 2.5 centimeter (1-inch) overlap of cellophane tape.

8. Set the Drive Power switch or the ac power circuit breaker to
On (see LOC 1).

CAUTION:
The motor and shaft may be hot.

II.

CART 30

4. Find the file reel motor shaft
Attach the tape removal
tool
to your socket wrench handle

9. Install the front safety cover (see CARR-DR 2-2 or 2-4) if
removed.

5. From the bottom of the drive, slide the tape removal tool
through the slot in the air baffle and onto the file reel motor
shaft.

10. Press the Unload switch to fully wind the tape into the
cartridge. If the tape does not fully wind into the cartridge.
request aid from your next level of support.

6. Turn the tool clockwise (as seen from the top of the drive) to

11. Remove the cartridge from the drive.

II .

Attach the protruding end of the cellophane tape to the
eraser end of a pencil or similar object.

wind the magnetic tape onto the cartridge. Make at least
one complete revolution of the hUb.

Note: Make sure the cartridge is in the latched position.

Note: If the cellophane tape pulls off the hub, attach the
cellophane tape again.

12. Continue the repair action by returning to the MAP or
procedure that sent you here.

3. Insert the pencil and the tape with the cellophane tape into
the cartridge opening and attach the cellophane tape to the
cartridge hub
Remove the pencil without disturbing the
cellophane tape that is attached to the hub.

fJ .

7. Rotate the machine reel hub counterclockwise, and at the
same time rotate the file reel motor shaft clockwise to make
it easier to wind the tape onto the cartridge hub.

D Machine
Reel Hub

. . Tape Removal

Top View

TA90 MG EC C04824

Tool

~~B~kel

Wrench
Handle

Magnetic Tape Attachment

CART 30

Cartridge Failure Determination

Procedure to Determine if the Cartridge Caused the Failure
This page contains the steps needed to determine if the drive
failure is caused by a cartridge. Follow the procedure on this
page for the CHK Codes you have.

CHK14
CHK 14 occurs when the drive times out while trying to remove
tape slack (!cose wraps) at the beginning of the load operation,
before the thread operation starts. The file reel motor is slowly
turned backwards until it is stopped by the tape which is attached
to the leader block.
CHK 14 can be caused by a cartridge if:
•

There are excessive loose wraps in the cartridge.

•

The tape is not attached to the leader block.

1. Load a cartridge, other than from the cartridge that caused
the original failure on the drive.

CHK25

CHK2B

CHART A

CHK 25 occurs when the drive threading mechanism is slow or
stalled during an unload operation, or the leader block is not
attached during a load retry.

CHK 2B occurs when the drive times out while trying to remove
tape slack after tape tension is lost as a result of a power failure
or a device hard error condition. The file reel motor is slowly
turned backwards until two machine reel revolutions have been
detected. Then an unload operation is performed automatically.

Press the Unload button and remove the cartridge from the drive

CHK 25 can be caused by a cartridge if the leader block is loose
when the cartridge is loaded.

CHK 28 can be caused by a cartridge if:
If the leader block is loose, the threader pin doesn't catch the
leader block when the load operation starts. When the drive tries
to recover, it cannot return to the home position because the
leader block is in the way.

CHK 21 occurs when the drive threading mechanism is slow or
stalled. This can occur at the time the leader block is being put
into the slot in the machine reel.
CHK 21 can be caused by a cartridge if:
•

The leader block is not attached to the tape correctly.

•

The leader block is damaged (burrs or marks).

•

The cartridge clutch is sticking.

CHARTB

The leader block is not attached to the tape.

•

The cartridge clutch is sticking.

Remove the cartridge from this drive and load the cartridge that
failed into several different drives.

•

The tape breaks or is damaged.

Does that cartridge fail on other drives?

1. Load a cartridge, other than from the cartridge that caused
the original failure on the drive.

•

Some foreign object is between the file reel and the
cartridge.

YES NO

2. Does CHK 25 appear on the drive display?

1. load a cartridge other than the cartridge that caused the
origj.nal failure on the drive.

YES - Go to Chart A.
NO - Go to Chart B.

2. Does CHK 2B appear on the drive display?
YES - Go to ChartA.

YES - Go to Chart A.

CHK 21

Because the problem occurs on more than one cartridge, the
problem is NOT caused by a cartridge.

•

2. Does CHK 14 appear on the drive display?

NO - Go to Chart B.

CART 40

CHK28

The problem is NOT caused by the cartridge.
Go to the EAO Section for this CHIC for
additional troubleshooting information.

I
The problem is caused by the cartridge.
Go to START 149.

NO - Go to Chart B.

CHK 28 occurs when the tape is not attached to the thieadei pin,
or the file reel motor turns backwards during the threading
operation.
CHK 28 can be caused by a cartridge if, during a threading
operation:
•

The leader block falls off the threader pin.

•

The tape breaks or is damaged.

1. Load a cartridge other than the cartridge that caused the
original fail ure on the drive.
2. Does CHK 28 appear on the drive display?

1. load a cartridge other than the cartridge that caused the
original failure on the drive.
2. Does CHK 21 appear on the drive display?

YES - Go to Chart A.
NO - Go to Chart B.

TA90 MG EC C13764

Cartridge Failure Determination

CART 40

Notes

CART 42

TAgO MG EC C04824

Notes

CART 42

(
Contents
Pneumatic System

Pneumatic System Measurements
Pressure Measurement . . . . . . . . . ,
Vacuum Measurement . . . . . . . . . . .

Air Pressure Loss
Before You Begin
Analysis Procedure
Failure in the Primary Pneumatics System
Pneumatics Problem on a Single Drive

10
10
10
12
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

PNEU 1

Contents

PNEU 1

Pneumatic Checkout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vacuum Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analysis Procedure

TAgO MG EC C04824

Contents

30
30
30
30

Pneumatic System
Pneumatic System

PNEU 3

TENSION~n
TRANSDUCER . ({
))
PRESSURE
SENSOR ~

PRESSURE
TEST PORT

PLENUM
LIFTER
SOLENOID

CLEANER
RIGHT
O-BEARING

1L
~--- ~REGULATOR
PRESSURE

TAPE LIFTER

.~~----- Output Filter

Vacuum Port Cap

DISTRIBUTION MANIFOLD

INTAKE

Pump Motor
Pneumatics Supply Assembly

TA90 MG EC C04824

Pneumatic System

PNEU 3

Notes

PNEU 4

TA90 MG EC C04824

Notes

PNEU 4

Pneumatic System Measurements

Pneumatic System Measurements
The following procedures are for measuring the air pressure and
the vacuum of the pneumatic system. Use pressure/vacuum
gauge kit to take the measurements.
Note: See PNEU 6 for the following locations.
Warning: Ensure that both drives in the tape transport unit are
offline to the system before continuing \..,ith the following
measurements or adjustments.

1. Set the tape transport unit ac power circuit breaker to off
(see LOC 1).

3. Connect a hose between the pneumatic assembly pressure
port and the gauge.
4.· Set the tape transport unit ac power circuit breaker to on.

5. Load tapes into both drives of the tape transport unit.
6. The meter should indicate 31 + 3, - 0.6 kilopascals (125 +
12, - 2.5 inches). Record the pressure.
If regulator adjustment is required, go to Step 7; if
adj~stment is not required, go to Step '0.

Vacuum Measurement

8. Remove the tapes from both the drives of the tape transport
unit.

1. Set the tape transport unit ac power circuit breaker to off
(see LOC 1).

9. Set the tape transport unit ac power circuit breaker to off.

9. To decrease the pressure, turn the adjustment screw
clockwise. To increase the pressure, turn the adjustment
screw counterclockwise.

2. Remove the vacuum port cap

10. When the pressure is correct (31 + 3, - 0.6 kilopascals),
remove the wrench and replace the plastic plug.

3. Connect a hose between the pneumatic assembly vacuum
port and the gauge.

11. Remove the tapes from both the drives of the tape transport
unit.

Pressure Measurement

2. Remove the pressure port cap

8. Insert an allen wrench into the adjustment port and engage
the recessed adjustment screw.

12. Set the tape transport unit ac power circuit breaker to OFF
(see LOC 1).
13. Disconnect the hose from the pressure/vacuum gauge to the
pressure port.

10. Disconnect the hose from the pneumatic assembly.

D·

4. Set the tape transport unit ac power circuit breaker to on.
5. Load tapes into both drives of the tape transport unit.

11. Replace the vacuum port cap.
12. Set the tape transport unit ac power circuit breaker to on.
13. Continue by returning to the MAP or procedure that sent you
here.

6. The gauge should indicate 5.75 ± 2.25 kilopascals (23 ± 9.0
inches).
If vacuum adjustment is required. go to step 7; if adjustment
is not required, go to Step 8.

14. Replace the pressure port cap.
15. Set the tape transport unit ac power circuit breaker to on.
16. Continue by returning to the MAP or procedure that sent you
here.

To Adjust the Vacuum
Note: Do not make any vacuum adjustments unless the
pneumatic system tor this tape transport unit has been checked
for a dirty tilter, or hoses that are loose, clogged. open, or
pinched. A defect In the pneumatic system can give false
vacuum readings.
7. The venturi
setscrew.

11 has a locking setscrew and an adjusting

To Adjust the Regulator

II.

a. Loosen the locking setscrew
Note: Do nol make any regulator adjustments unless the
pneumatic system for this tape transport unit has been checked
for a dirty filler, or hoses that are loose, clogged, open or
pinched. A defect In the pneumalic system can give talse
pressure readings.

PNEU 5

b. Turn the adjusting setscrew
until the vacuum gauge
is correct (5.75 ± 2.25 kilopascals).
c. Tighten the locking setscrew.

7. Remove the small plastic plug from the adjustment port (end,
center) of the regulator.

TA90 MG EC C04824

Pneumatic System Measurements

PNEU 5

Pneumatic System Measurements (Continued)

PNEU 6

Pneumatic System Measurements (Continued)

PNEU 6

~~~---- Output Filter

)

Vacuum Port Cap

~ Pressure Port Cap
Inlet Filter

Pump Motor
Pneumatics Supply Assembly

mLocking Setscrew

TA90 MG EC C04824

Air Pressure Loss

Air Pressure Loss
The following procedure helps you in isolating pneumatic system
failures when the problem indication is CHK 46.

eel

A CHK 46 occurs when the pienum pressure sensor does not get
enough air pressure to close the pressure sensor contacts.

YES NO

Follow this procedure, unless otherwise directed, until the repair
is made. After the repair is made, this procedure will direct you
to your next action.
Note: See PNEU 11 for the following locations.

Is the pump motor runn; ng?

I
ee2
Check for 22e V ac at J4 on the tape transport uni t dc
power supply (see lOC 1) as follows:
a.

Remove plug P4.

Measure the voltage between pins 1 and 3.
See PWR 20 for the voltage tolerance.

Is the voltage within tolerance?

Before You Begin

YES NO

DO NOT attempt to adjust the pressure
regulator during the failure isolation
procedure.

Is the pressure out of tolerance (see FNEU 5)?
Y1ES jO
911
Because the pressure is wi thi n tolerance,
the problem must be a single drive failure"
Go to PNEU 29. "Pneumatics Problem on a
Single Drive," for the failing drive.

Exchange the following FRU.
For the removal and replacement
procedures, see CARR-DR 1-1.

If there is a cartridge in either drive, try to remove it using the
following procedure. If the cartridge cannot be removed, go to
"Cartridge Removal by Hand" on CART 10 for further aid.

FRU995 - DC power supply

1. Set the drive Ready/Not Ready switch on both drives to Not
Ready (see LOC 1).

912
The pressure is out of tolerance. Cl amp the
plenum supply hose II on dri ve O. See
CARR-DR 3-1. Measure the pressure at the
regulator.

Is the voltage within tolerance now?

Is pressure within tolerance (see PNEU 5)?

YES NO

eG4
Request aid from your next 1eve1 of
support.

2. Remove the cover on pin side of the drive logic board
and jumper pin 02A-A1G6A02 (+ air pressure loss) to pin
02A-A 182U08 (Ground).

5. After the cartridge has unloaded, remove the jumper.
6. Remove the cartridge.

a05
Replace plug P4.

I Go to "Exit Procedure" on this page.
Exchange the fol1owing FRU. For the removal
and replacement procedures, see CARR-DR 1-1.
Note: If the pump motor (FRU03El) or the
regul ater (FRU031) is exchanged. the output
filter (FRUe32) must also be exchanged.
FRU039 - Pump motor

Analysis Procedure

Is the pump Rlotor running now?

7. Remove the tape transport unit front cover (See CARR-DR
2-1), and find the pump motor

The failure is in the primary pneumatic system
and not in either dri ve.
Remove any clamps on the plenum supply hoses.
See PNEU 3 for a di agram of the pneumat i c
system, and PNEU 5 for the correct pressure
dnd Vdcuum tolerances; then go to "Ana;ysis
Procedure" on PNEU 12 and follow the steps.
91S
Remove the clamp from drive 9. Clamp the plenum
supply hose on drive 1. Measure the pressure at
the regulator,

Is pressure within tolerance (see PNEU 5)?

019
Go to step 917.

G2G
Remove the cl amp from dri ve 1.
Go to PNEU 2e. ·Pneumatics Problem on a
Single Drive,· for drive 1.

013
Go to step 018.
914
Remove the clamp from drive e.
plenum supply hose on dri ve 1.
pressure at the regulator.

Exit Procedure
Clamp the
Measure the

I s pressure wi thi n tolerance (see PNEU 5)?

006

4. Press the Unload switch (see LOC 1).

eli

YES NO

ee3

Set the drive Online/Offline switch to Offline on both drives (see
LOC 1).

3. Press the Reset switch (see LOC 1).

GiG
Measure the pressure at the regul at or
(see PNEU 5).

PNEU 10

1. Refer to PNEU 5 to measure the pressure and vacuum.
Adjust if necessary.
2. Set the Online/Offline switch to Online on 80TH drives.

YES NO

015
Remove the c1 amp from dri ve 1.

3. Install a scratch tape and run GMP.

Go to PNEU 20. "Pneumatics Problelll on a
Single Drive," for drive e.
916
Go to step 817.

YES NO

II.

Oe7
Request aid froD! your next level of support.

8. Determine if the pump motor is running.
Note: To determine if the pump motor is running, listen for
the sound of the motor running or remove the
and feel for escaping air.
pressure port cap

TA90 MG EC C04824

a0S

Go to -Exit Proc:edure" on this page.
809
Go to step 019.

Air Pressure Loss

PNEU 10

Air Pressure Loss - Both Drives (Continued)

PNEU 11

Air Pressure Loss - CHK 46 On Both Drives in the Same Tape Transport Unit (Continued)

D Logic Board Cover,
Pin Side

- ---

-::::

.............

Tape Transport Unit

!ape De~k - Top View

Vacuum Port Cap

II :Pump Motor
_Pneumatics Supply Assembly

Air Pressure Loss - Both Drives (Continued)
TA90 MG EC C04824

PNEU 11

Air Pressure Loss (Continued)

Air Pressure Loss (Continued)
You were sent here after the preceding procedures showed a
failure in the primary pneumatics system. This procedure will
isolate the problem.

A B

Failure in the Primary Pneumatics System
Is the pressure high?

~~!

YES

~~;h;~v!~ir!~i~~~~t F~~~Ced~~~S

3. Install a scratch tape and run GMP.

i
/

Go to "Exit Procedure" or. this page.

007
Exchange the following FRUs. For the
remova l/repl acement procedures see
CARR-OR 1-1.
Note: If the pump motor (FRUS3S) or the
regulator (FIMi31j ;s exchanged, the
output filter (FRU032) Dlust also be
exchanged.
FRue38 - Pump motor
FRU031 - Regulator
FRU865 - Pump to output fi 1ter hose
FRU837 - Manifold-in pressure hose

ee4

I
I

Remove the inlet filter (FRUG33) and
cani ster from the pump motor. See
CARR-DR 1-1 to find the removal page
for FRUEl33.

Do not replace the canister at this
time.
Set the tape transport uni t ac power ci rcuit
breaker to ON (see LOC 1).
Refer to PNEU 5 and measure. but
00 NOT adjust. the pressure.
Is the pressure within tolerance?

rr
C

Blower
Assembly

Go to "Exit Procedure· on this page.

Note: If the pump motor (FRUEl3G)
or the regulator (FRUG31) is
exchanged. the output filter
(FRU032) must a1 so be exchanged.
FRUEl31 - Regulator
FRUG32 - Output fi 1ter
FRUG34 - Pressure hose assembly
FRUG37 - Manifold-in pressure hose
FRU039 _ Pl enum supply hose

FRU833 - Inlet filter

see CARR-DR 1-1.

2. Set the Online/Offline switch to Online on BOTH drives.

S06
Exchange the following FRU. For the
removal/replacement procedures see
CARR-DR 1-1.

I ~ 'Ie... 'S .ith'" tol""ooe.

1. Refer to PNEU 5 to measure the pressure and vacuum.
Adjust if necessary.

Go to "Exit Procedure" on thi s page.

ee2
Is the vacuUIII low?

Exchange the fo 11 owi ng FRUs. Fer
the removal/replacement procedures
see CARR-DR 1-1.

FRU838 - PUllP Rlotor
FRU831 - Regulator
FRU832 - Output fi 1ter
FRU865 - PUlllP to output fi 1ter hose
FRU837 - Manifold-in pressure hose

pre:lSure 1$ low.

Is the vacuum high?

e05

YES NO

Note: If the pUIIIp motor (FRU630)
or the regulator (FRUG31) is
exchanged. the output filter
(FRU032) must also be exchanged.

001

Exit Procedure

PNEU 12

.
i

Go to "(,It P'aced,,,- co th's p.ge.

eGa
Exchange the following FRU. For the
removal/replacement procedures see
CARR-DR 1-1.
Note: If the pump motor (FRU939) or the
regulator (FRU931) is exchanged. the
output filter (FRU032) must also be
exchanged.

Tape Transport Unit

FRUG31 - Regul at or
Go to "Exit Procedure" on this page.

Regulator
. ..;..~_ _ _ _ _ _ .Output Filter

TA90 MG EC C04824

Air Pressure Loss (Continued)

PNEU 12

Pneumatics Problem on a Single Drive

Pneumatics Problem on a Single Drive
You were sent here for further problem isolation, after the
measurements taken on the primary pneumatics system were
correct.

Pneumatics Problem on a Single Drive

PNEU 20

Exit Procedure

e0S
Remove the jumper.

1. Refer to PNEU 5 to measure the pressure and vacuum.
Adjust if necessary.

Pinch each hose that leaves the plenum fJ.
one at a time (except the plenum supply hose).
and press the dri ve reset switch.

2. Set the Online/Offline switch to Online on BOTH drives.

Oi d the CHK 46 reappear on the di sp 1ay after

3. Install a scratch tape and run GMP.

001
Press the reset switch on the drive.

each hose was pi nched and the or; ve reset?

Does CHK 46 appear on the dri ve di sp 1ay?

YES NO

906
Exchange or attach the hose causi ng the
failure.

YES NO

002
Exchange the following FRUs. For the
removal/replacement procedures see

Go to "Exit Procedure" on this page.

CARR-OR 1-1.

FRU040 - Pressure sensor
FRU085 - Dr; ve control card

II Go to "Exit Procedure" on this page.
a03 .
Remove the cover on pi n si de of the dri ve 1ogi c
board
and jumper pin G2A-AIG6A02
(+ air pressure loss) to pin El2A-A1B2U08 (Ground).

II.

Press the Reset switch (see LOC 1).

eEl7

Exchange the following FRUs. For the removalrep1 acement procedures. see CARR-DR 1-1.
FRU840 - Pressure sensor
FRU941 - Plenull assembly
FRU839 - Plenum supply hose
FRU834 - Pressure hose assembly
FRU837 - Manifold-in pressure hose
Go to "Exit Procedure" on this page.

Di d the CHK 46 di sappear?
YES NO

!
II Elf)4
Remove the jumper and exchange the
following FRU. For removal/replacement
procedures. see CARR-DR 1-1.
FRU085 - Dri ve cont ro 1 card
Go to "Exit Procedure" on this page.

I
I

/-j
·0
@

~ @

. . . . . .--r_Q--\-,
@

II
6.

Logic Board Cover,
Pin Side

fJ Plenum Hose Locations
1. Plenum Supply
2. Tape Lifter Solenoid
3. Decoupler Pressure
4. Right Guide Bearing
5. Transducer
6. Left Guide Bearing

TA90 MG EC C04824

Pneumatics Problem on a Single Drive

PNEU 20

Pneumatic Checkout Procedure

Pneumatic Checkout Procedure
Introduction

PNEU 30

Exit Procedure

A B

Read/write and data check errors can be caused by vacuum
missing at the tape cleaner assembly or at the decoupler
assembly. Pneumatic pressure problems are indicated by CHK
46 (air pressure loss) on the operator panel, but there is no
indication of a detached or clogged vacuum hose

1304
Reseat or exchange the follow; ng FRU,
See CARR-DR 1-1 for the removal and
rep 1acement procedures if necessary.

2. Set the Online/Offline switch to Online on BOTH drives.

FRU635 - Vacuum hose assembly
FRU212

1. See PNEU 5 to measure the pressure and vacuum. Adjust if
necessary.

Vacuum supply hose

3. Install a scratch tape and run GMP.

FRU038 - Manifold-in vacuum hose
Close the vacuum port cap.

Vacuum Checks

Go to "Exit Procedure" on this page.

See CARR-DR 2-3 for cover removaL Figure 2 shows the
components that are on the top of the tape deck (some pressure
hoses have been removed for clarity). Figure 1 shows the
pneumatic components at the front of the tape transport unit.

FRU043 - Decoupler vacuum hose
FRUe47 - Cleaner supply hose.
FRU219 - Vacuum distribution tee

Analysis Procedure

Vacuum
Supply
Hose

Reconnect the vacuum supply hose.

1. Set the drive Online/Offline switch to Offline (see LOC 1).

2. With power on the drive, detach the vacuum supply hose

905
Reseat or exchange the fo 11 ow; ng FRUs.
See CARR-DR 1-1 for the removal and
rep 1acement procedures if necessary.

GO to • E.xlt Procedure" on thi s page.

from the vacuum distribution tee and sense for vacuum by
covering the hose end with a finger.

Decoup/er
Vacuum
Hose

001
Is there vacuum?

Vacuum
Distribution
Tee

Figure 2. Tape Deck-Top View
YES NO

002
Reconnect the vacuum supply hose to the
vacuum distribution tee. Open the vacuum
port cap D and sense for vacuum as before.
Is there vacuum?
YES NO

I, 003
I
Reseat or exchange the following FRU.
See CARR-OR 1-1 for the removal and
rep 1acement procedures if necessary.

Blower Assembly

Note: I f the PUlllP motor (FROO3a) or
the regulator (FRU031) is exchanged.
the output f; lter (FRUS32) Rlust also
be exchanged.
FRU930 - Pump motor
Close the vacuum port cap.
Go to "Ex; t Procedure" on thi s page.

4-;::"'~------ Output Filter
A

Tape Transport Unit

Pump Motor
Figure 1. Pneumatics Supply Assembly

TA90 MG EC C04824

Pneumatic Checkout Procedure

PNEU 30

('
Contents
Message List For Pseudo Sense Builder

Error Report Procedure Actions

VMS Error Log Messages

100

STI Drive Requested Error Log (Format 7)

200

TA90 Extended Sense Information

20'

.....

STI Formatter Requested Error Log (Format B)

205

Tape Transfer Errors (Format 5)

203

MountlDismount Entries

2'5

.....

STI Informational and Media Logs (Format B)

210

VAXsimPLUS Messages

240

TA90 MG EC C13764

. . . . . . . . . .. .

Contents

MSG 1

Contents

MSG 1

Message List For Pseudo Sense Builder
I
I
I
i

Invalid Message Pointer

01
11

13
14

Message
Number
(Hex)

Call next level of support.

Message Description
(Not Exact Text)

Action

Unit check due to command
sequence error

Program error.

Unit check due to device reserved
to other

issue a system reset.

Unit check due to a diagnostic
state command reject

Program error. Call the next level
of support.

Unit cneck Que to bus out parity

Check interface between tM TA90
and the HSC.

Unit check due to deferred unit
check

Call the next level of support.

Unit check due to device not ready

Call the next level of support.

Unrecognized channel interrupt
occurred

Call the next level of support.

Data transfer to channel truncated

Reissue the command.

Data transfer from channel
truncated

Reissue the command.

Channel adapter error occurred
during data transfer

Call the next level of support.

Unrecognized channel adapter
interrupt during data transfer

Call the next level of support.

Replace FRU 117.

Microprocessor Failure
From
Diagnostics
I
Diagnostic completed and failed
(from diagnostics)

Action

Message Description
(Nol Exact Text)

Message
Number
(Hex)

None (internal use only).

Microcode error
(from support diagnostics)

Call next level of support.

Diagnostic completed successfully
(from diagnostics)

None (internal use only).

Microcode error
(from diagnostics)

Call Next level of support.

Invalid application ID

Rekey your request.

Invalid application suffix

Rekey your request.

Invalid loop option

Rekey your request.

I Invalid drive selection

Rekey your request.

! Byte 1 should be '80'x

I Byte 1 should be 'OO'x

i Rekey your request.

Data should be zero

I, Rekey your request.

Channel adapter 'B' error

Replace channel adapter B.

Rekey your request

Channel adapter' A' error

Replace channel adapter A.

I Rekey your request.
i

Device has already been assigned

Re-IML. If the problem persists.
call the next level of support.

Unable to present channel status

Re-IML. If the problem persists.
call the next level of support.

2B
:
I

i
I

Byte 0 is invalid

20
31

!
i

By~e
6 should
I
be 'AO'x or '03'x
1
I

Ii Diskette drive error
I

Rekey your request.

i Try a new diskette. If the problem
i
It persists. replace the diskette
I

! drive.

Diagnostic aborted due to Channel
'A' interrupt

Terminate activities on Channel A.

All parameters are valid

For code debugging pu"rpose only.

Cannot continue. MD attached

Detach the MD and restart.

Interface disconnect occurred

Re-IPL. If the problem persists
call the next level of support.

Psuedo Sense

MSG 10

I
1

Diagnostic aborted due to Channel
Terminate activities on Channel B.
I 'B'
interrupt
I

I
I

i
J

External program error.
Call next level of support.

MSG 10

Unit check due to command reject
(ERA 27)

Psuedo Sense

I
43
Selective reset occurred
I
System
Re-IPL. If the problem perSists
reset
call the next level of support.
I
I occurred
I

I
I

Re-IPL. If the problem persists
call the next level of support.

! SDM received unrecognized

I
46

Call1he next level of support.

command

! Unit check due to channel
i sequence error

TA90 MG EC C04824

Program error.

Error Recovery Procedures Actions List

Recovery Procedures

MSG 20

Recovery Procedures

MSG 20

ThiS list provides reference information about the system
recovery actions and operator actions that are unique to the
T A90 Subsystem.

k~RPA

I 45
I 49
I
I 39
27

System Description
Drive Assigned Elsewhere
Bus-Out Parity Check

Backward at BOT
Command Reject

I Definition of Error

The drive is not assigned to the channel
path that issued the command.
A bus-out parity error was detected on the
command or parameter bytes. (Does not
include bus-out pa.rity during data transfer
type commands.)
The beginning of tape (BOT) was reached
during a backward command.
Command reject can occur for any of the
following:
•

Write Data Check (deferred unit check)

Write Data Check (postponed unit check)

Invalid argument for a command.

•

Command sequence error.

•

A DSE command is not chained to an
erase gap command.

•
•

An unidentified command.
The data is contained in the buffer but
has not been correctly written.

•

Error Recovery Procedures (ERP) has
retried erase gaps and rewrites, but
has been unable to succe~sfully
complete the write operation.

•

A permanent error was detected
during a write data, IBG, or tape mark
operation. Retries have not been
successful.

I
I

System Recovery Action
Permanent error indicated.
Error message generated.
Permanent error indicated.
Error message generated.
Error Log report

! Permanent error indicated.
! Error message generated.
I Permanent error indicated.
i Console message generated.
i
i

Operator Action
Verify that the drive is mounted.

J!
i

Cal! for service.

j
May be a software croblem. Rerun !i-Ie job
using another drive.

Permanent error indicated.
Console message generated.
Error Log report
Increase permanent read/write SDR counter.!

Call for service.

Permanent error indicated.
Console message generated.
Error Log report
Increase the permanent read/write SDR
counter.

Call for service.

•

Read Data Check

TA90 MG EC C13764

A temporary error has been detected
with mode set bit 7 equal to 1.
A permanent read error or a temporary
read error (mode set bit 7 = 1) has
occurred.

Error Recovery Procedures Actions List

I ERPA
#

System Description

I Definition of Error

Data Security Erase Failure

The drive became not-readY after a OSE
command was issued, or an error
occurred while processing a OSE

System Recovery Action

Operator Action

Permanent error indicated.
ErrOr message generated.
Error Log report

Verify 1hat the drive is ready.
Retry the job.
Call for service.

command.
Data Streaming Not Operational

After attempts to transfer data in
streaming mode, the TCU has switched to
"DC interlock" mode until system reset or
demount. .

I
I
I

,
38

Physical End-at-Tape

! The physical end of the tape was

I encountered while processing a read or

I
2C

Permanent Equipment Check

I write type of command.
Set either of two ways:
I
I

I
I

Permanent error indicated.

I Error message generated.
Error Log report.
I
Permanent error indicated.
Error
I message generated.

Permanent error indicated.
Error message generated.
Error Log report

1. The tape control unit can't determine
the correct recovery because of:

MSG 21

Recovery Procedures

MSG 21

I
I

I Call for service.
I

Recovery Procedures

I
I

Notify the user of a possible program failure·1
If the problem remains. call for service.

Call for service.

I
a. Invalid error code
b. Sense builder error
c. Microprogram error

I 2. Error recovery was attempted and
I
I

Write 10 Mark Check

failed.

! The 10 mark could not be written at BOT.
The data remains in the buffer.
I

i
i

Drive Equipment Check

II The drive detected an error from which the
I

ERPA was unable to reco .... er or a CHK
I message is currently in the drive message
I display, and a load display command is
I issued (drive display busy).

I
36

Drive Patch Load Failure

File Protected

The tape control unit could not
successfully load microprogram patches to
the drive.
A write operation was attempted on a file
protected tape.

,
I

I
I

Permanent error indicated.
Error message generated.
Error Log report

I Call for service.

Permanent error indicated.
Console message generated.
Error Log report

I Call for ser .... ice.

I
I

I
1

I
I

Permanent error indicated.
Console message generated.
Error Log repO.rt

Permanent error indicated.
Error message generated.

TA90 MG EC C13764

Call for service.

Verify the file protection of the tape. If
correct, cancel the job and call for service.
If not correct. set to the proper status and
rerun the job.

Error Description List (Continued)

I ~RPA
33

System Description
Load Failure

Definilion of Error

i. The cartridge has not loaded correctly

I
I
I
I

I
34

Manual Load Failure

I,
Operator Action

System Recovery Action

;

in the drive.
2. The load operation could not complete
properly due to a hardware failure in
the drive.

1
I The drive cannot maintain tapa tans ion
I

I Console message generated.
II Error Log report
Reissue the command. if unsuccessful
post 'permanent error.'

If a permanent error, call for service.

Intervention Required

TA90 MG EC C13764

Error Description List (Continued)

MSG 21-1

I
I

II Console message generated.

! Error Log report
control tape movement during an
I and
'unload'command.
I Reissue the command. if
I post 'permanent error.'
I
Console intervention required message is
The manual reset switch on the drive has
generated to ready the drive. After the
is
not
ready.
been
pressed
and
the
drive
I
I drive
is ready. reissue the command.
I
I
A Start 110 command was issued to a drive
that does not have a volume properly
mounted.

If a permanent error. call for service.

Drive Reset by Operator

MSG 21-1

;

unsuc~essful

Error Description List (Continued)

Console message generated.
No Error Log report
Retry the failing CCW.

I
I
normal condition. Call for service only if I

the drive continues to go not ready for no
apparent reason, or cannot be made
ready.

Verify that the volume is mounted
correctly, If the problem remains,
call for service.

Error Recovery Procedures Actions List

Recovery Procedures

MSG 22

Recovery Procedures

MSG 22

ERPA

System Description

Definition of Error

System Recovery Action

110 Error

I/O Error caused by:

Permanent error indicated.
Console message generated.
Error Log report

1. Sense failure.
'"" Invalid ERPA code (less than 20 or
greater than 4C).
24

Load Display Check

Not Capable

Operator Action

i May be a firmware problem.

Rerun the job using another drive.
Call for service.

A load display command was issued to a
drive while the cartridge was being
I loaded.

The density mark could not be read
properly because of:

Permanent error indicated.
Console message generated.
Error Log report

May be a software problem. Rerun the job
using another drive. If the problem
remains on a single drive. call for service.

Permanent error indicated.
Error message generated.
Error Log report

Call for service.

1. Void at tape beginning.

2, Timeout before the density separator

was detected.
3. Density mark unreadable.

I The block 10 read by the tape control unit

Is invalid. Bit 0 or bits 8·11 are nonzero.
48

No Patch Available

A tape control unit has sensed a model or
microcode mismatch between itself and an
attached drive.

Permanent error indicated.
Error message generated,
Error Log report

Locate Block Unsuccessful

The tape control unit cannot locate the
block preceding the desired block.

Permanent error indicated.
Error message generated.

Drive Offline

A command requiring drive activity was
issued to a drive that is not online.

Permanent error indicated,
Error message generated,

Verify the drive is powered on and is
online. If the problem remains. call for
service,

Overrun

A data overrun between the channel and
the tape control unit buffer occurred while
processing a large block that does not fit in
the buffer.

Permanent error indicated,
Console message generated,
Error Log report

Call for service.

Path equipment check can be caused by
the following:

Per'manent error indicated.
Console message generated,
Error Log report
Increase the permanent read/write
SDR counter,

I 22

Path Equipment Check

A device interface error occurred.
Buffer error between buffer and drive
could not recover.
No internal path is usable.
4A

Error Recovery Failed

I
I

Sense Failure

TA90 MG EC C13764

While trying to recover from a drive data
handling failure. the tape control unit
recovery procedure failed,

Permanent error indicated.
Console message generated.
Error Log report

A unit check was detected at the host
system during a sense command. The
sense data received is not considered
, valid. and is not printed in the console
message.

Permanent error indicated.
Console message generated.
Error Log report

Call for service.

I
Call for service.

II
I
I
I

Call for service.

I
I

I Determine if the problem relates to the

Subsystem. "f it only occurs on the
I TA90
TA90. call for service. If the problem
I

occurs on other units. contact the field
engineer (FE) responsible for the host
I system.

Error Recovery Procedures Action List

Recovery Procedures

MSG 23

Recovery Procedures

MSG 23

ERPA

System Description

#
47

I, fape Control Unit Check One Error

I
I
I! Tape Tension Lost

! The tape control unit r,ad a severe error
condition. reinitialized itself. and continued
processing activities.
J

Demark Data Buffer Error (Data Buffer
Error)

Tape Length Check

,
I

j Volume Unloaded By Operator

Permanent error indicated.
Error message generated.
I Error Log report
!

The tape length in the cartridge is too
short. The error could occur wnen the
leader block was replaced (the length of
tape ahead of the BOT has been trimmed).

the RewiUni switch has been operated,
and another motion command has been
issued to the drive.

I Tap e Voi d

I No pane r ns or da.a were fou nd on the ta pe
during a read operation.

I
I

Operator Action

, Call for service.
I

I
I

The tape control unit has detected a loss of
tape tension on an attachec drille.

TA90 MG EC C13764

I
I

I
I Tape motion has taken place on a drive.

error indicated.
I Permanent
Error message generated.

A buffer error (memory or control) has
been detected. and part of the buffer is
flagged as unusable.

System Recovery Action

Definition of Error

Permanent error indicated.
Error message generated.
Error Log report

I
I

Permanent error indicated.
Error message generated.

Permanent error indicated.
Console message generated.
Error Log report

If the problem is on more than one volume,
I! call
for service.

I
I

Permanent error indicated.
Consoie message generated.
Error Log report

I
I
I

Call for service.

I
I

The T AgO subsystem will operate with a
partial buffer. Call and inform the FE of
the degradation.

I If the problem remains, call for service.

Cal I for service.

VMS Error Log Messages

MSG 100

VMS Error Log Messages

MSG 100

Tape Report Description
The following section describes the format and content of the
TA90 tape reports produced by ERF (Analyze/Error).
This section gives samples of ERF (Analyze/ErrorLog) output
messages from the VMS Error Log. As will be seen in the
following examples, the Error Log would be more appropriately
named the error/event log. The VAXIVMS system automatically
writes messages to the latest version of an error log file name
SYS$ERRORLOG:ERRQRLOG.SYS as the following events occur:

•

Errors - Device errors, device timeouts, machine checks,
bus errors. memory errors (hard or soft error correcting
code (ECC) errors). asynchronous write errors, undefined
interrupts. and bugchecks.

•

Volume Changes - Volume mounts and dismounts.

•

System events - Cold start-ups, warm start-ups. system
failure (crash) start-ups, messages from the Send Message
to Error Logger ($SNDERR) system service, or time stamps.

T AgO Subsystem Messages
This section provides information on T AgO-dependent error log
message types. Examples will be given for several error log
message types:
•

Tape data transfer errors (Format 5)

•

STI drive requested error log (Format 7)

•

STI formatter requested error log (Format 8)

•

STI informational and media logs ((Format B).

The STI drive requested error messages indicate that the TCU
had sense data available describing an error event. The
message will contain sense data format 20. Each time one of the
format 7 messages appears, it will be followed by a tape data
transfer error message (format 5) with the same command
reference number.
The drive error packet (format 7} can be used to analyze the
error event. The transfer packet indicates either successful
recovery, or that retries failed to recover from the error.
In addition, there are informational messages (STI format B) that
are media quality reports for use by VMS backup, and statistical
counters from the subsystem. The media quality reports are
event code 0068, and contain format 19 (forced logging) sense
data. The statistical entries are event code 0016 and contain
format 21 (statistics) sense data (without data compaction) or
format 30 (statistics) sense data (with data compaction).
Statistical entries are put in the error log when a statistical
counter in the TCU overflows or when a tape is unloaded. These
statistics provide information about the use and the error rate of
this particular tape.

TA90 MG EC C13764

S11 Drive Requested Error Log (Format 7)
V A X / VMS

Field Definitions
DATE/TIME

The date and time of the error event.
I/O SUB-SYSTEM, UNIT

fJ is the subsystem unit number. including the HSC node. In this example. the HSC node is '1'.

MSLGSL_CMD_REF
is the command reference number. All messages in the error log with the same command reference number
refer to the same event.
MSLGSB_FORMAT D is the STI message format indicating a drive error.
MSLGSW_EVENT
MSLGSQ_UNITJD

II is the event code.

is the MSCP device type identifier.

SYSTEM ERROR REPORT

******************-**********·ENTRY
ERROR SEQUENCE 1129
DATE/TIME I-JUL-1968 15:27:54.72
ERLSLOGMESSAGE ENTRY

Format 7

MSG 200

SID 06r:F01::JD
SYS_TYPE 010009F8

KA87
REV. 127. LEFT CPU
SCS NODE: WACHU3, CPU, 1.

I/O SUB-SYSTEM, UNrT _TSMUA1:

MESSAGE TYPE

MSG 200

COMPILED 6-JUN-1988 15:26
PAGE 3.
LOGGED ON:

Format 7

0002

MSLGSL CMD REF 686COO08 IJ
0001
MSLGSW)NIT

TAPE MSCP MESSAGE
UNIT #1.

MSLGSW_SEQ_NUM
MSLGSBJORHAT

0007
07 D

MSLGSB FLAGS
MSLGS(EVENT

00
FF6B

MSLG$Q_CNT_ID

OOOOFB04
01200000

SEQUENCE n.
STI DRIVE ERROR B

DRIVE ERROR
TAPE DRIVE REQSTED ERROR lOG D
U~IQUE IDENTIFIER, 00000000FB04 (X)
MASS STORAGE CONTROLLER
HSC70

MSLGSB_CNT_SVR

MSLGSB_CNT_HVR

CONTROLLER SOFTWARE VERSION 139.
CONTROLLER HARDWARE REVISION #0.
MSLGSW MULT UNT
0061
MSLGSQ-UNIT-ID 71805701
03070700
UNIQUE IDENTIFIER, 070071805701 (X)
TAPE CLASS DEVICE
TA90

MSlGSB_UNIT_SVR

MSLGSB_UN!T_HVR

UNIT SOFtwARE VERSION #0.
UNIT HARDWARE REVISION iO.
MSLGSL_GAP_CNT 00000DC7
MSLGS~JMTR_SVR

MSLGSB_FMTR_HVR

GAP COUNT = 3527.
FORMATTER SOFTWARE VERSION ,8.
FORMATTER HARDWARE REV!SION 'I.

GET EXTENDED DRIVE STATUS (GEDS TEXT FIELD)
SPEED

DENSITY

78. IPS TAPE DRIVE
TAgO NORMAL DE~S:TY
UNIT

TA90 MG EC C13764

0001

MSCP UNIT NUMBER = 1.

STI Drive Requested Error Log (Format 7) (Continued)
T AgO Extended Sense Information
TA90 extended sense information
Maintenance Guide.

D is information that comes from the TCU. The sense bytes are described in SENSE. VOL A02 of the

III contains the Error Recovery Procedure Action (ERPA) list (see MSG-20). The ERPA code describes the action

that the controlling computer should take to recover from an error within the subsystem. In this example, the code hexadecimal 3A
indicates that the Drive Reset switch was operated, and the drive is not ready.
SENSE BYTE 7

V A X / VMS

SYSTEM ERRO~ REPORT

GAPCNi

00000000

D identifies the format of sense bytes 8 through 31. In this case, byte 7 contains hexadecimal 20, and the format

SENSE BYTE 21

1m identifies the command active or last given at the time that a drive error code 1 occurred.

SENSE BYTE 0

SENSE BYTE 1

SENSE BYTE 2

SENSE BYTE 3

SENSE BYTE 4-5

000De5

INTERVENTION REQUIRED
WRITE STATUS
DEVICE ONLINE
CONTROL UNIT 10 O.
CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT O.
CHANNEL ADAPTER B

contains the first error detected since the last device Sense command. For a specific error code description,

see the FSI section.

SENSE BYTES 24 - 31

COMPILED 5-JUN-1988 15:26
PAGE 4.

GAP COUNT = O.

represents error sense data (format 20).
SENSE BYTE 20

MSG 201

TA90 EXTENDED SENSE INFORMATION D

Field Definitions
SENSE BYTE 3

Extended Sense Information

mcontain information about the tape control unit/tape transport unit features, microcode revisions, serial

m DRIVE RESET BY OPERATOR

SENSE BYTE 7

20 D

SENSE BYTE 8

SENSE BYTE 9

numbers and drive characteristics.

ERROR SENSE DATA
MANUAL ACTION REQ/EQUIPMENi CHECK
1ST FSC MODIFIER

SENSE BYTE 10-11

8E06

BYTE 12-13

0000

SENSE BYTE 14-15

0000

SENSE BYTE 16-1]

0000

SENSE BYTE 18

SENSE BYTE 19

SENSE BYTE 20

SENSE BYTE 21

SENSE BYTE 22

SENSE BYTE 23

SENSE BHE 24

S~NSE

BLOCK 10 = 3526.

1ST FLT SYMPTOM CODE
2ND FLT SYMPTOM CODE
3RD FLT SYMPTOM CQQE
CU HW ERROR CODE
DRIVE FLAG 1
DRIVE MODE B22
DRIVE COMMAND CODE 1
DRIVE ERROR CODE 1
DRIVE CO~lr-tAND CODE 2
DRIVE ERROR CODE 2

m 3 MEGABYTE STREAMING
CHANNEL ADAPTER ,B,
CHANNEL ADAPTER A

SENSE BYTE 25

SENSE BYTE 26

SENSE BYTE 27-29 718057
SENSE BYTE 30

TA90 MG ECC13764

DUAL CONTROL UNIT FEATURE
CU UCODE EC LEVEL = 5.
CU UCODE COMPOSI7E LEVEL = O.
CONTROL UNIT SIN = 98391.
MODEL BOX DRIVES ATTACHED

Extended Sense Information

MSG 201

Tape Transfer Error (Format 5)
Y A X I VMS

Field Definitions

COMMAND REFERENCE NUMBER
Note that this number is the same as the preceding example, indicating that the drive and
command error message refer to the same error event.
TAPE ERROR

"'*U·"ENTRY 11., ERReR SEQUENCE 1131.
ER~s:.aGMESSAGE E~TRY

D indicates that this is a Format 5, tape transfer error.

FRMTR RETRY SEa EXHAUSTED
indicates that the drive was unable to recover from the error, and the data transfer operation
did not succeed. This is a fatal error.

SYSTEM ERROR REPO~T

COMPILED

6-JU~-1988

15:26

PAGE

Tape Transfer Error

MSG 203

Tape Transfer Error

MSG 203

LOGGED ON SI DE 06FF01DD

I(A87
REV' 127. LEFT CPU
SCS NODE: wACHU3, CPU, 1.

110 SUB-SYSTEM, UNIT _TSMUAl:
MESSAGE TYPE
MSLGSL CMD REF
MSLGS(UNIT

0002
r'I!:')l::rnnt\o

DOt/I.VIJVO

H
U

TAPE foISCP MESSAGE

0001
UNIT 11.

MSLGSW_ SEQ_ NUM

0009

MSLGSBJORMAT

MSLGSB Fi..AGS
MSLG$',(EVENT

00
FF68

SEQUENCE 19.
TAPE ERROR

DATA ERROR
FRMTR RETRY SEQ EXHAUSTED
MSLGSQ_CNT_ I D

0000FS04
01200000

UNIQUE IDENTIFIER. aa0000a6FB04 (Xl
MASS STORAGE CONTROLLER
HSC7G
MSLGSa_CNT _SVR

t-!SLGSa_ CNT_HVR

CONTROLLER SOFTWARE VERS i ON 139.
CONTROLLER HARDWARE REV I SI ON fO.
0061
MSLGSW MULT UNT
MSLGS(UNr(IO 71805701
03070700
ur~IQUE IDENT!FrE~,

0701371805701 (Xj

TAPE CLASS DEVICE
TA90
MSLGSB_UNiT _SVR

MSLGSS_UNlT_HVR

!o!SLGSS LEVEL
!o!SLGSa-RETRY
MSLGSL:GAP_CNT

FF
FF
000000C7

MSLGSBJMTR_SVR

MSi..GSBJMTR_HVR

UNIT SOFTWARE VERSION ,e.
U~HT

HARDWARE REVISION 10.

GAP COUNT ~ 3527.
FORMATTER SOFTWARE VERSION #8.
FORMATTER HARDwARE REVISION II.

TA90 MG EC C13764

STI Formatter Requested Error Log (Format 8)

Format 8
II A X I VMS

Field Definitions

SYS7E~ ER~OR

REPORT

COMMAND REFERENCE NUMBER
in this case. is the same number as the
preceding drive requested error log message; therefore. it refers to the same error
event.
FORMATTER UNAVAILABLE/OFFLINE
crashed or has gone offline.

D indicates that the STI-FIPS adapter has

DRIVE DETECTED ERROR
drive 0 position lost. Note that this is STI drive 0 on
this adapter. The STI drive numbers map to the unit numbers as follows:

COMPI~EO

6-JUN-1988 15:26
PAGE
5.

P~YSi:AL

DRIVE A:;:;RESS • 1.
LC-QR::ER LOG[CAl DRIVE AD:JR

SENSE BY7E 31
~······ENTRY

Sl.!MERR
SUMMD2

SYS7EM ERReR REPCRT

CDMP rLEO

5-J'J~-19B8

15:26

PAGE

00
05
RErRl ED TRANSFER
FAIl.ED
PORT A ACTIVE

11 .• EKR~R SEQUENCE 1130.

ERLSLOGMESSAGE ENTRY

v A. x I VMS

MSG 205

DA7A BYTE COUNT· O. KB
LOGGED ON SIDE 06FFOIDD

CD~BYT

KA87
REV' 127. LEFT CPU
SCS t,ODE: WACHU3. CPU , 1.

OROMDO

00
08

CRQEi~R

ORiMOO

ORIVE ONLINE STA':'E (TO FRMTR)

1/0 SUB-SYSTEM. UNIT _T$MUAl:

pes in ON LOST D
DRIVE ONLINE STATE (TO FRMTR)

TeUD

MESSAGE TYPE

L Adapter

Unit#

MSLGSL CHD REF
MSLGsl(uN:r

base addrs +0

MSLGSw_ SEQ_ NUM

base addrs +2

"'SLGSBJORMAT

base addrs +4

MSLGSB FLAGS
MSLGSi(EVENT

base addrs +8

STI Drive

0002
S86COO08
0001

80T

ORiERR

T':'PE MSCP MESSAGE

D~2MOD

00
28
CR!VE ONLi~jE S7ATE (70 FRMTR)
BOT

UNiT 11.
0008
SEQUENCE

DR2ERR

,a.

D~3MOD

00
28
DRiVE ONL!NE STATE (TO FRMTR)
saT

STI COMMUNICATION OR CMO FAILURE
DR3ERR

00
00£3

DPIVE ERROR
DRiVE DETECTED ERROR

R Adapter

MSLGSQ_CtH_ID

STI Drive

Unit #

base addrs

UNIQUE IDENTiFIER, OOOOOOOOFS04 (X)
STORAGE CONTROLLER
HSC70

~'ASS

base addrs +3

0000FB04
01200000

base addrs +5
base addrs +7

TCU1

MSLGS6_CNT_SVR

MSLGSB_CNT _HVR

UNiQUE IDENTIFIER, 070071805701
TAPE CLASS DEVICE
T,:I.90

STI Drive

base addrs +8

UN IT SOFTwARE VERS I ON 10.
UNIT HARDWARE RE'IISION ~O.
GAP COUNT " 3527.

base addrs +12

base addrs +14

R Adapter

(Xl

Unit #

base addrs +10

FORMATTER SOFiWARE VERS:ON 18.
FORMATTER HARDWARE REVISION '1.
UNSUCCESSFUL RES?ONSE INFORMATiON

STI Drive

CONTROLLER HARDWARE REVISION 'e.

MSUiSW MULT UNT
0061
MSLGS(UNr(ID 71805701
03070700

L Adapter

caNT ROLLER SOFTWARE VERSION '39.

Unit #

base addrs +9
base addrs + 11

base addrs + 13

base addrs +15

SUMMOD

OA
PORT AlB ENAaLEO
FOR!-1ATTER UNAVA!!..ABLE/OFFL!NE
DRIVE 0 ATTENTION

Since this is unit 1, the formatter is the" R" formatter of TeUO and the base address
of the subsystem is o.

T A90 MG EC C13764

Format 8

MSG 205

STI Informational and Media Logs (Format B)
STI Format B contains informational messages that are media quality reports for use by VMS bacKup and statistical entries containing

Format B

MSG 210

Format B

MSG 210

TA90 EXTE~C:E:J SE'tSE !"4FORMArICN

sense data.

SENSE 9YTE 0

if sense byte 7 contains 21 (hexadecimal) the format represents operating condition data (without data compaction). If sense byte 7
contains 30 (hexadecimal) the format represents operating condition data (with da!a compaction).

SEPiSE BYTE 1

40
INTERVEN-:-rO"i REQUIRED

* 11"*"'***"'*** "k***"** * .. ,* .... it1r****** ENTRY
ERROR SEQUENCE 7412.
DATE/iiME 24-0Ci -1989 00:43: 17.64

BOT
DEVICE ONL:NE
MORE CARTRIDGES TO PROCESS
CONTROL UNIT Ie o.
CHAN~El ASSIGNMENT O.
CHANNEL ACAPTER B

67714.
LOGGED ON:

SID OA000005
SENSE aYTE 3

25
UNLOAD STATUS PRESENT

ERL$LOGMESSAGE ENTRY

KA62A
CPU REV' 6.
FW REV' 4.1
SCS NODE: STA284. XMI NODE # 1.

I/O SUB-SYSTEM. UNIT _HSC002SMUA3:
MESSAGE TYPE

000800
BLOCK 10 "' O.

SENSE BHE 7

SENSE BY;E 8

SENSE BYTE 9

DEl

SENSE BYTE 10

SENSE BYTE 11

SENSE aYTE 12

SENSE BYTE 13

BUFFERED lOG DATA
READ FWD DATA CHE~KS :: O.

0002
TAPE MSCP MESSAGE

MSLGSL CMD REF
MSLGSW)NIT

88000088
0003

MSLGSW_SEQ_NUM

8086

MSLG$B JORMA T

MSLGSB]LAGS

RD BCKIiD DATA CHECKS ..
UNIT

SEQUENCE #182.
SENSE DATA LOG
NON-ERROR/INFORMATIONAL EVENT
OPERATION SUCCESSFUL
MSLGSW_EVENT

WRITE DATA CHECKS = O.
READ BLOCKS CORRECTED " G.
WRITE BLOCKS CORRECTED '" 11.
CU EQUIPMENT CHECKS"
SENSE BYTE 14-15

0001

SENSE 6YTE 16-17

DEJB

8016

READ BYTES PROCESSED" 4. KB
INFORMATIONAL LOG
STATISTiCS

MSLGSQ_CNT_ID

SENSE BYTE 4-5

WRITE BYTES PROCESSED" 228204 KB
SENSE BYTE 18

00
READ BLOCKS PROCESSED "' 11 : 0"-> " 00 (X)
_READ BLOCKS PROCESSED"

92405502
01280000

SENSE anE 19

SENSE BYTE 20

CONTROLLER SOFTWARE V~RS; ON ;39.

SENSE BYTE 21

CONTROLLER HAROiO/ARE REVISION ,e.

SENSE BYTE 22

e:=-,,('C'
,wi,.,L'",!..

'-..I

.,~

UN I QUE I DENT! F j ER. 000000000000 (X)
CLASS = O.
MODEL:: O.

SENSE BYTE 24

SENSE BYTE 25

UNIT SOFTWARE VERSION 10.

SENSE BHE 26

UNIQUE IDENTIFIER. 000092405582 (Xl
MASS STORAGE CONTROLLER
HSC70

WRITE BLOCKS PROCESSED <11:64> :: OE (X)
_WRITE BLOCKS PROCESSED" 3600.
WRT TRANSIENT CONDITIONS" 0

00
MSLGSW MULT UNT
0093
MSLGS(UN IT) 0 00000000
00000000

DVT't:'

""I,;..

RD TRANSWH CONDITiONS" 6.

(X)

CRITERIA WRT DATA CHECKS = O.

(X)

CRITERiA RD DATA CHECKS'" e.
ERASE GAP COUNT z 6.
DR! VE DEiECTED ERRORS " 1.

(X)

WRITE BLOCKS PROCESSED <83:00> "1 (X)
READ BLOCKS PROCESSED <63:00> = 1 (X)

UNIT HAf<.DWARE REVISION ~O.
SENSE anE 27-29

301201
CONTROL UNIT SIN" 0000120l.
MoDEl 822 DRiVES ATTACHED

SENSE BYTE 30

SENSE BYTE 31

RO RECOVERY ~E-:-RY CNT = O.
PHYSICAL DRIVE ADDRESS'" 3.
LO-OPDER LOGICAL DR[VE ADQR = 3.

TA90 MG EC C13764

Format B

STI Informational and Media Logs (Format B) Continued
COMPILED 27-0CT-l989 08:15
PAGE 1.

V A X / VMS

•••••••••••••••••••••••• ENi~Y
ERlS~OGMESSAGE

6. LOG~ED ON S!~E 06FFOIDD

ENTRY KA865 REYi 2. SERIAL' lO':!. MFG PL"',NT 7.
SCS NODE: WACHU3, cou j 1.

000000
30

MSLGSBJLAGS

MSLGSB_CNT_ID

MSLGSB_CNT_HVR

MSLGSiU"1ULT_UNT

0042

MSLGSQ_UNIT_ID 30099201
03070700

MSLGSB_U~HT _SVR

MSLGSB_UNIi_HVR

SEriSE BYTE 0

SENSE BYTE 1

SENSE BYTE 3

SENSE BYTE 41-43 006670

SEQUENCE 13319.

SENSE BYTE 12

SENSE DAiA LOG

SENSE SYTE 13

NON- ERROR I i ~FORMA TIONAL EVENT
OPERATIONAL SUCCESSFUL

SENSE aYTE 14

SENSE BYTE 15

INFORMATIONAL LOG
STATISTICS

WRITE R£CQVERY ERASE GAPS· O.
SENSE BYTE 16
00
READ TRANSIENT CONDIiIONS .. a
SENSE BYTE 17
OG
WRITE TRA~S!E~T CO~DrTIONS ~ c
SENSE BYTE 18
eo
READ BLOCKS CORRECTED • O.
SENSE BYTE 19
00
WRITE BLOCKS CORRECTED .. e.
SENSE BYTE 20-21
0000
RESERVED
SENSE BYTE 22
00
READ DATA REQUEST TIMEOUTS .. O.
SENSE BYTE 23
00
ftRITE DATA REQUEST TIM£OUTS .. 8.
SENSE eYTE 24
OG
CHANNEL TRANSFER EQUiP CHKS .. 8.
SENSE BYTE 25
01
DRIVE OETECTED ERRCRS .. O.
SENSE EHE 26
oe
RESER'IED
SENSE BYTE 27-29 300992
CONTROL UNIT SIN • 2450.
MODEL 822 DRIVES A~7ACHED.
SENS~ SYTE 3a
00
DRiVE COMMAND CODE 1 .. O.
StrlSE BYTE 31
00
RESERVEO

WRITE DATA CHECKS· O.
READ BCKWD DATA CHECKS • O.
RESEi<VED

CONTROLLER hA~OWARE REVISION 10.
UNIT SOFTWARE VERSION 10.
UNIQUE IDENTIFIER. 070930099201 (X)
TAPE CLASS DEVICE
TA90

UNrT HARDioiARE REVISION 'a.

INTERVEN~ION

SENSE BYTE 2

RE;"C FwD DATA CHECKS· O.

UNrT SOFTWARE VERSiON ;0.

TASG EX7ENOEO SENSE !NFORMATiON

SENSE BYTE 35-40 000001

SENSE BYTE 11

CONTROLLEK SOFTWARE VERSION 139.

REQUIRED

BOT

SENSE BYTE 32-34 000001

SENSE OAT A LOG

UNIT Ill.

UNiQUE IDENTIFiER. aaSGSOGGF6G9 (X)
MASS STORAGE CONTROLLER
HSC4Q

SYSTEM ERROR RE?CRT

SENSE BYTE 35-37 012C83

0016

V A X I VMS

BLOCK 10 • o.

SENSE SHE 10

ooeOF609
012l00GG

COMPILEC 27-0CT-1989 08:15
PAGE 2.

0~r:7

MSLGSa JORMA T

MSLGSQ_CNT_ID

SENSE BYTE 7

ERROR REPORT

SENSE BYTE 9

0002

MSLGSL CMD REF 00000000
OOOB
MSLGS(UNIT

MSLGSW_EVENi

SENSE BYTE 4-6

SYSTE~

TAPE MSCP MESSAGE

MSLGSW_SEQ_NUM

A X / VMS

SENSE BYTE 8

1/0 SUB-SYSTEM, U~IT _HS:009SMUAll:

MESSAGE TYPE

READ CRITERIA DATA CHECKS. Q.

MSG 212

COMPiLED 27-CCT-1989 08:iS
PAGE 3.

CHANNEL READ BYTES PROC [X4K) • 4 K
CHANNEL WRITE BYTES PROC (X4K)-315l0g K
READ BYTES PROCESSED (X4K) ~ 4 K

~RITE BYTES PROCESSED (X4K) • 196548 K
SENSE BYTE 44-46 000003
CHANNEL READ BLOCKS PROC .. 3
SENSE BYTE 47-49 000667
CHANNEL WRITE BLOCKS PROC s 1.639 K
SENSE aYTE 50-52 000001
READ BLOCKS PROC .. i
SENSE BYTE 53-55 000335
wR1TE BLOCKS PROC a .821 K

WRiTE CRITERiA DAiA CHECKS· O.
READ RECOVERY RETRIES • 0.

DEVICE CNUNE
CONTROL UNIT 10 G.
CHANNEL ASSIGNM~~T o.
CHANNEL ADAPTER B.

52
UNLOAD STATUS PRESHIT

TA90 MG EC C13764

Format B

MSG 212

(
Mount/Dismount Entries
V A X I VMS

Field Definitions

0 is the date and time of the entry.
UNIT TSMUA7 D is the unit numbei. including HSC node name. !n this example. the HSC node name is "T".
DATE/TIME

VOLUME LABEL "07"
010 OPERATIONS

II is the tape label name.

D is the count of OtO's and errors for this tape volume.

SYSTEM ERROR REPORT

Mount/Dismount Entries

MSG 215

Mount/Dismount Entries

MSG 215

COMPILED 6-JUN-1988 15:26
PAGE 2.

1. QlO OPERATIONS TH:S VOLUME, O. ERRORS THIS VOLUME

****** •• ****************w*****ENTRY

20.

ERROR SEQUENCE 1143
DATE/TIME 1-JUL-1988 15:43:34.54 II

**********~***.*********.***

LOGGED ON:

SID 06FFOIDD
SYS_TYPE 010009F8

MOUNT VOLUME KAS7
REV, 127. LEFT CPU
SCS NODE: WACHU3, CPU' 1.

UNIT _TSMUA7~VOLUME LABEL "07"

59. QIO OPERATIONS THIS VOLUME, O. ERRORS THIS VOLUME
*************~****~*****w*w***ENTRY

ERROR SEQUENCE 1144
DATE/TIME 1-JUL-1988 15:44:07.08 II

LOGGED ON:

SID 06FF01DD
SYS_TYPE Ol0009F8

MOUNT VOLUME KA87
REV' 127. LEFT CPU
SCS NODE: WACHU3, CPU 1.

*
m
UNIT _TSMUA7:, VOLUME LABEL "07" IJ
60. Qro OPERAirONS THIS UNIT, O. ERRORS THIS UNIT
1. QIO OPERATIONS THIS VOLUME, O. ERRORS THIS VOLUME

TA90 MG EC C13764

VAXsimPLUS Messages
\'1hen media errors occur, you receive a message similar to the one shown on this page. There are messages that are due to excessive
ECC rate, excessive recovery rate, and permanent (unrecoverable) rates. The text of these messages may vary, but the formats will be
similar.
MEDIA ERRORS

D. Tape 10 (from label)
fJ. Count: number of times that Volume (Tape) was mounted.

m· Number of events (in this example, read ECC corrections).
1m. Rate: the number of records per event. (Event = read ECC corrections).
•••

•

MSG 240

Suggested Recovery Procedure:

II!!'I ., .
u·
l'IUIIlOer 01 evems \In InIS example, me numoer or times wrrte was remeo/recovereo}.
•

, •

Em· Rate: the number of MBytes per event. (Event = write recoveries).

Il· Number of events (in this example. the number of times read was retried/recovered).
1m. Rate: the number of MBytes per event. (Event = read recoveries).

m· The number of unrecoverable (permanent) write errors on this volume.
m· The number of unrecoverable (permanent) read errors pn this volume.

L29

The tape volume listed has exceeded the threshold for media defects
while reading. The errors are currently RECOVERABLE and present 1ittle
or no immediate data integrity risk. However, further action may be
required to maintain future tape library data integrity. These errors
may also be caused by faulty hardware. If this drive has experienced
experienced simiiar problems with different volumes. no:ify Digital Field Service
with the reported Theory number.

EJ. Rate: the number of records per event. (Event = read ECC corrections).

" ' "

Messages

Suspect:

D. Number of events (in this example, write ECC corrections).

.•

MSG 240

Attn:
Cus~omer
Device: FORCE$MUA3 (TA90 S/~: 70032159503)
Software Revision Level: 0
Hardware Revision Le\lel: 0
Error:
Single Tape Volume - Excessive Read Recovery Rate
Theory: [2.11.5.3]

Bad Volume - Label:

Messages

If the volum@ is defective and i5 part of the site
library, discard the tape after you copy its data to a
new volume. The media may have been damaged in handling
or may be worn out.

2. If the volume is defective and is not part of the site
library, notify the creator of possible media. drive, or
tape handling problems.
Evidence:

VOLUME MOUNT WRIiE ECC
LABEL COUNT RATE
--BLK/ERR

REM ECC WRITE REeOV
RATE
RATE
(ERRCNT)- ----MB/ERR

L29

1 1173 (24)

1771 (15)

o (O)

D EJ D

READ REeOV
VOL PERMANENT
RATE
WRITE
(ERRCNT)---- ----ERRCNT---READ
52(4)

mil m m

NOTE: Volume Theories may be incorrect if each tape volume
does not have a unique label. Ail media should be initialized
with unique ANSI standard labels to take full advantage of
Volume Fault Management.
A complete Volume Report is available using SPEAR SU~~ARIZE.

SYSTEM LIMITS (PER VOLUME):
WRITE ECC RATE
READ ECe RATE WRITE RECOV READ REeOV VOL PERMANENT
BAD MARGINAL
BAD MARGrNA~ BAD
8AD
WRITE
READ
------------BLKS/ERR------------ ----MB/ERR (ERRCNT)--- --ERRCNT----1000
Time of error:

T A90 MG EC C13764

2000

350

650

40 (3)

200 (1)

3-APR 17:34:12

(

Notes

TA90 MG EC C04824

Notes

MSG 412

Notes

MSG 412

TA90 Installation Checklist
This checklist is for FE's who have performed installations
before.

Subsystem Checkout

Go to the INST pages listed in parenthesis if you need more
information to successfully complete a st~p.

As YOll progress through the tests, note the address of any drives
that do not show the display response expected. and note
whether the drive failed during checkout from TCUO or TCU1.

Initial Setup Procedures
1. Go to !NST 6 and perform all the safety checks, then
return here. (INST 6)

4. On the last tape transport unit attached to the tape

control unit, install the terminators and the ac power
connector safety cover. (INST 22)

5. Connect the dual tape control unit communicator cables
and status store card (if present). (INST 30,31,35)

6. Set the tape control unit channel addresses. (lNST 40)

INST-Checklist

Installation Checklist

INST-Checklist

Final Setup Procedures

1. Check all drive switches for correct function. (TCUO,
INST 70) (TCU1, INST 76)

1. Attach the STI cables to the TCUs. (INST 90)
2. Connect any UEPO cables, if used, from the host
system(s) to the TCUs. (INST 120)

3. Install the radio frequency interference (RF!) shields.

(fNST 130)
2. Start the Offline Checkout procedure. (TCUO, INST 70-74)

(TCU1, INST 76-83)

2. !f the dual tape c;antrol unit configuration feature is to be
installed. place the dual tape control unit communication
cables, and the STI-FIPS cables, in position for
installation.

3. Place the tape control units (TCUs) and tape transport
units (nUs) into position and connect them. (INST 10
and 11)

Installation Checklist

4. Replace all covers

a. Set both TCUs to Offline Test and set the
Test/Normd! s\.vitches to Test.
b.

Power both TC Us off, then back on

3. On the tape control unit 0 switch panel. set the Online
Test/Offline Test switch to Online Test (TCUO, INST 78)
(TCU1, INST 81)

(INST 130)

Running HSC Subsystem Diagnostics
1. Run GMP from either the CE panel or the HSC (see
CE/HSC 1).
2.

Run the ILEXER and ILTAPE. For a dual tape control unit
subsystem (see INST 35, step 6).

4. On the tape control unit 1 switch panel, set the Online
TestlOff!ine Test switch to Offline Test (TCUa, INST 78)
(TCU1, INST 83)
5. Test each drive from TCUa. Set the Test/Normal switch
to Normal when finished.

6. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for TCU 1.

7. Set the drive logical and physical address switches, and
attach the drive address labels. (INST 50)
8. Verify that the tape control unit and tape transport unit
power supply jumpers are set correctly. (INST 55 and

56)

Checking the Initial Microprogram Load (!ML)
1

On both TCUO and TCU1, set the Power On/Off switch to
r.ff tho", tn n",
_",

... ,

,_,

.. _ _ •

III\J«::T A1\
\

.... _ '

" ' .... ,

9. On the tape control unit, set both the Power On/Off
switch and the Unit Emergency Power Off (UEPO) switch,
off. (INST 60)

10. Connect the ac power cable to the customer receptacle,
then power up. (INST 60)
11. Check the UEPO switch for proper operation. (INST 60)

TA90 MG EC C04818

Contents
4
T A90 Installation Instructions . . . . - - - - - .
4
Before Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
8efore Installation . . . . . . . . . .
p(eparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Tools and Test Equipment Needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . . . . . 4
Action Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
6
Safety Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
Machine Ground Wire Check
6
8ranch Circuit C8 Switched Off Check
6
8ranch Circuit CB Switched On Check
Installing the Tape Control Unit and the First Tape Transport Unit . . . . . . . .
10
Tape Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
10
First Tape Transport Unit
.........
. . . . . . __ . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . 11
Installing Additional Tape Transport Units.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Connecting the Dual Tape Control Unit Communication Feature Cables ... __ . . . . 30
Installing the Status Store Card
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Setting the Tape Control Unit Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Setting the Tape Control Unit TCUOITCU1 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Setting the Tape Control Unit Address Switches
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Setting the Drive Logical and Physical Addresses . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Single Tape Control Unit Subsystem . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Dual Tape Control Unit Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Checking Tape Control Unit Power Supply Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . 55
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Checking Tape Transport Unit Power Supply Jumpers
Connecting the Tape Control Unit AC Power Cable
_ ............... _ . .
60
Checking the Unit Emergency Power Off (UEPO) Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Running Offline Checkout for a Single Tape Control Unit Subsystem . . . . _ . . . . . . 70
Settin2 up for the Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Switching on the Power
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . 70
Checking the Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Checking ReadlWrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . 72
Final Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Checking the Initial Microprogram Load (IML) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Running Offline Checkout for a Dual Tape Control Unit Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Setting up for the Checkout ... _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . 76
Switching on the Power
. . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 76
Checking the Addresses. Tape Control Unit 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . 78
Checkin~ Read/Write, Tape Control Unit 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Final Checkout of Tape Control Unit 0
81
Checking the Addresses, Tape Control u~ii
81
Checking Read/Write, Tape Control Unit 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Final Checkout of Tape Control Unit 1 . . . . . .
.. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 83
Checking the Initial Microprogram Load (IML) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Installation Checks .. , - - ... - .. - - - . . . . . . - .. Installing the Radio Frequency interference (RFi) Frame Pans a~d E~ci PI~ie~
Replacing Subcovers and Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running iLEXER and iLTAPE
-' - - - . - - . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

....

Adding Tape Transport Units 10 an Installed Subsystem
Adding Tape Transport Units
............ .
Before You're Through . . . .

135
135
137

iA90 Relocate or Discontinue

140

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing Unit Emergency Power Off (UEPO) Cables _. _ .. : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
Removing STI-FIPS Cables
. . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing Power
........................... .
Removing Dual Tape Control Unit Communication Feature Cable~ . : : : : : : : : : : :
Disconnecting the Tape Transport Units and the Tape Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . .

140
140
150
160
170
180

Installing Ihe Automatic Cartridge Loader . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Instructions
. . . . . . ............................
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose and Description . . . . . . . .- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Tools and/or Materials Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T A90 Subsystem Power
.................................. .
Details Of Installation . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . .. .
Remove Drive Drawer Clear Plastic Cover . . . . . . . . : . . . . . . . . . . . : .. .
Remove Drive Drawer Cover . . . . . . . . . .
. ............ .

900
900
900
900
900

Remove the Cartridge Latch Assembly . . . . : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
Install the Load Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install the Power and Signal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . _ .. : : : : : : : : : : : : :
insiaii ine Automatic Cartridge LQadei . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install the Orive Clear PlastiC Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Procedure
..........................................
Check Latch Solenoid Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

Contents

INST 1

Contents

INST 1

130
130
130
1.,,1

900
900
910
910
910

920
930
950
980
980
980

1. : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :

. . . . . . . __ . 90
Analyzing Drive Troubles . _ . . . . . . .
90
Running GMP on Failing Drives
Setting 8ase Addresses . . . . . . ___ .
90
90
Installing STI Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subsystem Interconnections
.. _ .. __ .. .
91
Installing the Unit Emergency Power Off (UEPoi C~bl~ . : : :: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 120

TA90 MG EC C13764

Installation Instructions

TA90 Installation Instructions
Before Installation

Tools and Test Equipment Needed

CAUTION:

The following items are needed to complete the installation:

TILT HAZARD CAUTION

•
•

00 NOT open both drive! of a tape transport un!t that is not
bolted to another tape transport unit or tape conlrol unit With
the automatic cartridge loader feature Installed and both drive
drawers fully extended, a tape transport unit that Is not bolted to
another unit will lilt forward with about 20 pounds of force applied
to the top of e!ther automatic cartridge loadei.
This procedure describes all installation actions in detail,
step-by-step. Mark off each step as it is completed. Two FEs are
needed for the mechanical installation of a dual tape transport
unit subsystem, to reduce installation time. Only one FE is
needed to run the checkout and diagnostic procedures.
The Installation Overview chart shows the sequence of steps to
compieie the insiaiiation; however, the chart provides an
overview only. Follow the step by step instructions as you
proceed through the installation.

Cleaner cartridge
IML Diskette
Nete: For dual TCU Installations, ensure that all IML
diskettes are at the same EC level.

•
•

ILEXER and ILTAPE routines
Blank scratch cartridge.

INST 4

St~r1

(~)
Perlorm
safety checks

Note: Only one blank cartridge is required; however, it.
second blank cartridge, if available, reduces the
installation time.

iNST6

Run d\lal tape control
unit offline checkout
INST 16

Install O1Jal rape Control
Unit Communication
Cables
INST30

I Install the taoe control unit,'
.
and the fim taO«

transport unit
INST 10

Run single tape control
unit offline checkout
INST 10

0---~

Set tape control
unit addresses
INST40

Preparation
Inventory the items on each Bill of Material to verify that
all items were received.

Set drive logical and
phvsical addresses
INST 50

jCheck tape control unit and!
YES

Install additional
tape transport units
INST 20

Install STI ca. bles between
subsystems and HSC's

! tape transp~rt unit POvver"
:
sUj;lpl Y Jumpers
I

INST 55 & INST 56

INST90'.

;

Connect tape control
unit power cable
INS T60

i
Instal I tape
transport uniu(s)
. INST 135

',rlo"" ;",,,II";on
INST 130

'hecksl

I
Figure 1. Installation Overview

Run ILo EXER .nd
IL TAPE
INST 131

END

TA90 MG EC C13764

)

Installation Instructions

INST 4

INST 5

Installation Instructions

TA90 Installation Instructions
ACTION Messages

Messages

Description

Actions

ACTION 1

The cartridge failed to load
correctfy.

1. Unload and reload the cartridge.

The following procedures are used to correct or help isolate drive problems. The FE is senr here from the iNST section foiiowing an
ACTION message on a drive display. ACTION messages are generated for problems encountered after loading a cartridge into a drive

2. If the same failure occurs, stop testing and note the address of the
failing drive and the TCU controlling that drive.

durin~ the installation checkout procedures.

Go to the message that matches the message on the drive display that sent you here and perform the actions listed in the Actions

3. Return to the procedure that sent you here and continue testing with
the next drive displaying TEST.

column.

ACTION 2

Return to the procedure that sent you here when you have completed the actions listed in the Actions column.

1. Unload the cartridge and check to see that it is not set to file protect.

The cartridge may be set to
file protect.

2. Reload the cartridge and if it fails again, try a different cartridge.
3. If the second cartridge fails in the same way, stop testing and note the
address of the failing drive and the TCU controlling that drive. Return
to the procedure that sent you here and continue testing with the next
drive displaying TEST.

I ACTION 3

1. Restart testing using the next drive.

Incorrect address.

2. If the next drive to be tested fails in the same way, a cabie connection
problem may exist.
3. Note the address(es) of the failing drive(s) and the TCU controlling the
drive(s), then return to the procedure that sent you here and continue
testing.
ACTiON 4

1. Go to iNSr 40 and check the address switch settings.

Channei address parity
error.

2. If the problem remains, run GMP, then return to the procedure that
~.A""

........... "'_ ... _

..;;n;...... T v .... IAwl ¥

ACTIONS

.... _,,1 ___ . : _ •• _

. _ ....: _ _

ctll"" ,,",UI'UIIU"t;; l'Ci:JUII!:f.

1. Ensure that the IML diskette is the correct one for the subsystem. If

Drive did not get patches
correcUy. This could be the
drive patch or the Automatic
Cartridge Loader code load.

not replace it and start the installation checkout again from power on.

2. If the diskette is correct, continue using only the drives that display
TEST.

ACTION A

1. Go to INST 40 and check the address switch settings.

Channel address parity error
on channel A.

I
ACTION B

Channel address parity error
on channel B.

2. If the problem remains, run GMP, then return to the procedure that
sent you here and continue testing.

1. Go to INST 40 and check the address switch settings.
problem remains, run GMP, then return to the procedure that
I 2. Ifsenttheyou
here and continue testing.

I nstallati on Instructi ons
TA90 MG EC C13764

INST 5

TAgO Installation Instructions
Before starting the installation, perform the following safety
checks:

Branch Circuit CB Switched Off Check
1. DANGER

Safety Checks

Hazardous electrical voltages are present In the
connector. Do not touch the outlet case with
anything other than test probes untii step 3 is
completed.

Machine Gfound Wire Check
1. DANGER

Have the customer find and switch off the branch circuit
Hazardous electrical voltages are present in the
receptacle.
Use the volt/ohm meter to ensure that:

b. The resistance between the machine frame and
ground pin (pin 4) on tne output Socket of the tape
control unit and each tape transport unit is less than
0.1 ohm. See diagram A below.
c. The resistance between the machine frame and
ground pin (pin 4) on the input cable assembly
connector of each tape transport unit is less than 0.1
ohm. See diagram B below.
If the resistance is greater than 0.1 ohm, determine the
cause and correct it before proceeding with the
installation.

INST 6

Installation Instructions

INST 6

Branch Circuit CB Switched On Check
1. DANGER
Hazardous electrical Yoltages are present. Do
not touch the outlet before meeting the following
requirements of steps 1 and 2.
Have the customer switch on the CB that supplies
voltage to the receptacle.

CB.
2. DANGER

2. Check the voltage from the outlet case to the building
ground for less than 1.0 V ac. (Begin with the meter
scale that is appropriate for normal line voltage checks.)

a. The resistance between the machine frame and the
ground pin on the power plug is less than 0.1 ohm.

Installation Instructions

3. Check the voltage from the ground pin to the building
ground for less than 1.0 V ac. If the voltage is less than
1.0 V ac, the outlet is now safe to touch.
4. DANGER
Hazardous electrical voltages are presenL Do
not touch the intemal parts (pins and sockets) of
the outlet until step 5 Is completed.
Check the resistance from the ground pin to the outlet
case for a reading of less than 0.1 ohm.
Check the resistance from the ground pin to the building
ground for reading of less than 0.1 ohm.

Hazardous Yoltages are present. If the
measured yoltage values are less than 1.0
V ac, you can touch the outlet. Avoid contact
with the Internal parts (pins and sockets) 01 the
outlet.
Measure the voltages from the outlet case to the building
ground and the outlet case to the ground pin. Voltage
values are to be less than 1.0 V ac.

3. At the outlet, measure the voltages from the grourid pin
and the neutral pin (if present) to all phases, and
measure the voltages from phase to phase. This
ensures that the outlet is wired correctly.

4. Have the customer's branch circuit CB switched off
before connecting the TA90 power cord into the outlet.

A reading of less than 0.1 ohm indicates the presence of
a safe, continuous grounding conductor.

5. Measure the phase-te-phase voltage and the
phase-te-ground voltage at the outlet.
Measure the phase-te-neutral voltage (if present) and
the neutral-te-ground voltage (if present).
All voltage values are to be less than 1.0 V ac.

DiagramA
Ou_tput Socket (TeU and TrU)

Diagram B·
Inl?,'!.t-C"!ble ASsembly (ITU).

TA90 MG EC C04824

Installation Instructions

TA90 Installation Instructions
Installing the Tape Control Unit and the First
Tape Transport Unit

2. Place the tape control unit (TCU) in the position where it
is to be installed.

3. Place the rear casters of the TCU so that the caster lock
thumbscrews
are accessible.

Tape Control Unit

4. Lock the rear casters by turning the caster lock
thumbscrews clockwise until they are tight.

1. Before you start installation:
a. Place tlie cables that fUn between the tape
control units (on dual tape control unit
subsystems) position (or installation. Either end
of the cables attaches to either of the tape
control units.
b. Place the STI cables that come from the
HSC/HSX position for installation.

5. Open the front and rear covers.

S. Remove the left and right outside covers. See
CARR·TCU 2-1 for procedures to remove the covers from
the tape control unit
The covers are not reinstalled until after the hardware is
completely installed.

7. Remove the rear safety cover. See CARR·TCU 2·1 for
the tape control unit cover removal procedures.

10. Install the safety cover

INST 10

D on the ac power cable socket.

DANGER

00 not reinstall the safety cover until after you have
installed the Unit Emergency Power Ofr (UEPO) cable
(INST 120).

Dangerous voltages are present at the ac power
cable socket. The safety cover must be on
when the socket is not being used.

8. Remove the drip-screen guard. See CARR·TeU 2-1 for
the tape control unit cover removal procedures.
11. Plug the thermal terminatci into the theimal connector

00 not reinstall the drip-screen guard until after you
have installed the Unit Emergency Power Off (UEPO)
cable (INST 120).

IJ.
_

12. Go to INST 22, step 18.

9. Is this tape control unit being installed without any tape
transport units attached?

YES NO

These steps ensure that the cables are easily accessible
when it is time to install them.

Tape Control Unit

lo to INST II, step 1.

Locate the device data bus
tenminator card, PIN 29-27173-91,
in the ship group. Plug the
card into the device data bus
socket B.
Continue with the next step.

EI Caster

Lock
Thumbscrew

AC Safety Caller

TA90 MG E-C C13764

Installation Instructions

INST 10

TAgO Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions

Installing the Tape Control Unit and the First
Tape Transport Unit (Continued)

INST 11

3. Open the front and rear covers.

4. Plug the tape transport unit AC power connector
the tape control unit AC socket

First Tape Transport Unit

fJ into

EJ Devjce Da~a

Bus Connector

Ensure that the AC power cable is routed away from the
compressor motor and is fastened to the back of the
to prevent pinching the cable when the units
frame
are moved together.

CAUTION:
TILT HAZARD CAUTION

5. Connect the read bus cables

from the tape transport
unit to the tape control unit read bus connectors

Do NOT open both drives of a tape transport unit that is not
bolted to another tape transport unit or tape control unit. With
the automatic cartridge feature installed and both drive drawers
fully e~ended, a tape transport unit that Is not bolted to another
unit will tilt forward with about 20 pounds of force applied to the
top of either automatic cartridge loader.

Ensure th-at the local (bus A) and the remote (bus B)
cables are plugged into the proper sockets on the tape
control unit. making sure they are not crossed.

6. Connect the device data bus cable

from the tape
transport unit to the tape control unit device data bus
connector

1. Place the tape transport units near the area where they
are to be installed.

II.

Fasten the cabl$ in place with the retaining screws.

fJ.

2. Place the first tape transport unit
to the right of the
(as you face the front of the tape
tape control unit
control unit) about 20 cm (8 in.) from the tape control
unit.

II.

7. Connect the thermal cable
to the thermal connector

Local

II. on the tape transport unit

.:r.-on the tape control unit.

8. Continue to the next step on INST 13.

Tape Transport Unit
Tape Transport Unit

~ontrol Unit

Device Cata
Bus Cable

Front View

mAC Power
Cable Socket

TA90 MG EC C04824

D AC Power - - -___
Connector

m
Installation Instructions

INST 11

TAgO Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions
10. Fasten the tape control unit to the tape transport unit by
installing a hex bolt and washer at the rear of the tape .
control unit
and at the front of the tape transport unit
It may be necessary to remove the Tape Transport
Unit Front Safety cover to install hex bolt
See
CARR-DR 2-1 if the cover needs to be removed.

Installing the Tape Control Unit and the First
Tape Transport Unit (Continued)

First Tape Transport Unit (Continued)
9. Warning: Be careful that the cables do not get pinched
between the frames or covers.

II.

Hex bolts and washers are part of the ship group.
Note: If the tape control unit and tape transport unit are
not COiiectly aligned, the coven; may bind.
Ensure that the covers are not binding.

The device data and read bus cabies should be foided in
toward the middle of the machines. Ensure the power
cable is not pinched between the machine frames.
Push the tape transport unit against the tape control unit.

11. Place the rear casters so the caster lock thumbscrews
are accessible.

Nole: Be sure the position of the casters does not
prevent the tape transport unit frame from fitting
snugly against the tape control unit frame.

12. Lock the rear casters on the tape transport unit by

Tape Control Unit

Before You're Through ••.
Are you installing additional tape transport units to this tape
control unit?

YES NO

I ~o to INST 22. step 14.

Go to iNST 2Ei to install additional tape
transport units.

turning the caster lock thumbscrews clockwise until they
are tight.

~
~

INST 13

~/
t

Tape Control Unit

Front View
Front View

EJ Caster
Lock

Thumbscrew

Rear View
TA90 MG EC C04824

Installation Instructions

INST 13

Installation Instructions

TA90 Installation Instructions
Installing Additional Tape Transport Units
CAUTION:
TILT HAZARD CAUTION

-Do NOl open both drives of a tape transport unit that is not
bolted to another tapa transport unit or tape control unit. With
the automatic cartridge feature Installed and both drive drawers
fully extended. a tape transport unit that Is not bolted to another
unit will tilt forward with about 20 Ibs. of force applied to the top
of either automatic cartridge loader.

1. Place the the next tape transport unit into position.
2. Open the front and rear covers.
Warning: Ensure that the power cable is not pinched
between the machine frames.
:!. !f the s~fet'l cover h~s !he ret~!ner tightened over !t,
loosen the screw holding the retainer to the ac power
cap, rotate the retainer and retighten the screw.

4. Connect the next tape transport unit's ac power cable
to the preceding tape transport unit's power cable
socket
after removing the socket safety cover (i f not
already removed).

LOeII

Ensure that the ac power cable is routed away from the
compressor motor and is fastened to the back of the
to prevent pinching the cabte when the units
frame
are moved together.

iii

S. Connect the device data bus cable

from the next tape
transport unit to the preceding tape transport unit

II·

Fasten the cable in place with the retaining screws.

INST 20

II Device Data Bus

Connector
(Write Local/Remote)

II Read Bus

Connectors

6. Connect the two read bus cables
from the next tape
transport unit to the preceding tape unit

D·

Ensure that the local (bus A) and the remote (bus B)
cables are plugged into the proper sockets on the tape
transport unit, making sure they are not crossed.

R.mot,

7. Connect the thermal cable III on the next tape transport
unit to the thermal connector
on the preceding tape
b'ansport unit.

8. Continue with the next step on INST 21.

II Device Oat.
Bus C,bl.

II AC Power
Connector

Installation Instructions
TA90 MG EC C13764

INST 20

Installation Instructions

TA90 Installation Instructions
Installing Additional Tape Transport Units
(Continued)
9. Place the next tape transport unit against the preceding
tape unit.
Warning: When installing a tape transport unit to a tape
transport unit with the automatic cartridge loader feature
installed on drive 1, drive 1 must be opened
approximaieiy 5 em (2 in.) to prevent the conductive seal
from being pinched between the tape transport unit
frames.

INST 21

11. Place the rear casters on the new tape transport unit so
the caster lock thumbscrews
are accessible.

12a Lock the ,sai casters on the new tape transport unit by
turning the caster lock thumbscrews clockwise until they
are tight.

13. Repeat the steps on INST 20 and INST 21, for each
additional tape transport unit that is attached to the tape
control unit.
14. Go the next step on INST 22.

Note: Be sure the position of the casters does not
prevent the tape transport units from fitting
snugly together.
10. Fasten the new tape transport unit to the preceding tape
unit by installing a hex bolt and washer at the rear of the
tape transport unit
and at the front of the tape
transport unit
It may be necessary to remove the
Tape Transport Unit Front Safety cover to install hex bolt
See CARR-DR 2-1 if the cover needs to be removed.

II.

Note: If the tape transport units are not correctly
aligned, the covers may bind. Ensure that the
covers are not binding.

Rear View

Thumbscrew.-

Tape Transport Unit
(~

,,
~
,
\

...... -

Tape Transport Unit

Rear View

Tape Transport Unit

Front

TA90 MG EC C04824

Front View

Installation Instructions

INST 21

TAgO Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions

Installing Additional Tape Transport Units
(Continued)

16. Screw the safety cover
socket.

EI onto the ae power cable

INST 22

19. Are you installing a second tape controi ~nit that :5 to be
attached to this tape control unit with feature cables?

DANGER

YES NO

On the last tape transport unit attached to the tape control unit:

15.

I ~o to INST 46,

Dangerous voltages are present at the ae power
cable socket. The safety cover must be on
when the socket is not being used.

Locate the device data bus terminator card PIN
29-27173-01. in the ship group. Piug the card into the
device data bus socke1

Have you a1ready installed the second
tape control unit and the attached
:ape transport unit?

17. After the safety cover is in place. loosen the screw
holding retainer
to the ae power box. Rotate the
retainer and tighten the screw with the retainer
positioned to prevent the safety cover from being
removed.

18. Plug the thermal terminator

YES
NO
I
I
,

Return to INST Ie and repeat the
procedure for the second
tape control unit

II in the thermal connector

For a dual tape control unit subsystem, each
tape control unit has a unique identity: TCU0
or TCU1. The identification switches
will be set later during the installation.
Go to INST 30 to connect the dual tape
control unit communication cables.

II Thermal Connector

AC Power
Cable Socket

Local

---...11.... .

@(1.''(0/
. /11

II Device Data Bus
Thermal

Terminator

\,minator Card

Remott

II
AC Safety Cover

Read Bus Cables
TA90 MG EC C04824

Installation Instructions

INST 22

T A 90 Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions

INST 30

Installation Instructions

INST 30

Connecting the Dual Tape Control Unit
Communication Feature Cables
1. Bring the cable ends up from the bottom of the tape
control unit, inside the machine frame, at the rear of the
tape control unil
Note: Ensure that t.r,e cables are positioned so the cable
connectors line up correctly with the cable sockets.

2. Continue to the next step on INST 31.
Note: Both tape control units of a dual tape control unit
subsystem must have the Improved Data Recording
Capability feature before the Improved Data Recording
Capability allowed switch can be set If only one tape
control unit has the feature, the Improved Data Recording
Capability allowed switch must be set off. See CARR-TCU
1200 for switch position assignments.
Tape Control Unit a

Tape Control Unit 1

Dual Tape Control Unit
. Communication Cables

-==-=

3 Connector Cable

2 Connector Cable

TA90 MG EC C13764

Installation Instructions

TA90 Installation Instructions

INST 31

Connecting the Dual Tape Control Unit
Communication Feature Cables (Continued)
3. Before installing the cables, press the cable contacts
firmly against the ESD pad Ii] to remove any
electrostatic discharge.
4. Connect the grounding strip from the 3-connector cable.
Attach the braided ground strap to the frame at

II.

5. Connect the grounding strip from the 2-connector cable.
Attach the strip to the wingnut at

6. Plug the 2-connector cable connectors
Al, andA2.

in sockets

Ground Scrap
Ground Strap

7. Plug the 3-connector cable connectors A3, A4, and AS

in sockets A3, A4, and AS, and fasten them in place
with the retaining screws.

8. L.cosen the wingnuts II on the cable retaining brackets

and rotate the brackets away from the center guide
post

9. Place the cables between the guide posts

and rotate
the retaining brackets in to the center guide post

10. Tighten the wingnuts on the retaining brackets.

11. Go to INST 35 to install the Status Store Card.

Tape Transport Unit

~ ;1
~
~I
I

. -

(I
:I

mGuide Posts

II Brackets
Retaining

Wingnuts

~
II
TA90 MG EC C13764

Install ation Instructions

INST 31

TAgO Installation Instructions

INST 35

Installation Instructions

Installing the Status Store Card
Logic Board OlA·A 1

Note: If a logic card is installed in location 01A-A1F2 go
to step 6.

1. Remove the logic card retainers
top and bottom from
card locations 01A-A1B2 through 01A-A1G2 top and
bottom.
2. Remove the dummy card in iocation 01A-A1F2

II.

...-=a~I--II... -o~l C\~

c;J

e:: <
C ~S:!
...

;

~~':ii
.~J -

4. Reinstall logic card retainers
top and bottom in card
locations 01A-A1B2 through 01A-A1G2.

~~8
I
---

at card locations
01A-A1WFG, 01A-A1XFG. 01A-A1YFG, and 01A-A1ZFG

::'" =
~

II.

,-1
I
1- 'j

6. Testing the Dual Communication feature:

Ii;

. "'I

Note: This feature must be installed in both Tape
Control Units before proceeding with the test
procedure.

I
I

I I
I
I

II I

!~ -

L i
I

-.:!

.6 Sus)

Wr':I

~~Ot!

->~

•

.::

....

'"':-"

c..
Ii

.::..

I ! II I II ! I I I I
I
I I I
i
I II
I

~
~I.!!IUIS

z I I, Writ! 1I, I, SS :!"'orr. 1! \I• SS lr:.i

7. Go to INST 40 to set the Tape Controi Unit addresses and
return here when complete.

L:!cal

~lI

Wr::e BU$

-.=-- -- .!! c:
0 i
..!

...
::

~IS

i=I'~Ot!

-c. 0 ..,
- - - - en0 -o~I=I~IQ
~:,
~ < C3 U
< 5 en

!!!

u:= .: c= ~ ~=
~
~ u
.;
....
-0
E
~
c---:

fJ.

5. Install top card connectors (TCC)

-a;,fS .. s/t.!)I

""'

.;: I

:; ~
=:.:

E
~

Cu/CU

CU/CU

I
IJI!I~ E ~
C

j. ~

~._

3. Install the Status Store Communication Card into card
location 01A-A 1F2

..2

~e3d 1

I I Bud2 I I B::ad 3 J I
,

8. Go to !!'IST 50 to set the Dr1ve !og1ca! and physical
addresses and return here when complete.

9. On the Tape Control Unit that has drive addresses 0 - 7.
using the CE Panel (see CE/HSC) pin drive 0 remotely
and run ILTAPE for 5 minutes on drive O.

01 A·A 1 lOP Card Connectors and Cables

10. Press DIAG on the CE Panel to unpin the drive.

11. On the Tape Control Unit that has drive addresses B - 15.
using the CE Panel (see CE/HSC) pin drive B remotely
and run ILTAPE for 5 minutes on drive 8.

I-!

w
12. Press DIAG on the CE Panel to unpin the drive.

13. Put the TA90-DC serial number label
Control Units.

II on both Tape

II Top Card

XKL

Connector

x~s

(TCC)

y~s

f---

I
z I Write 1

SS Inti

SS Intf

Zt<L

ZPQ

Rud 1)

Fiue 2

Rud 3

TAgO MG EC C04824

Inslallation Instructions

INST 35

TAgO Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions

INST 40

Install atlon Instructions

INST 40

Each switch pair has two thumbwheel switches. The I~ft switch
is set to the tape control unit address. The right switch b; set to a
Moderrype value to be determined by the Swi tch Setting Chart

Setting the Tape Control Unit TCUOITCU1 Switch
On a single tape control unit subsystem:

0 to .CUO.
2. Set the thumbwheel switches II to 00.
1. Set the TCUO/TCUl switch

On a dual tape control unit subsystem:
1. On TCUO. set the TCUOrrCU1 switch

D to TCllO.

Note: TCUO has drive addresses 0 -7 physic~"y
attached to the tape control uni t
2. On TClJO, set the thumbwheel switches to 00.
3. On TCU1, set the TCUOrrCUl switch

D to TC!JI.

Note: TCUl has drive addresses 8 - F phy5ic~lIy
attached to the tape control uni l
4. On TCU1, set the thumbwheel switches

H to IC.

'
I

IJamaamaTA90j

OO~~
L

OO[!]~
R

fOi11-l =- l2jI
I

Wilen In Local

~ Po.er Off

1---------------------------------------------------------------------1----------------------------------------------------------i

I
i

Switch Setting Chart

EJ~

0 1;..-_ _ _ _ _ _ _........

:::J

~-------~~~I
TCU Mode/Type
TAPE CONTROL UII1T AIJORESS

3HB
9

.
I

IMl 0
:~ror

Walt
c:::J

li0~(/)I~.
I.
.

H {ooo6o\
\02QQQ
'~,
I ,0
0

TA90 MG EC C13764

DC
Power

'
I
i

INST 50

Installation Instructions

T A 90 Installa tion Instructions
Setting the Drive Logical and Physical Addresses

2. Open the rear cover of the tape transport units.

Use the following procedures to set the drive logical address,
and physical address. There are separate procedures for a
single tape control unit subsystem and a dual tape control unit
subsystem --- be sure to use the correct procedure.

3. Find the physical address switch
drive drawer.

Single Tape Control Unit Subsystem
1. Set the drive logical address switches

Dual iape Control Unit Subsystem

11 on the back of the

1. Set the drive logical address switches
on the drives
attached to TCUO, to 0 through 7; set the drive next to the
tape control unit to 0, set the next drive to 1, and so forth.
See figure 1.

4. Set the drive physical address switches to match the
iogicai address swi iches.

2. Set the drive logical address switches
on the drives
attached to TCU1, to 8 through F; set the drive next to
the tape control unit to 8, .set the next drive to 9. and so
forth. See fi gure 1.

5. Close the rear cover of the tape transport units.

0 to 0 through 7;

set the drive next to the tape control unit to 0, set the
next drive to 1. and so forth. See figure 1.

J. Open the rear cover of the tape transport units.

6. Ensure that the logical and physical address switches
are set on aii drives before continuing.

4. Find the physical address switch
drive drawer.

5. Set the drive physical address switches ttS match the
logical address switches.

6. Close the rear cover of the tape transport units.
7. Ensure that the logical and physical address switches
are set on all drives before continuing

8. Go to INST 55 to check the tape control unit power

7. Go to INST 55 to check the tape control unit power

supply jumpers.

r~,~~~~----------------~Il

~.J..""::::~':::;-=-..;..--::::::::=--- El P:'y si cal Acd r2S S
S'N:~ch

I t;~

CUO

CUI

II on the back or the

Figure 1. Required Drive Address Values

fl Orive Address
Label

Rew!r.d

Unload

ReadyiNo. ReacI{

Switch

Swit::h

E1 Phys;cal Address
S,.... i:ch

Logical Address
Switches
Rear View

[E]

OAlve POwE~

DAIV! POw!~

[0]
FESH

AESc:r
OilllVE A.OORESS

TA90 MG EC C13764

Installation Instructions

INST 50

T AgO Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions

Checking Tape Control Unit Power Supply
Jumpers
Check the jumpers for the tape control unit ac (PS01) power
supp:y. If the installation is a dual tape control unit subsystem,
t;neck both tape control units.

TCU INPUT VOLTAGE

POSITION OF AC
(PS91) JUMPER

REF

2ge/29a V ac

J99

22G V ac

v.11:1

239/249 V ac

Jll

1. Remove the safety cover.

2. Use one of the following two tables to check the voltage
settings. Ensure the jumpers are installed correctly for
the voltage being used.

3. Switch all of the circuit breakers on each tape control
unit off then back on. See LOC 1 for the rcu dc and ac
power supplies.

TAPE CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE JUMPERS
66 HZ AND 56 HZ JAPAN

4. Open the back of each rcu and ensure that the Service
switch mounted on the gate is in the On position. See

LOC 1.
5. Go to INST 60 if no tape transport units are to be
connected to this tape control unit

6. Go to INST 56 to check the tape transport uni t power

CONVENIENCE
OUTLET

Note: For 50 Hz (except Japan) machines, if the
DeltalWye jumper has to be changed (JOg and J10
on TCU-PS01). ensure that the cap is reinstalled
on the empty socket

INST 55

supply jumpers.

lGa V ac

Jl2

129 V ac

Jl3

II
II

TAPE CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE JUMPERS
59 HZ (EXCEPT JAPAN)
POSITION OF AC
(PSGl) JUMPERS

TCU INPUT VOLTAGE

I ?r:t9 1?68 V ac
,,"v

...

229 V ac
I

REF

I Jag Jl1 J13 I
I
i'

I Jag, Jl1. Jl4
f ,,,,,

,1 1

11 J:

v,,:t, t,J 11, oJ J...1

38e V ac

J1I3, J12. J14

4ea V ac

JIB, J12. Jl5

415 V ac

JI2. J15
" r!I
"'''''''I

D
D
D

"t.3t:J11.t+t:J V tic;;

~~
-~ ~

JlI

60 Hz (and 50 Hz in Japan)

4)y
~
JI4~~---;--(

~~~

CU·PSOl
AC Power Supply

Front

TA90 MG EC C13764

J!S

JlO

ml°
000
00

50 Hz (except Japan)

Installation Instructions

INST 55

TA90 Installation Instructions
Checking Tape Transport Unit Power Supply
Jumpers

Installation Instructions

INST 56

Installation Instructions

INST 56

2. Switch all circuit breakers on each tape transport unit off
then back on. See LOC 1 for circuit breaker locations.
Close the rear cover.

Use the following table to check for correct '1Oliage jumpering on
each tape transport unit de power supply.

3. Go to INST 60 to connect the tape control unit ac power

cable.

Attention: The correct position or the tape transport unit' 5 de
(PS01) jumper is determined by the tape control unit's input
voltage, NOT the tape transport unit's input voltage. See the
table below.

i. Open the rear cover to gain access to the dc power
supply.
There are two dc power supplies: see the illustrations to
determine which supply is in the tape transport unit.

TAPE TRANSPORT UNIT VOLTAGE JUMPER

I
TeU INPUT VOLTAGE

I ORO@OOOO@ «Y .....
CSI

Jtt

nt\COfTTnlo.
r\l~1. I ...

1"'Ir'"

n,..

un ur u"

(PS91) JUH'ER

299/299 V ac

J12

229 V ac

J13

239/249 V ac

J14

389 V ac

J13

499 V ac

J14

415 V ac

J14

ORt

FIt

ORO :::::

•

000000
Fa

F3 FlO FI2

«Y .....
.....

C3l

J10

~
J1J

~
Jl.s

(

)

~
J15

0FtJ
(

Voltage
Jumper

Jt2

ORt •••••

~
L
)

J15

JI1

OROCCOOO@O. ORO:::::
0.' ~~~~~~9.
ORl :::::
F1

Fia

Ftl

~
J12

F1J

•
J9

J1J

0000<1

~
J14

~
J15

J10

0
(

TA90 MG EC C13764

[

L
)

FIS
(

Voltage
Jumper

~
l)

JtlS

(

Installation Instructions

T A 90 Installation Instructions
3. On the tape control unit operator setup panel:

Connecting the Tape Control Unit AC Power
Cable

a. Set the Power OnlOff swi ten

DANGER

---------------------------------,

II to On.

b. Set the Online TesUOffline Test switch
Offline Test.

IMake sure the circuit breaker that supplies power to the
customer's receptacle Is OFF.

c. Set the Local/Remote switch

If you are installing a dual tape control unit subsystem,
power to both customer receptacles must be OFF.

EI to

mto Local.

4. On each drive switch panel:
a. Set the Drive Power switches

Make sure that there are no cables attached to the I/O
tailgate assembly In the bottom rear of the tape control
unit

m
m

to On.

b. Set the Online/Offline switches

to Online.

7. Vibration or temperatures exceeding operating
temperatures during shipping may trip the upper or
lower thermal switches on the logic gate.

Does the tape control unit power on with the UEPO
switch in the Power Off position?

D to Off.
8. Loosen the two screws 1m on the top of the logic gate
fJ. and raise the top cover to gain access to the upper

YES NO

Set the UEPO switch

thermal switch

9. Press the reset button located on the upper thermal
switch, then lower the top cover. and tighten the two top
cover screws.
10. Locate the lower thermal switch
the logic gate.

m on the bottom of

5. Have the customer switch on the circuit breaker that
supplies power to the customer receptacle.

Note: See INST 61 for the following locations.

1. On the tape control unit o~rator setup (OSU) panel, set
the Power On/Off switch II to Off. Set the Unit
Emergency Power Off (UEPO) switch
to Power Off.

S. On the tape control unit operator setup panel:

D to Power Enable.
b. Press the Local Power Enable switch D to

Are you satisfied that the customer receptacle and tape
control unit power connector are wired correctly? See
INST 6 for safety checks.

supply power to the tape control unit and its
attached drives.
Is the DC Power iight on the tape controi unit operator
setup panel Dan?

YES·NO
lnform the customer to have the
wiring corrected.

12. Reset the upper and lower thermals in the STI gate (refer
to LOC 45).

YES NO
I

Set the switch to On and press
the Local Power Enabl e switch

YES NO

I ~o

!o step 7 on this page.
step 15 on this page.

Go step 7 on this page.
Go step 15 on this page.

Does the tape control unit power on with the
UEPO switch in the Power Off position?

II GoI to step 18 on this page.

Go to ~IAP 919a-Power Start, on PWR lEla,
to repair the power failure; then return
here to complete the installation.
18. Are you installing a single tape control unit subsystem?

Is the DC Power liaht on the tape control unit operator
setup panel
O~?'
.

YES NO

._- rNO

I lre

two FE's installing
this subsystem at the same time?

YES NO

Continue with the next step.

Checking the Unit Emergency Power Off (UEPO)
switch
15. Set the tape control unit Power On/Off switch D to the

Repeat steps 1 through 17 for
the second tape control unit~hen
set the Power ON/OFF swi tch E.I
to OFF on both tape control units
and go to INST 76.

Set Power ON/OFF switch D to OFF
and go to INST 76.
Set Power ON/OFF swi tch II to OFF
and go to INST 7a.

Off position.
16. Set the UEPO switch

D to the Power Off position.

17. Attempt to power on the tape control unit with the UEPO
switch in the Power Off position, by doing the following:
a. Set the Power OnlOff switch
position.

11 to the On

b. Press the Local Power Enable switch

TA90 MG EC C13764

There is a problem with the UEPO switch
(FRU198) or the ac power supply (FRU144).
Follow the instructions in the CARR-TCU
section of the Maintenance Guide
for the removal and replacement of those
FRUs. Return here and repeat steps 14
through 16 after each FRU is replaced.

14. Press the Lecal Power Enable switch
to supply
power to the tape control unit and its attached drives.

11.

Is the DC Power light on the reu
operator se.tup panel DOn?

D to Power Enable.

Go to MAP 9lea-Power Start, on PWR
lee. to repair the power failurej
then return to this page, INST 6a,
step 2 and continue.

Is the Service switch on the alA
gate in the reu
set to On?
to

13. Set the UEPO switch

I lo to step 18 on this page.

YES NO

VF~

YES NO

Continue to the next step.
2. Connect the tape control unit ac power connector
the customer receptacie.

11. Press the lower thermal switch reset button.

a. Set the UEPO switch

INST 60

Installation Instructions

INST 60

Installation Instructions

INST 61

Press to
I.
Reset Thuma,
Switch

D Logic Gate

o
I
D

/
Front of Panel

Drive Switch Panel

ORIV: pOWeM

[0]
RESET

[Sffi~
DRIVE AOORc:~

ONLINE

(Ej
OFFLINE

Lower Thermal Switch

o~=

OFF~

m
m AC

Power
Connector
Press to
Reset Thermal
Switch

TA90 MG EC C13764

In~tallation Instructions

INST 61

TA90 Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions

Running Offline Checkout for a Single Tape
Control Unit Subsystem

4. On each drive with the Automatic Cartridge loader
feature, set the Loader switch
to Auto.

Go to INST 76 if you have a dual

tape control unit subsystem.

The offline checkout tests whether the tape Gontrol unit can
communicate with all the drives in the subsystem.
As you progress through the tests, you are asked to note the
addres5 of any drive that does not show the display response
expected. Arter the offline checkout is complete, you will be senl
to INST 90 to analyze the drives that failed during the checkout.

II will Ught when certain portions of the offline

tests are run. This condition is normal and does not indicate a
failure In the tape control unit unless you are asked to note the

III

Switching on the Power

YES NO

II
I

6. Ensure that the main circuit breaker on the tape control
unit fCB 1 on the ac power supply) is off; then switch it
on.

Do special box·shaped symbols show in the first and last
positions or the message display?
YES NO

Note the drive addresses without
a ~fnq'e asterisk and continue to
the next step.

Continue to the next step.
11. On each drive switch panel, press then release the
Reset switch

11!J.

Does a single asterisk
show for ten seconds or longer
on each drive message display?

trote the drivl! ad.Jresses
I without
the special box-shapl!d
and cont1nue to tne next
step.
IContlnu!!
to the next step.
I

.•

S~bOIS

13. On the drive switch panel, set the Online/Offline switch
to Online and verify that the special box-shaped
symbols go away.

Do the special box-shaped symbols go away?

status of the error light.

7. Set Unit Emergency Power Off switch on the tape controi
unit
to Power Enable.

Setting Up for the Checkout

8. Press the Local Power Enable pushbutton
tape control unit operator setup panel.

Note: If you are adding a tape transport unit to a previously
installed subsystem, do the following procedures testing
only that tape transport unit you are adding.

12. On each drive switch panel, set the Online/Offline switch
to Offline.

Does a single asterisk
st-.ow for ten seconds or longer
on each drive message display?

Push the release bulton on the IML disk drive
and remove the head protector.
b. Insert the Functional di skette, making sure the
diskeHe is not write-protected (the window is
closed) before insertion.
c. Set the Power OnlOff switch
to On.

ThJ~ procedure Is used for offline checkout of a single tape

The error light

5. On the tape control unit:

Note: See iNST 71 for the physical locations.
~ontrol unit subsystem only.

10. On each drive swirch panel, set the Drive Power switch
to Off; then set it back to On.

INST 70

D on the

9. Does a single asterisk
show for ten seconds or longer
on each drive message display?

Y£S NO

Noh the drive addresses

without a Single asterisk and
continue to the next step.
Continue to the next step.

YES ~IO

Note the drive addresses where the
special box-shaped symbols do not go
aW!y, and eontinue with the next step.
Cont inUI! wi th thl! next step.
14. Go to INST 72 to continue the offline checkout.

l L.::;n
ES NO

1. On the tape control unit operator setup panel:

a. Verify that the Power On/Off switch
is set to
Off.
b: Set the NormallTest switch
to Test.
c. Verify that the TCUOITCUI switch
is set to
TeUO. (Required for single tape control unit
subsystems).
d. Verify that the Online TesVOffline Test switch
is set to Offline Test.

YES NO

SWItch orr the llI.llnllne circuit
brealeer (CBt on the ac power
supply) and set the switches as
speci fled In steps 1. 2, and 3;
then perf" ..... steps S through 7.

Does a single asterisk shl)W for
ten seconds or longer on eaeh
drive _essi1ge display?

ES NO

2. On each drive operator panel:
_

a. Set the Ready/Not Ready switch

to Ready.

3. On each drive switch panel:

a. Verify that the Drive Power switch

D is set to

On.
b. Verify that the Online/Offline switch
to Online.

TASO MG EC C13764

Note the drive addresses
without a single
as terhk and conti nue to
the next step.

m is set

Cnnt! nue to the next stell.

Note the drive addresses
without a single asterisk and

cont;nul! to the next step.

Continue to the ne~t step.

Install ation Instructions

INST 70

TA90 Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions

Automatic Cartridge
Loader Operator Panel

W"-II In LOcal

_____ Au:o

I
"'----1

........ ..

'!pi

"•f1l11t. _ _,.,.tC

I mil]
I

1°

DlsaDle
c::::I

. R

DiM_
C

Syr.em

....-..... Manual

i~--=iDI

I -

INST 71

T..

1OJO
lei,

_I~ OM.

DC
Poww
c::::I

AI-----------t

~...c::::I

EmIr

WIIIt

1111111111111111111111111111

Power

Drive Switch Panel

Drive Operator Panel

o
Online

Rewind

D
TA90 MG EC C13164

Unload

F=II . . ---;..-m

Drive Addr~s~
Oniin~

Not Rudy

Offline

Of~line

Installation Instructions

INST 71

Installation Instructions

TA90 Installation Instructions
Running Offline Checkout for a Single Tape
Control Unit Subsystem (Continued)

I f f ~Gil ta EAD 1. Drive Inte!"conner.t

'I·

Pnbh.,. then return to step IS.

Note: See INST 73 for the following locations.

lIote the addresses of any drives
tha t do not show the correc t
dlspl.:iy. then continue with the
next step.

Checking the Addresses
I

15. On the tape control unit operator setup panel, set the
Online Test/Offline Test switch
to Online Test.

After a short delay (1 1/2 minutes or less) does "L-x
P - x" (x being any number between 0 and 7) appear on
any drive displ ay?

Power off the tape control unl t wi th the
Power On/Off swi tch
and verify that
the swl tches are set correctly on the
tape control unit and tape transport uni t panels.
·Settln9 ~ for the Cher.kout· steps 1.
2. and 3 on IIIST 78 for the correct
switch set t I ngs. Correc t any swi tch
settings that are wrong. Power up and
repeat the actions you perfonned In
step 14.

See

ES liD

{he Teu wi 11 no t load the IIi croIIroqra. and IIUSt be fixed to
contInue. Set the IIonaal/Test
swl tch
to N'lUa I and press
the IHl swi tch II.
Run GMP/TA9fJ Support Diagnostics to
Isolate the problell and return
here when the problell is fixed.

Set the Nor.al/Test switch to Test
and cheCK the leU and tape transport uni t
switch settings again. See
·Settlng Up for the Checkout· steps
1, 2. and 3 on (NST 78 for the
correct switch settings. Correct
any switch settings that are wrong.
Power up and repeat the actions
~1J 1I!T'flf~d tn stev 15.
Does ·L-x p·x· appear on any tape
drive display?

iI r

D on each display.

lES jO
Ensure tha t a 11 the drive log1 ca 1
addresses are set correctly. See
·Setting the Drive logical and
Physical Addresses· on (NST 59.
leavln, the tape control unit online. power
It off then back on again. IIote the
addressu. Df any drives whose display
labels
still do not !latch the "L"'x'
portion or the display. thin cantIn:!!!
to the next step.

Ensure that the ·pax· (physical address)
portion of each display does not lIatch the
·P"x· portion oi any other drive uhpiay
in the subsystell.

Does each drive display have a up - x" number not •
shared by any other drive?

ES I:sure tha.t .all of the drive physical
addresses are set correctly. See
]
·5e ttl ng the Dr; 'Ie logi ca I and
Physical Addresses" on INST 56.
Leaving the tape control unit online. power
It off then on again. Note any drive
physical addresses that are still
Incorrect and conthue to the next step.
ton t I nue with the nex t step.

fJ to Offline Test.

16. Compare the uL - x" (logical address) portion of each

Does "Lax P-x" appear on any tape
drive display?

Online Test/Offline Test switch

Note: If an Action message appears on any drive
display, go to INST 5 and perform the action
.described for that message. Return here when
finished. and set the Power OnlOff switch
to
Off then On and go to step 15 on this page.

Does each drive display aatch the label?

if. On the tape control unit operator setup panel, set the

Note the addresses of any drives that do
not show the correct display. then
continue with the next step.

drive display to the address label

When UNLOAD appears on the display of the first drive,
the next drive with a tape loaded will begin testing.

After a delay of 1 1/2 minutes or less. does TEST show
with the indicator bars
ftashing on the message
display of any drive?

Note the addresses 0 r any drives tha t
do not ~how tne eorr.:ct display, tha:;
continue with the next step.

YES NO

Checking Read/Write

~he TCU wi 11 not load the .i croprograll

and .ust be fixed. to co~ue. Set
the lIorll<1l/lest switch
to NOnlal
and press the IHL swl teh
•
Run GHP/TA99 Support Diagnostics to
isolate the prable. and return here
when th~ proble_ h fixed.
Set the No.-.al/Test switch

Note: This testing PiOcedUfe can be performed with one
scratch tape, but you must wait for each drive to
unload the tape. This increases the test time to 2
1/2 mi nutes for each drive.

26. When the first drive UNLOADs, move that tape to the
next drive showing TEST. If the cartridge does no!
unload. go to "Cartridge Removal by Hand" on CART 10.
27. Repeat this procedure ror all drives in the subsystem
showing TEST.
28. If failures occur on multiple drives in a string. there may
be a cable connection problem. Check the seating of the
device data and read bus cables. and the dual tape
control unit communication cables {for dual control unit
subsystems}. See LOC 1 for the tape control unit and
tape transport unit cable locations.

ES 110

0 to Test

When you have finished checking the cables, insert a
cartridge into those drives that were failing and rerun
the tests.

W the Online lest/Offline Test switch

Q to Online Test.
Wai t until addresses appear on
the drive displays, then repeat step 16
on this p"ge.

~o"tinue to the next step.
18. Set a blank cartridge

INST 72

D to not file protect.

19. If the Automatic Cartridge Loader feature is installed,
skip the next step.

29. If any drives will not run the tests to completion, note the
failing drive addresses and that TCUO was running the
test. This will be used later on INST 90 when the GMP
diagnostics are run.
30. Go to the next step on INST 74.

20. Insert the cartridge into the drive that is nearest the tape
control unit and displaying TEST. Close the cartridge
latch and skip the next TWO steps.

21. Put a cartridge in the top position of the loader on the
drive nearest the tape control unit and displaying TEST.

22. Ensure that the Loader mode switch
mode and press the Start switch

mis set to Auto

23. If the display shows Action Message " 2. 3. or 5 after
you load the tape cartridge, go to "Action Messages" on
INST 5 and perform the procedure as directed. Return
here when you have completed the requi red procedure.
24. The diagnostic will show various messages on the drive
display as it executes, indicating the action the drive is
performing.
Each drive will require about 1 3/4 minutes to e)Cecute
the test. and when complete, will show a single asterisk
on the di spl ay.
25. While the first drive is being tested, set another blank
cartridge
to not file protect and insert it into the next
drive displaying TEST. The display will show READY U.

- .. -- •• " .. ,.,. "'A"''''~''

Installation Instructions

INST 72

Installation Instructions

TASO Installation Instructions

IN ST 73

i1--------------------- -t.
.,

-------,d

JI~

ll~

-r.

If,..,....... . .
If,..,t......

- I

Automatic Cartridge
Loader Operator Panel

...

Au~o

Manual

i Star:

Pow'!r

I'U
m-----"

1°
B

Driv.D~r~_~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~_

[ ~~
. Blank
Cartridge
File Protect
Position

TA90 MG EC C13764

m~·D

fEJl
lQ

Not File Protect
Position

Installation Instructions

INST 73

(

TA90 Installation Instructions
Running Offline Checkout for a Single Tape
Control Unit Subsystem (Continued)

Installation Instructions

INST 74

Install ation Instructions

INST 74

Checking the Initial Microprogram Load (IML)
33. Ensure that the functionai diskette is not write-protected
(the window is closed).

Final Checkout
31. On the tape control unit operator setup panel. set the
NormaifTest switch
to Normal.

34. On the tape control unit operator setup panel. sel the
Power OnlOff swi tch
to Off, then On.

After approximately 2 minutes the Wait light
on the
tape control unit operator setup panel should be on
solidly. and the Error light
should be off.

r· .... ··) show on all drive displays

Do eight asterisks
not showing TEST?

Are all the lights correct?

YES NO

Is the Honnal/Test switch
to HOnMl?

D set

YES NO

The tape control unit will not load the micro-

YES NO

Set the switch to Normal and
repea t step 26.
Do eight asterisks show on all
drive displays not showing TEST?

YES NO

program and must be fixed to cont Inue.
Ensure the Norma lITes t switch D is set
to tlormal and the Online Test/Offline Test
switch 0 is on Online Test.
Press the IMl switch II.
Run GNP/TMO Support Diagnostics to Isolate
the problem, and return here when the
prob lem is fixed.

Go to HIST 90, the Offline checkout fs canplete.

Note the drive addresses
that do not show eight
asterisks or TEST and
continue to the next step.

I
I
I I Continue to the next step.
I
t
not show ei
asterisks or TEST
and continup. to the next step.
IContinue to the next step.
i

~!!t!

the d!"!'!! edd!"!ss!s tM
ght

diJ

Test

IAIIBII~~I

1~1191!~tl
L.:..:...J L=-...J L-.....J

....,.... ,....

""'."",'1
,.
,.

I
I

TA90 MG EC C13764

mmJ
L

ClnOie

OtuOie

c:::I

c:::J

r-~------------~~-

;--1--~o=il

-- 8
T..

1tUD

lCU 1

TA90 Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions

Running Offline Checkout for a Dual Tape Control
Unit Subsystem

4. On each drive with the Automatic Cartridge Loader
feature, set the loader switch
to Auto.

5. On both tape control units:

Note: See INST 77 for the physical locations.

a. Push the release button on the IML disk drive
and remove the head protector.
b. Insert the Functional diskette, making sure the
diskette is not write-protected (the window is
closed) before insertion..
C. Sel the Power On/Off switch
to On.

This prc>cedure Is used for online checkout of a dual tape control
unit subsystem only. Go to INST 70 if you h.we a single tape
control unit subsystem.

The offline checkout tests whether both tape control units can
communicate with all the drives in the subsystem. Therefore,
some steps in the following procedure appear to be repeated.
As you progress through the tests, you are asked to note the
addresses of any drives without the display response expected.
Also, you should note whether the drive failed during checkout
from Teuo or TCU1. After the offline checkout is complete. you
will be sent to INST 90 to analyze any drives that failed during the
checkout

The error light
will light when cerl.ain portions 01 the aRline
tesis are run. This condition is normal and does nof indicate a
failure in the tape control unit unless you are asked to nofe the
stalus olllle error light

Switching on the Power
6. Ensure that the main circuit breaker on the TCU (CB1 on
the ac power supply) is off; then switch it On.

7. On both tape control units, set the Unit Emergency
Power switch III to Power Enable.

8. Press the local Power Enable pushbutton IJ on both
tape control units.

9. Does a single asterisk (+) show for ten seconds or longer
on each drive display?

Setting Up for the Checkout

1. On both tape control unit operator setup panels:

I 1,..: all thO! swi lefte;: set correctly?

Hot! the driv! addresses of the driv!s
without the special box-shaped
s~bols and which leU those driv!s are
attached to, and continue to the next
step.

11. On each drive switch panel, press then release the drive
Reset switch

1IlJ.

Does a single asterisk
on each drive di splay?

n show for ten seconds or longer

YES NO

Note the drive addresses of the drives without a single
asterisk, and which TeU those drives
are attached to, and continue to the
next step.
I
Continue to the next step.

Contlnu! to the next stf!p.

13. On each drive switch panel. set the Online/Offline switch
to Online and verify that the special box-shaped
symbols go away.

Do the special box-shaped symbols go away?
YES NO

Note the drive addresses of the drives
whf!re the spec la I box-shaped symho Is
do not go away, and which lCU those
drives are attached to; then continue
to the next step.

14. Go to INST 7810 continue the offline checkout.

Note the drive addresses of
the drives wi thollt a
single asterisk, and which lCU
those drives are attached to,
and continue to the next step.

m to
D

, i

ES NO

2. On all drive operator panel s:

a. Verify that the Drive Power switches
are set
to On.
b. Verify that the Online Test/Offline Test switches
are set to Offline Test

YES NO

COilt inue to the ned step.

Does a single asterisk show for
ten seconds or longer on each
drive display?

3. On all drive switch panels:

Do special box-shaped symbols show in the first and last
positions of the message display?

Ready.

Note the drive addressu of the
drives without a single
ashrisk, and which lCU those drives
are attached to, and continue to the
next step.

Switch ofr the II.1lnllne circuit
brealct!r (CRI on the ac power
supply) and set the switches as
speci fI ed I n steps 1. 2. and 3:
then perfol'1ll steps 5 through 7.

Off.
b. Set the NormalfTest switch
to Test.
C. Verify that the TCUOITCUl switch
is set to
TClIO on tape conlrol unit 0 and is set to TCU1
on tape control unit 1.
d. Verify that the Online Test/Offline Test switch
is set to Oflline Test

a Set the ReadylNot Ready switches

m 10 Offline.

ES NO

a. Verify that the Power OnlOff switch 11 is set to

12. On each drive switch panel. set the Online/Offline switch

'YES NO

Cant fnup. with the next step.

YES NO

Note: The offline checkout should be performed by only one CEo

INST 76

Cant inue to the next step.
Note the drive addresses of the
drives wi thout a s I nCJI e
asterisk. and which TCU those drives
are attached to. and continue to
the next 'Hep.
Continue to the next step.

10. On each drive switch panel, set the Drive Power switch
to Off, then set it back to On.

Does a single asterisk (") show rer ten seconds or longer
on each drive display?

TA90 MG EC C13764

Install ation Instructions

INST 76

TAgO Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions

'-'

I ~ay!t I

~Unlt
!r--'I !
Ii

l-i l

~-----...~

Automatic Ca~ridge
Loader a perator Panel

II '--' i' = i

A !i B

Emer;ancy

'Oi
I

I...=..J

ii
'\

!I i ! Power £naDia

I
I

Wl'len In Local

INST 77

J j !'ower Off

-----------------------------------------------------------------

Auto

System

lEI

Manual

'TC\J AI!!!!!.r!yp!

T.,

I! '!tUO, II'
01:
I! '!D,I1. a.t To: 'C

l
Oi------~

--~---------==~

LJ!
~I
~==========~-!
~r.J

_Ii'

Fower

R
:
:::J
-N
1-"'" 0
erma

1_: ,..U i_IT."

i:-O
__D_jSIt_~le__D!_se._:::le_;=/

11-

Start

I:i
g

_Onl-ln.

7-~-~"'-'---:

iii

:IML

-L
I
: Dca

~"1

,,-.... i

IIHllI (ffl 1111 11111 1111 II II

v
--.;"

,_F'0W8_r_E"_&b_i8_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

!60'0\0

.....
I'

Power

--------1 I

I'.....

iOOOOO\

:- ,OOOOOj

: \.GOOI
: ;0 '----'" 0

Drive Switch Panel

Drive Operator Panel

(
\

~~
~~

0
TA90 MG EC C04824

0
U"IO«I

Ej1.

8 B

Reset
Online

=t.JOY

A'!W1n<S

..... at ~p!aav

t3
E3
~~
-

Drive Power

m
Offhne

Reset

Drive Addr~s.

Online

Installation Instructions

INST 77

TA90 Installation Instructions
Running Offline Checkout for a Dua! Tape Control
Unit Subsystem (Continued)
Note: See INST 79 for the following locations.

Checking the Addresses, Tape Control Unit 0
15. On the TCUO operator setup panel, set the Online
Test/Offline Test switch f) to Online Test.
After a short delay (2 1/2 seconds or less) does "L-x
P _)Cit (x being any number between 0 and F) appear on
any drive display?

Installation Instructions

Checking Read/Write, Tape Control Unit 0

A B

Hote the addresses of any drives that do
not show the correct display, then continue
with thr nt!,Xt ~tep,

16. Compare the "L- x" (logical address) portion of each
drive display to the address label
on each display.

Does each drive display match the label?

On/Off swi tch
and veri fy that the
switches are set correctly on the tape control
unit and tape transport uni t pane Is. See ·Settl ng Up
for the Checkout" steps 1. 2. and 3 on INST
76 for the correct switch settings. Correct
any swi tcn settings that are wrong. Power
up and repeat the actions you perfol"lled In
step 14.
Does "lax pax· appear on any tape dri ve
dlspl ay?
YES NO

lhe TCU will not load the MicroprograM
and IlUst be fixed t~lItinue. Set the
NOnla I/Test swi tch
to Nania 1 and
press the IHl swi tch
.
Run GMP/TAge Support Diagnostics to Isolate the
problell and return here when the probleM
is fixed.
Set the No,..,l/Test switch to Test and
checlc the TCU and tape transport unl t swt tch
settings again. See ·Setting up for
the Checkout· steps 1. 2. and 3 on
INST 76 for the correct swi tch
settings. Correct any $Wi tch settings
that are wrong. Power up and repeat
the actions you performed in step 15.
Does "lax pax· appear on any tape
drive display?
YES 110

10 to EAD' 1. Dri ve Interconnect

Proble.s. then return to step 15.

I
Note the addresses of any drives that do
show correct display, then continue with
the next step.

A B

the Online Test/Offline Test switch f) to Offline Test.
After a delay of 1 1/2 minutes or less, does TEST show
flashing on the message
with the indicator bars
display of any drive?

Note: If an Action message appears on any display. go
to INST 5 and perform the action described.
Return here. set the Power On/Off switch
to
Off then On and go to step 15 on this page.

Note: This testing procedure can be performed with one
scratch tape, but you must wait for each drive to
unload the tape. This increases the test time to 2
112 minutes for each drive.
26. When the first drive UNLOADs, move that tape to the
next drive showing TEST. If the cartridge does not
unload, go to "Cartridge Removal by Hand" on CART 10.

27. Repeat this procedure for aii drives in ihe subsystem
showing TEST.

I
Power off the 'i.!,pe control unit with the Power

17. On the tape control unit (TCUO) operator setup panel. set

YES NO

YES NO
ES NO

When UNLOAD appears on the display of the first drive.
the next drive with a tape loaded will begin testing.

~lote the addresses of any driv'!s that
do not show the correct display, then
continlJI! with the next step.

INST 78

Ensure that all the drive logical
addresses are set correctly. See
·Setting the Drive logical and
Physical Addresses· on HIST 59.
leaving the tape control unit online, power
it off then back on aqain. Note the
addresses of any drives whose display
labels
still do not match the "Lax·
portion of the display, then continue
to the next step.

Ensure that the ~p·x· (physical address)
pOI'tion of each display does not match the
·psx· portion of any other drive display
In the subsystP.l1l.

The TCU will not load the microprogram
and must be fixed to continue. Set the
Normal/Test switch ~o Normal and
press the nIL switch-.!.
Run GHP/TA90 Support Diagnostics to Isolate the
problem and return here when the problem
Is fixed.

Set the Normal/Test switch
to Test
and the Onl ine/Off1 ine switch II to
Online. Wait until addresses appear on
the drive displays, then repeat step 17
on th I s page.
Continue to the next step.

18. Set a biank cartridge" to not fiie protect.
Does each drive display have a "P - x" number not
shared by any other drive in the subsystem?

19. If the Automatic Cartridge Loader feature is installed.
skip the next step.

28. If failures occur on multiple drives in a string, there may
be a cable or terminator connection problem. Check the
seating of the device data and read bus cables. and the
dual tape control unit communication cables (for dual
control unit subsystems). See LOC 1 for the tape control
unit and tape transport unit cable locations.
When you have finished checking the cables, insert a
cartridge into those drives that were failing and rerun
the tests.

29. If any drives will not run the tests to completion. note the
failing drive addresses and that TCUO was running the
test. This will be used later in INST 90 when the GMP
diagnostics are run.
30. Go to the next step on INST 81.

YES NO

Ensure that all of the drive physical
addresses are set correctly. See
·Setting the Drive logical and
Physical Addresses· on lNST 59.
Leaving the tape control unit onl hie, power
it off then on again. Note any drive
physical addresses that are still
incorrect and continue to the next step.
Continue with the next step.

20. Insert the cartridge into the drive that is nearest the tape
control unit and displaying TEST. Close the cartridge
latch and skip the next TWO steps.
21. Put a cartridge in the top position of the loader on the
drive that is nearest the tape control unit and displaying
TEST.
22. Ensure that the Loader mode switch
mode and press the Start switch

II.

II is set to AutO

23. If the di splay shows Action Message 1. 2. 3. or 5 after
you load the tape cartrid~e, go to "Action Messages" on
INST 5 and perform the procedure as directed. Return
here when you have completed the required procedure.
24. The diagnostic will show various messages on the drive
display as it executes, indicating the action the drive is
performing.
Each drive will require about 1 3/4 minutes to execute
the test, and when complete, will show a single asterisk
on the display.
25. While the first drive is being tested, set another blank
to not file protect and insert it into the next
cartridge
drive displaying TEST. The display will show READY U.

TA90 MG EC C13764

Installation Instructions

INST 78

TAgO Installation Instructions

INST 79

Installation Instructions

Automatic Cartridge

10
L::::J

\-,

mamIlla

;

TCUAd!!!'!!!f1\tc!

I f'ltIIO, II, TD, OD
IfTQI1,IItTD,'C

I
MIl.

T"",

1M.

I A II B iiFaU!t\

~TA90i'I

:-11
I

'-.-'~.~~'

wne!\ In ",ocal

Loader Operator Panel

....---... unit

I I I i Emergancy
!IijlI \1ii: Power EnaD4e
\t J! Power Off

lOI

m---rrD

0 .:_ _ _ _ _ _ __

T"",

Start

L
:

DisaOle
~

Power

:::::::l

- ;-!IML

~!n:le

E~~or

wait

'-,Local
' ?:lwer :r.1l0ie

If UIII IIf II mIfill II III III

:=J

.Aomlriw'

--I
i i.ocai

___

Drive Operator Panel

Blank

Car~ridge

File Protect
Position

TASO MG EC C04824

Power

[~~~~_ _---=O-----Jll

Not File Protect
Posit:on

Installation Instructions

INST 79

Installation Instructions

TA90 Installation Instructions
Running Offline Checkout for a Dual Tape Control
Unit Subsystem (Continued)
Note: See INST 82 for the following locations.

Final Checkout of Tape Control Unit 0
31. On the TeUO operator setup panel. set the NormallTest
switch
to Normal.

00 eight asterisks
showing TEST?

r·· .... ·) show on all drive displays not

YES HO

Is the Honnal/Test switch

D set to Nonnal?

YES NO

I ~et

the switch to Honnal and repeat step 31.

Do eight asterisks show on all drive displays
not showing TEST?
YES NO

Hote the dri ve addresses tha t do not show
eight asterisks or TEST and continue to
the next step.

I Continue to the nel(t step.
Note the drive addresses that do not show eight
asterisks or TEST and continue to the next step.
Continue to the next step.

You have completed the checkout ofTCUO and the drives
attached to both tape control units. If the tests worked correctly.
you know that TCUO can communicate with all the drives.
You must now check out TCU1 and all the drives again to be sure
that TCU1 can communicate with all the drives.
Go to the next step to test TCU1.
Note: 00 not change the switch settings or power off TCUO
during the following checkout of TCU1.

Checking the Addresses, Tape Control Unit 1
32. On the TeUI operator se~ panel. set the Online
Test/Offline Test switch 11 to Online Test.
After a short del ay (2 112 minutes or I ess) does OIL - x
p - x" (x being any number between 0 and F) appear O~
any drive display?

ES 110

~here

Is a cable connectlan proble•.
Power aff rCUl ;and check the seatlnq
of the device data ~nd read blls
cables and the dUll tape contrlll unit
COMunlcatlon cables. See lOC 1 for
the tape contrlll unit and tape transport unit cable
hcatlons.
MOTE: 00 not chanqe any of the TCU
switch settings while checking out
the cable connection proble_ except
for the Power On/Off switch.

ES NO

I ~ower

orr the tape control unl t and veri fy that
the tape cantrol unIt and tape trailsport unit switches \for

TeUl and the drives physically attached to
TeU!) are set correctly. See ·Settlng Up for
the Checkout· steps 1. 2. and 3 on INST 76
for the correct swl tch settIngs. Correct
any swl tch settIngs that are wrong. Power
up and repeat the actIons you perfol'1lled In
step 32.
Does "l-x pox· appe"r on any tape drive
disp 1ay?

TES ~o
I

The TeU wIll Mt load the IIi croprograll
and .ust be fixed to continue. Set the
Mnnlal Test switch Lto Nonul and
press the IHl swi tchIJ •
Run GHP/TA99 Support Diagnostics to Isolate the
proble. and return here when the proble.
Is flxed.
Set the Horllal/Test swl tch to Test and
check the TCU and tape transport uni t $"",,1 tch
settings again. See ·Settlng Up for the
Checkout· steps 1. 2. and 3 an INST 76
for the correct switch settings. Correct
any switch settings that are wrong. Power
up and repnt the actions you perfomed
In step 32.

Does each drive di spl ay match the label?

When you have finished checklnq the
cables. power on the tape control unl t.
After a delay of 2 1/2 .Inutes or less.
cOllpue the ·l-x· portion of Wh drive
display to the address label foI on the
drive.

Gn to the next step on [NST 83.

Er'::ur: th;t. tht ·p~x· (phys'i:.il .ddr:eSi)
portilJn of each rllsp1.Jy dlll!s Mt lIatch the
·psx· porthn of any lither drive dlsphy
In the ~lIbsystc!l.

Does each drive display have a "p - x" number not
shared by any other drive?
ES NO

f this drl ve fa II ed dud ng the checkout of TCUEI. note that I t a I so failed on
on TCUl and go to the next step on I NST 83.
If It dl d not fa 11 duri ng the checkout or
TCUS, continue with this step.

r~;_~~.EAD ~:Drlv~ Int!rco~nec:_
S

rrou1'C'IR,.

,"n~n

n:c.urn "0 $t.:p

There I s a c.lb I e connec t Ion prob I e!l.
:!r reVl :~d c~Eck the ;eclthig uf
the device data and read btls cables
and the dUo'll tape control unit co_unication
cables. See lOC 1 for the tape control unit
and tolpe transport unit cable locations.
!'~:-

oJ"'.

Ensure that the ·p-x- (physical address)
portIon of each display does not llatch
the ·p-x· portlon of any other drl ve
disp I ay I n the subsyste_.

NOTE: Do not change any of the TCU
switch settings while checking out
the cable connecti!)n proble_, except
for the Power On/orr swi tc:h.

Does nch drl ve di lay have a ·p-x"
nUliber not shared by any other drive?

YES NO

Ones ·L-x pax" appear on any tape
drl ve d Isp lay?

When you have finished chedlng the
cables. power on the Teu. Mter a
deli1Y or 2 1/2 .Inutes or less. cOlIPare
the ·P"x" port I on of each drive dlsp lay
to tlte ·pax· port i on a r a 11 the other
drive displays.

There is a cabie connectIon proble•.
Power off TCUl and check the seating
of the device data and re.1d bus cables.
and the dual tape control unit c:o.unlcatlon
cables. See LOC 1 for the tape control unit
and tape transport un! t cable 1ncatl ons.

Does each drive have a ·p-x· nu.ber
not shared hy any other drive?

IIOTE: Do not change any of the TCU
switch settings while checkln, the
cable connection proble_, except
for the Power On/Off switch.

!:
I
ES

to EAD 1. Drive Interconnect
Prob I ells. then return to step 32.

VIIen you have fi nished check I ng the
cab I es, power on the TCU. After a
delay of 2 1/2 _inutes or less,
cOllpare the ·P·x· port! on of each
drive display to the -p·x" portion
of all the other drive displays.

Nnte the addrenes a f any dri yes tha t
do not show the correct display. then
continue with the next step.

Note the addresses of any drives that do not
show the correct display. then continue with
the next step.

Gil to EAD 1. Or!'!e Interconnect
Prnhlu~. then return to step 33.

Go to the next step lin [NST 83.

Does each drive display II.1tch the label?

INST 81

ES NO

Ca 11 the next level a f support.

Go to the next step on INST 83.

Does each drive have a ·p-x- nUllber
not shared by any other drive?

Note the addresses of any drives that do not
show the correct display. then continue with
the next step.
8

33. Compare the "L-x" (logical address) portion of each
on each display.
drive display to the address label

TA90 MG EC C13764

Installation Instructions

INST 81

T AgO Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions

INST 82

Installation Instructions

INST 82

f2J
I

I
I
I

II
I

1°

/"f_

.... .,."..... ,.,..'C...
!IiW

mm
-.

,. -.

I ~-------I.::J
I

CIa._

DIM_

Errar

Walt

I.
10
1

~ 'fX2~~ I
000
. 0

~!I
~
I

'\ ~ 0\I ------110

I
I

Drive Operator Panel

o
Rewind

Unload

R;'dV

Ej] ~ ~

Not Ready

Installation Instructions

T A 90 Installation Instructions
Running Offline Checkout for a Duai Tape Control
Unit Subsystem (Continued)
Note: See INST 84 for the following locations.

40. If the display shows Action Message 1. 2. 3. or 5 after
you load the tape cartridge. go to "Action Messages" on
INST 5 and perform the procedure as directed. Return
here when you have completed the required procedure.
41. The diagnostic will show various messages on the drive
di$play as it el(ecutes, indicating the action the drive!s
performing.

Checking ReadlWiite, Tape Control Unit 1

Final Checkout of Tape Control Unit 1

48. Set the Norma/lTest switch
to Normal on the TCUl
tape control unit operator setup panel.

Do eight asterisks ( •••••••• ) show on all drive displays
not showing TEST?

Does TEST show witt'l It'le indicator bars
the message displ ay of any drive?

mflashing on

Note: If an Action message appears on any display. go
to INST 5 and perform the action described.
Return here and set the Power On/Off switch
to Off then On; then go to INST 81. step 32. and
continue.

iii

YES NO

The TeU will not load the mlcroprogrmn
and must be fixed to continue. Set
the Honnal/Test switch 1L!0 Nomal
and press the lHL swi tch----g .
Run GHP/TA9E1 Support Diagnostics to
I sola te the prob 1em and re turn here
when the problem is fixed.

Set the Normal/Test switch
to Test
and the Oniine Test/Offline Test
switch II to Online Test.
Wal t unt i I addresses appear on
the drive displays, then repeat step 34
on thts page.
Continue to the next step.

35. Set a blank cartridge

D to not file protect.

36. If the Automatic Cartridge Loader feature is installed.
skip the next step.
37. Insert the cartridge into the drive that is nearest the tape
control unit and displaying TEST. Close the cartridge
latch and skip the next TWO steps.
38. Put a cartridge in the top position of the loader on the
drive that is nearest the tape control unit and displaying
TEST.

Each drive will require about 1 3/4 minutes to execute
the test. and wt'len complete. will show a single asterisk
on the display.
42. While the first drive is being tested. set another blank
cartridge
to not file protect and insert it into the next
drive displaying TEST. The display will show READY U.

When UNLOAD appears on the display of the first drive.
the next drive with a tape loaded will begin testing.
Note: This testing procedure can be performed with one
scratch tape. but you must wait for each drive to
unload the tape. This increases the test time to 2
1/2 mi nutes for each drive.

44. Repeat this procedure for all drives in the subsystem
showing TEST.
.

SO. Ensure that the IML diskettes in rcuo and rCUl are at
the same. or equivalent, microcode level; and that the
diskette is not write-protected (the window is closed). If
not. you will get an error light when you attempt an IML

On both TCUO and TCU1. set the Power On/Off switch [J
to Off, then On.

YES NO

After approximately 2 minutes the Wait light
on the
tape control unit operator setup panel should be on
solidly. and the Error light
should be off.

Is the Nonnal/Test switch D set
to Normal?

Repeat step 39.
Do eight asterisks show on all
drive displays not showing TEST?

YES NO

~ote the drive addresses

that do not show eight
I aster1sks
or TEST and

continue to the next step.

Continue to the next step.

43. When the first drive UNLOADs. move that tape to the
next drive showing TEST. If the cartridge does not
unload. go to "Cartridge Removal by Hand" on CART 10.

Checking the Initial Microprogram Load (IML)

Note: See the labels on the IML diskettes.
YES NO

34. On the tape control unit (TCU1) operator setup panel. set
the Online Test/Omine Test switch
to Offline Test.

INST 83

Note the drive addresses that do
not show eight asterisks or TEST
and continue to the next step.

Are all the lights correct?
YES NO

The tape control unit will not load the microprogram and must be fixed to continu@.
Ensure the tlomal Test switch
is set
to Nonnal and the Online Test/Offline Test
switch II Is set to Online Test.
Run GMP/TA90 Support Diagnostics to isolate
the problem, and return to this page and
repeat step 40 when the problem is fixed.

Go to IN5T 90; the Offline checkout is

complete.

Continue to the next step.

49. Set the Online Test/Offline Test switch to Online Test.
45. If failures occur on multiple drives in a string. there may
be a cable connection problem. Check the seating of the
device data and read bus cables. and the dual tape
control unit communication cables (for dual control uriit
subsystems). See LOC 1 for the tape control unit and
tape transport unit cable locations.
When you have finished checking the cables, insert a
cartridge into those drives that were failing and rerun
the tests.
46. If any drives will not run the tests to completion. note the
failing drive addresses and that TCU1 was running the
test. This will be used later on in INST 90 when GMP is
run.
47. Go to the next step and continue.

II is set to Auto
1m.

39. Ensure that the Loader mode switch
mode and press the Start switch

TA90 MG EC C13764

Installation Instructions

INST 83

TA90 Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions

INST 84

lOI

r ••aama

TA90

LKl~~ LKl~~

Automatic Cartridge

\'II~r ,rn1:'- lSI:
6~"""D'" iUJ::- I

Loader Operator Panel

\---------------------------------------------------------------------1
TCU~!p!

, f"H [I~.i
::::~:=i::~g

ii"

I
i

~;J-----;D~

Disable

Dinbla

c::J

c:::J

Drive Operator Panel
r

I
I
!

1_ _1

= r Enable

0 I,

:Iii., i111: III: IIi 1111111111

m
a

u-oa

,.....,

~ ~ ~ J

Blank
Camidge

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _IIIon
_ "-¥
_____

TA90 MG EC C04824

Installation Instructions

INST 84

T AgO Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions

INST 90

Installation Instructions

INST 90

Failing Drives
Run GMP (see CE/HSC) on any drives that failed during this
installation.

Setting Drive Base Address
1. From the customer, lind out what the drive base address
should be.
Note: No two drives in a cluster can have the same
address. On a dual TCU configuration the base
address should be a minimum of eight units
apart. This will inhibit the overlapping of drive
addresses when using the TA90 support diskette.

2. Set the STI drive base address of the subsystem (see
CE/HSC).
Nate: Requeslors for the TA90 must be in the highest
priQriiy ~iQl~ Qf the HSC.
.

Installing STI Cables
Install the STI cables

Running GMP on the Last Drive
Run GMP on the last drive of each string in this installation.

Go to INST 120 to continue.

TA90 MG EC C13764

Subsystem Interconnections

INST 91

Subsystem Interconnections

INST 91

TA90 Subsystem Interconnections
The foiiowing diagram shows some of me avaiiabiiiiy features of
the TA90 subsystem. It illustrates at etICh level where dynamic
and static failover and load balancing occur
In a 2X configuration, the TCUs perform load balancing. If a fault
occurs that indicates a data path or cache problem, sense byte 2.
bit 4 must be check.ed to see which TCU detected the fault The
combination of the sense byte information and the fault code
describe which paths were in use when the fault occurred.

TA9\) Subsystem Interconnections
(Note 1)

Notes:

1. "Statically" dual ported
In the event of an HSC or path failure, the subsystem will
automatically failover to the other path. In the example
shown, assume that STI port A is active; HSC "A" is using
units 0, 2, 4, 6 and HSC "S" is using units 1,3, 5, and 7. If
there is a failure of either HSC, the non-failing HSC will
continue operating all eight drive units.

STI

HSCA
K. si 1

STI·FIPS
Adapt::r
"L"

Bus

Chan
Acap

Int
TCU
Sus

Units
0,2,4,6

Proe

STI·FIPS
Adapter
"R"
HSC B
K. si 2

Int

Units'

TCU

1,3,5,7

Bus

I
Adap I

P~oc

A
R

r;- ST1·FIPS
Adapter
L

K. si 3

ilL"

Units
8. la, 12, 14

INT
TCU
BUS

(Note 5)

I I r;- STI-FIPS
Adapter
L

K. si 4

"R"

I NT

Units

TCU
BUS

9,11,13,15
Is
L.:.

(Nota 4) -

TCU
Comm
Adapter

(Note 3)

TA90 MG EC C13764

Chan

STI
Bus

S
E
C

t Dual
HSC C

When four cables connect to one HSC, you must disable one
of the ports from each adapter. For example, if you disable
the left S and right B ports, and the TA90 is cabled correcdy,
it will come online and the connection to one of the K.si
(HSC5X) interfaces will be lost To establish a connection if
a K.si requestor is lost, you must disable the port connected
to the questionable K.si and enable the port on the other
adapter.

!!~a~_
Drj'/e Bus
Uniu 0·7

An optional Dual TCU communications r.oupler allows the
channel adapter processor to use the other TCU to do the
requested operation. This cross coupling of the TCUs
provides resource sharing (toad balancing) and failover for
most TCU errors.

Ser.ondary drive busses provide each TCU with a path to the
other TCU's drives for use with dynamic dual porting and
dual communications.

I
J

3. Oual communications option

I
I
I

- - - I Teu a

2. "Oynamically" dual ported
Each TCU is "dynamically" shared by the adapters. In the
event of an STI-FIPS adapter or TCU Channel Adapter
processor failure, the drive unit number switches can be
changed by the operator, allowing operaiions to continue
wi th up to four drives (12 drives if 2X).

(Note 2)

I
I
I
Proc
I
A
I
1 TCU 1
.----1
I
Chan I
.
Adap
Chan
Adap

Proc
B

I
I
I

Primary

~-----Drive Bus

Units 8·1 5
j

TA90 Installation Instructions
2. Pass the UEPO cables to be installed up through the
opening in the bottom of the tape control unit.

Installing the Unit Emergency Power Off (UEPO)
Cable

Installation Instructions

INST 120

Installation Instructions

INST 120

4. Complete the cable installation:
a. Connect the UEPO cables to the host system.

3. Find the four UEf'O cabie sockets iocated at the rear of
the control unit ac power supply.

Perform the following steps to install the Unit Emergency Power
Off (UEPO) cable:

Insert the UEPO cable connectors into any UEPO socket
(J5 through J8)

b. Continue the installation on INST 130.
"Installation Checks."

II.

,. Determine if UEPO cables are to be installed.
If no UEPO cables are to be installed, go to INST 130,

"Installation Checks."
Note: The TA90 subsystem does not require UEPO
jumpers if the Local/Remote switch is set to the
Local mode.

Power Supply CU-PSO 1 60 Hz

~
JJ

Rear View

Power" Supply CU·PSOl 50 Hz

f~g~ ~ @g~ @g~
I?
i?
it
§!
J9

Jl0

J'I~

J12R'

•

Rear View

TA90 MG EC C04824

TA90 Insta lIation Instructions

Installation Instructions

Installation Checks

INST 130

Note: If there are no tape transport units attached to
to store
TCU', there will be an extra end plate
for later use.

These procedures complete the checkout of the installation:
1. Installing the radio frequency interference (RFI) frame pans
and end plates.
2. Replacing all the subcovers and covers.
3. Running the HSC subsystem diagnostics to verify correct
subsystem operation.

Installing the Radio Frequency Interference (RFI)
Frame Pans and End Plates.
The RFI frame pans and end plates are part of the ship group.
There are two frame pans for each tape transport unit, one frame
pan (of a different size) for each tape control unit, and two end
plates (one for the side of the tape contr~1 unit, and one for the
side of the last drive attached to that tape control unit).

Tape Control Unit

Reinstalling Subcovers and Covers
When the installation checks have been completed. all the
subcovers and covers that were removed must be reinstalled.

Tape Transport Unit

1. Take the cover that was on the right side of the tape
control unit. and install it on the right side of the iast tape
transport unit attached to that tape control unit.
2. Go to CARR-TCU 2-2. and CARR-DR 2-2 for procedures
to adjust (if necessary) and reinstall the covers and
subcovers on the tape control unit(s) and tape transport
units.
3. Go to iNST 13'1 to coniinue the instaliation cheCKS.

Note: When you are adding a tape transport unit(s) to an
installed subsystem. ensure that you move the tape
transport unit end plate (described in step 7) to the last
tape transport unit attached to the tape control unit.
,. Place one tape transport unit frame pan under the front
of the first tape transport unit attached to TCUO
Attach the frame pan to the lower front frame of the tape
transport unit with two screws.

2. Repeat step 1 for each tape transport unit attached to
TCUO.
3. Place one tape transport unit frame pan under the rear
of the first tape transport unit attached to TCUO
Attach the frame pan to the lower rear frame of the tape
transport unit with two screws.

II. .

4. Repeat step three for each tape transport unit attached
to TCUO.
5. Place one tape control unit frame pan under the front of
TCUO
and attach it to the lower front frame of the
tape control unit with two screws.

II.

6. Place one end plate under the left side of the tape
control unit (as you face the front of the tape control unit)
and attach it to the lower tape control unit frame
with three screws.

II.

7. Place one end plate under the right side of the last tape
transport unit attached to TCUO (as you face the front of
and attach it to the lower
the tape transport unit)
tape transport unit frame with three screws.

8. Repeat steps' through 7 for TCU1 if you have a dual
tape control unit subsystem.

TA90 MG EC C04824

Installation Instructions

INST 130

(

TA90 Installation Instructions
Installation Checks (Continued)

Installation Instructions

INST 131

Installation Instructions

INST 131

Before You're Through ...
1. Put the support diskette and the blank cartridge in the

Running ILEXER and ILTAPE

pocket in the front cover of the tape control unit.

l~rAPE and ILEXER are run from the HSC. Refer to CEIHSC 1 or
to the appropriate HSC user documentation for more information.

2. Check and repair any drive that did not operate

Perform the following procedure to test the TA90

3. If the Automatic Cartridge Loader feature is installed,

correctly.

skip the next step.
1. Run ILTAPE (diagnostics and canned sequence) for three
passes. No errors are allowed. If both STI ports are used,
run ILTAPE through the second port for one pass.
2. Run ILEXER. Use the GCR worst case data pattern (22) for

15 minutes. If both STI ports are used, run ILEXER through
the second port for 15 mi nutes.

4. Close all the tape drive cartridge latches.
Note: The cartridge latch should be kept closed when the tape
drive is not being used. (A cartridge need not be in the
drive.) When the tape drive is needed, open the cartridge
latch by pressing the Unload switch.

Post-Install ation
Installation Reporting
After the subsystem is installed and tested:

TA90 MG EC C13764

Write the subsystem serial number on the spine tab of all
volumes of the TAOO Maintenance Guide.

•

Update the Site Management Guide.

•

Report the installation complete using the existing LARS
procedure.

Installation Instructions - Adding Tape Transport Units

TASO Adding Tape Transport Units to an Installed Subsystem
Adding Tape Transport Units
The following procedures are used to add more tape transport
units to an already installed subsystem:

1. Have the customer deallocate all jobs and paths to the
tape control unit and tape transport units that wi!! be
receiving the additional tape unit(s).
2. Power off the tape control unit and tape transport units
that will be affected.

INST 135

8. Connect the next tape transport unit ac power cable
to the preceding tape transport unit's power cable socket
after removing the socket safety cover (if not already
removed).

Ensure that the ac power cable is routed away from the
compressor motor and is fastened to the back of the
frame
to prevent pinching the cabie when the units
are moved together.

9. Remove the device data bus terminator card. PIN
29-27173-01
and thermal terminator
from the

II.

preceding tape transport unit.

3. Remove the side cover from the end tape transport unit
installed on the subsystem.
4. Remove the radio frequency interference (RFI) endplate
from the end tape transport unit installed on the
subsystem.

10. Plug the device data bus cable

from the new tape
transport unit into the preceding tape unit's device data
bus connector. and fasten the cable in place with the
retaining screws.

11. Connect the two read bus cables
5. Place the the new tape transport unit into position.

6. Open the front and rear covers.
Warning: Ensure that the power cable is not pinched
between the machine frames.

7. If the safety cover has the retainer tightened over it,
loosen the screw holding the retainer to the ac power
cap, rotate the retainer and retighten the screw.

D Thermal Connector
I

II from the new tape

II.

transport unit to the preceding tape unit
Ensure that
the local (bus A) and the remote (bus B) cables are
plugged into the proper sockets on the tape transport
unit, making sure they are not crossed.

D on the new tape transport
unit to the thermal connector II on the preceding tape

Local

12. Connect the thermal cable

II Terminator
Device Data Bus
Card

transport unit.

13. Continue with the next step on INST 136.

II Read Bus

Connectors

Remote

B Device Data
Bus Cable

II Thermal Cabl.

Read Bus

~ACP",",

Cables

Connector

TA9D MG EC C04824

Installation Instructions - Adding Tape Transport Units

INST 135

TA90 Adding Tape Transport Units to an Installed Subsystem

Installation Instructions· Adding Tape Transport Units

INST 136

16. Lock the rear casters on the new tape transport unit by
turning the caster lock thumbscrews clockwise until they
are tight.

Adding Tape Transport Units (Continued)
13. Place the next tape transport unit against the preceding
tape unit.

17. Repeat steps 4 through 16, on INST 135 and INST 136, for
each aoditionaltape transport unit that is attached to the
tape control unit.

Warning: When installing a tape transport unit to a tape
transport unit with the automatic cartridge loader feature
installed on any drive, the drive must be opened
approximately 5 cm (2 in.) to prevent the conductive seal
from being pinched between the tape transport unit
frames.

18. Go to the next step on INST 137.

Tape Control Unit

Tape Transport Unit

Note: Be sure the position of the casters does not
prevent the tape transport units from fitting
snugly together.

Tape Transport Unit

14. Fasten the new tape transport unit to the preceding tape
unit by installing a hex bolt and washer at the rear of the
tape transport unit
and at the front of the tape
transport unit
It may be necessary to remove the
Tape Transport Unit Front Safety cover to instail hex bolt
See CARR-DR 2-1 if the cover needs to be removed.

EI,

II.

Note: If the tape transport units are not correctly
aligned, the covers may bind. Ensure that the
covers are not binding.

15. Place the rear casters on the new tape transport unit so
the castei lock thumbsciews
aie accessible.

Front View

Tape Transport Unit
('

. --.

'
Tape Transport Unit

I
I

~I .. ....
I

......

I
I
I

Caster
Lock
Thumbscrew

Front
Front View
Hex Bolt

Rear View

TA90 MG EC C04824

Installation Instructions· Adding Tape Transport Units

INST 136

TA90 Adding Tape Transport Units to an Installed Subsystem
Adding Tape Transport Units (Continued)
On the Illst tape transport unit attached to the tape control unit:

19. Place the device data bus terminator card PIN
29-27173-01
removed from the last tape unit
installed in the new tape transport unitJs device data bus
connector

II
II.

2Q. Plug the thermal terminator Blnte the thermal
Connector
The thermal terminater was remo"ed in a
prior step from the preceding tape transport Unit.

II.

INST 137

Installation Instructions .. Adding Tape Transport Units

21. Screw the safety cover
socket.

D onto the ac power cable

DANGER
Dangerous yoltages are present at the ae power
cable socket. The safety cover must be on
when the socket is not being used.

22. After the safety cover II is Installed. loosen the screw

lito

holding the retainer
the ac power box. Rotate the
retainer and tighten the screw with the retainer
positioned to prevent the safety cover from being
-removed.

23. Go to INST 50 for instructions on setting the drive logical
and physical addresses, return here when finished.
24. Go to INST 56 for instructions on checking tape transport
unit power supply jumpers, return here when finiShed.
25. Go to INST 70 if the tape transport unit Is attached to a
single tape control unit subsystem, return here when
finished.
26. Go to INST 76 if the tape transport unit Is attached to a
dual tape control unit subsystem. return here when
finished.

Before You're Through .•.
"

Run the GMP on the drives added to the affected tape
control units (see CE/HSC).

2. Go to INST 130 and install the RFI frame pans and end
plates, and reinstaii ali cOvers and subcovers that were
removed.

3. Go to INST 131 and run ILEXER/ILTAPE.
4. This oompletes the Installation of additional drives to an
existing subsystem. Return the subsystem to the
customer.

II Thermal Connector

II Device Data Bus

Terminator Card

AC Power
Cable Socket

~16-------B Device Data
Bus Connector

AC Sltety Cover

TA90 MG EC C04824

Installation Instructions - Adding Tape Transport Units

INST 137

TA90 Relocate or Discontinue

Relocate or Discontinue

Getting Started

INST 140

Removing Power

To remove or relocate a TA90 subsystem, perform the following
steps:

3. Remove the tape control unit rear safety cover.
4. Set the Online TesVOffline Test switch
Test.

1. Before proceeding. check the following:
a. Make sure that all drives are unloaded and that
the tape cartridges have been removed.

5. Set the tape control unit Power On/Off switch

7. Set the Drive Power switch
c. Make sure that any ports to be disabled from the
tape control unit have been deallocated from the
operating system.

II to Off on each drive.

8. Have the customer remove power from the outlet.

9. Remove the power cable
from the customer's outlet
and tape the coiled cable behind the 110 cable
connectors

2. Remove the front, rear, and left side covers from the
tape control unit. See CARR-TCU 2-1 for cover removal
procedures.

mamaama I
TAgO

OO[!]~

OOW~

Wheft In LDc:U

I -

...".-....

,EI
I

o=-

Inl

'I9!.....,-r-

.. '!aI. . . . ."., . .

Otnble

008._

c:::l

Till'"

I mlm
I

r
I

B to Off.

6. Set the tape control unit Unit Emergency Power switch
to Power Off.

b. Make sure that the TA90 subsystem is offline (0
all host systems.

D to Offline

DC
PI:Mwr

8--8~O
T.II

TCU 1

DM.

Errot

_It

c:::::l

DL.oC&'

~E"M

Or I

Drive Power

B [ill [SID E3
Reset

Reset

Drive Address
Online

Offline

TA90 MG EC C13764

Dri·.. e Switch Pane!

Online

Offline

Relocate or Discontinue

INST 140

TA90 Relocate or Discontinue

Relocate or Discontinue

INST 160

Relocate or Discontinue

INST 160

Removing Unit Emergency Power Off (UEPO)
Cables
14. Disconnect the UEPO cables from the controlling
computer.
15. Remove the four UEPC cables from connectors J5
through J8.
16. Pass the UEPO cables down through the opening in the
bottom of the tape control unit.

Power Supply CU·PSOl 60 Hz

~
Jl

II
..

]

.
JI

......
e
.,:,

Rear View

Power Supply CU·PSOl 50 Hz

Jl0

Jl1M

J12~

•

II
.

Rear View

TA90 MG EC C04824

Relocate or Discontinue

TA90 Relocate or Discontinue

INST 170

Removing Dual Tape Control Unit
Communication Feature Cables

17. Disconnect both ends
of the 3-connector cable (A3,
A4, and AS), one end at each tape control unit.
18. Disconnect both ends of the 2-connector feature cable
(A 1 and A2)
at the tape control units.

19. Loosen the wingnuts
on the cable retaining brackets
and open the brackets.

1:1

II Ground Strap

20. Slide the cables from between the guide posts.

21. Swing the retaining brackets closed and tighten all the
wingnuts.
22. Disconnect the cable ground straps
controi unit.

II from each tape

. 23. Place protective covers over the connectors at both ends
of the feature cable.
24. Place the cables in the s~ipping carton.
Note: If you are relocating the machines within the same
building, you don't have to pack them.

AS
Tape Control Unit

II Ground Strap

\
\n ~-It-

\Jlr-~
A2

TA90 MG EC C04824

Retaining Bracket

Relocate or Discontinue

INST 170

Relocate or Discontinue

TA90 Relocate or Discontinue
Disconnecting the Tape Transport Units and the
Tape Control Unit
25. Unlock lhe rear casters
tape transport unIts.

II at the tape control unit and

CAUTION;
TILT HAZARD. Do NOT open both drives of a tape
'ransport unit that Is not bolted to anoffler tape transport
unit or tape control unit. WItt! the automatic cartridge
loader feature Installed and both drive drawers fully
extended, 8 tape unit that Is not boiled to anolher unit
will tilt forward with about 20 Ibe. of force applied to the
top of elthe, automatic cartridge loader.

INST 180

& II

26. Remove the hex bolts and washers
from the
front and rear of each unit. It may be necessary to
remove the Tape Transport Unit Front Safety cover to
See CARR-OR-2-1 if the cover
remove hex bolt
needs to be removed.

II.

27. Push the tape control unit about 20 em (8 in) away from
the first tape transport unit.
28. Disconnect the tape transport unit to tape control unit
power cable
and tape it to the Side of the tape
transport unit.

Tape Control Unit

Tape Transport Unit

. Front View

cZ:II

II Caster

Lock
Thumbscrew

AC Power
Connector

Relocate or Discontinue
TA90 MG EC C04824

INST 180

TA90 Relocate or Discontinue

Relocate or Discontinue

Disconnecting the Tape Transport Units and the
Tape Control Unit (Continued)
29. On the last tape transport unit attached to the tape
control unit:

To complete the removal/replacement:

33. Install the side cover you removed from the tape
transport unit on the right side of the tape controi unit (as
you face the front of the tape control unit).
34. Reinstall any covers that were removed.

a. Remove the side cover.
b. Remove the device data terminator card PIN
29-27173-01

c. Remove the thermal terminator

INST 190

35. Report the activities performed. using the existing
Branch Office procedures.

DeviCe Data Bus
Terminator Card

d. Be sure the terminators are included with the
tape control unit shipping group.

II II

30. Disconnect the device data and read bus cables
and tape them to the side of the tape transport unit.
31. Disconnect the thermal cable

II.

32. Repeat steps 30 and 31 for each additional tape
transport unit.

TA90 MG EC C04824

Remote ---~~I

Relocate or Discontinue

INST 190

Install Automatic Cartridge Loader
Installation Instructions

rA90 Subsystem Power

Preparation

The subsystem power need not be turned off. However, each
drive must be powered off when the Automatic Cartridge loader
is being installed on that drive.

Install Automatic cartridge Loader

INST 900

Install Automatic Cartridge Loader

INST 900

Read and understand the purpose and details of this installation
instruction.
Check all items and count parts listed on the BOM to be installed
to determine that all parts have been received.

Purpose and Description
Purpose
To Install Automatic Cartridge loader.

Description
Replace the manual latch assembly and deck front cover with the
loader assembly and Automatic Cartridge loader Mechanical
Assembly.

Special Tools and/or Materials Required
NAME

DEC PIN

ESO Grounding Kit
Electrical Plastic
Tape
Pin Removal Tool

TAge Scratch Cartridges
(one cartridge is
required for diagnostic
tests)

Safety
CAUTION:
Do not open both drive drawers at the same time if the automatic
cartridge loader feature Is installed and the tape transport unit is
not bolted to the tape control unit or to another tape transport
unit. A stand alone tape transport unit with the automatic
cartrIdge loader feature Installed can tip over if both drive
drawers are opened to the full extended position and additional
downward force is applied to the drive drawer(s).
CAUTION:
Observe standard safety practices. For further Information refer
to PREF, page SAFETY 10.

TA90 MG EC C13764

Install Automatic Cartridge Loader (Continued)

Install Automatic Cartridge loader (continued)

INST 910

Install Automatic Cartridge Loader (continued)

INST 910

Installation Instructions (continued)

Details Of Installation
1. Dismount the drive to be updated.

2. Open the drive front cover D.
3. Set the drive(s) Online/Offline switch(es) to Offline for all
drives to be updated. (See LOe 1 for drive switch
locations.)

4. If there are cartridges in any of the drives, remove them
using instructions in CART 1.
CAUTION:
When powering off both drives in a TA90 you must turn off the AC
breaker to prevent possible circuit damage (See CARR-DRS for
power off procedures).

5. Set the Drive Power switch to Off if you are removing
power from one drive (See LOe 1).

Remove Drive Drawer Clear Plastic Cover
CAUTION:
00 not open both drive drawers at the same time if the automatic
not bolted to the tape control unit or to another tape transport
unit A stand alone tape transport unit with the automatic
cartridge loader feature installed can tip over If both drive
drawers are opened to the full extended position and additional
downward force Is applied to the drive drawer(s).

Without Automatic Cardtridge
Loader Installed

II,

1. Release the drive latch
and pull out the drive
drawer you want to work on, to the full extended lock
position.

2. Remove the two pins
holding the clear plastic cover
and remove the cover. Set the cover aside for later
use.

Remove Drive Drawer Plastic Cover

1. Ensure that the cartridge latch door
is closed.
Remove the two drawer cover bracket screws
from
the cartridge latch assembly. Do not remove the bracket
from the cover.

2. Uft up on the cover
and at the same time pull the
cover away from the drive, then push the cover down to
clear the bottom cover pins.

With Automatic Cartridge Loader Installed

3. Set the cover
and cover bracket screws
aside.
The cover and screws will not be used with the
automatic cartridge loader feature.

TA90 MG EC C13764

Install Automatic Cartridge Loader (Continued)

Install Automatic Cartridge Loader (continued)

INST 920

Installation Instructions (continued)
Remove the Cartridge Latch Assembly
1. Disconnect the file protect switch cable connector
from J3

IJ.

2. Loosen the set screw
and unplug the cartridge
present cable connector
Remove the connector from
the cartridge latch assembly.

fJ.

Note: The cartridge present sensor
cartridge latch assembly

11 remains in the

II.

3. Remove the screw and cable clamp
Disconnect the
from the
cartridge latched sensor cable connector
Set the cable clamp and
cartridge latched sensor
mounting screw aside. Parts will not be re-used.

II.

4. Disconnect the cartridge latch solenoid cable connector
J5 from P5
by pinching on the end of the
connector retainer.

II,

II Set Screw

5. Turn the pivot arm
by holding at the indicated area,
to the
counter-clockwise to move the threader arm
position shown (the 12 o'clock position). This moves the
threader arm out of the way and will prevent the arm
from being broken.

Note: In the next step, route cables next to the latch
assembly as required, to enable the removal of the latch
assembly.

6. Remove the three cartridge latch assembly mounting
and lift the latch assembly
off the
screws
baseplatem. Save the screws for later use.

III

7. Set the cartridge latch assembly
reused.

.. -0 File Protect Switch

m aside, it will not be

Cable Connector

---m

~~~~--m Pivot Arm
(Hold at Arrow)

Cartridge Latch Assembly
Mounting Screws

Top View

TA90 MG EC C04824

Install Automatic Cartridge Loader (continued)

INST 920

Install Automatic Cartridge Loader (Continued)

Install Automatic Cartridge Loader (continued)

INST 930

11. Raise the tray to the full up position by turning the hand

Installation Instructions (continued)

knob
located on the load motor clockwise, when
viewed from knob end. This will engage the threader pin.

install the Loader Assembly
Nole: In the next step there are two styles of retaining
clips. Refer to
to determine which style you have.

1. Remove the cartridge present sensor
from the new
ioad assembiy, by unlatching the retaining ciip
Retain the sensor for later use.

II.

Note: In the next step, route cables to ensure that the
cables will not be pinched during the installation of the
load assembly.

2. Place the load assembly

• Pivot Arm (Hold at arrow)

1m over the locating pins on

the baseplate.
3. Install the three mounting screws

D removed in INST

Dress Cable on Side of
SwftchSetweenThe

920 step 6, to mount the load assembly to the baseplate.

4. Connect the cartridge present cable connector
to the
removed in step 1. The +
cartridge present sensor
label on the connector and the E + mark on the sensor
must be located as shown.

iii

5. Replace the cartridge present sensor
and cable
connector
into the load assembly. The + label on
the connector must be visible. Close the sensor retaining
clip
to hold the sensor and cable connector in
position.

6. Connect the cartridge latched sensor connector to the

II. The + label on the

cartridge latched sensor
connector must be visible.

7. Connect the file protect switch cable connector

E+~ "rrW
~CPS

II to J3

S·
Note: In the next step, do not over torque the motor in
the fully up or down posi1;on. The tray is fufty up Of down
when the cam arm is in the vertical position
Do not
rotate the motor with the connecting rod cam assembly.

III.

Unlatch

8. Lower the tray to the full down pOSition by turning the
hand knob located on the load motor
counterclockwise, when viewed from knob end. Ensure
cables are not damaged.

9. Move the receiver
threader.

m in position to receive the
m,

10. Turn the pivot arm
by holding at the indicated area,
clockwise to move the threader pin
into the receiver

m·

Full Up

Note: In the next step, if the tray is not in the full up
position an error will occur at diagnostic check.

TA90 MG EC C04824

Install Automatic Cartridge Loader (continued)

INST 930

Install Automatic Cartridge Loader (Continued)

Install Automatic Cartridge Loader (continued)

INST 950

Inslall Automatic Cartridge Loader {continued}

INST 950

Installation Instructions (continued)

Install the Power and Signal Cables

1. Thread the signal cable
(TU-P1 connector end)
through the baseplate opening

2. Connect the signal cable connector (TU-P1)
to
connector (TU-J1)
located on the right side of the
opening in front of drive. Ensure retention springs are
latched on housing.

II (PS connector end) through
II and in front of the signal cable

3. Thread the power cable
the baseplate opening

4. Connect the power cable connector (P6)
to connector
located on the bottom of the opening in front of
(J6)
drive.

(P6 Connector)

Power Adapter Cable

TA90 MG EC C04824

('
Install Automatic Cartridge Loader (Continued)
5. From the front of the loader assembly. and holding at the
bottom, guide the automatic carlr~e loader mechanical
assembly on to the locating pins D·

Installation Instructions (continued)

Install the Automatic Cartridge Loader
6. Assemble three screws
~o not remove tape and/or wire ties from cables that are
fastened to the rear side of the automatic cartridge loader
assembly until the automatic cartridge loader mechanical
assembly is fastened to the loader assembly. The tape andlor
wire ties hold the cables so they will not be damaged during
installation.

When installing the automatic cartridge loader mechanical
assembly. carefully position the assembly to prevent damage to
the cover seals.
CAUTION:
Some parts handled during this procedure are sensitive to
electrostatic discharge (ESD). See CARR·TCU 1·9 for
"instructions for working with ESO-SENSITIVE PARTS"
CAUTION:
Before doing Step 1, verify that the two isolat!!!p bushings Dare
installed on the front of the loader assembly 1:1, and the three
isolating bushings
are installed on the rear of the automatic
cartridge loader assembly
ESO and RFI problems will occur
after installation if the bushings are not in place or have been
damaged.

EJ.

II.

lockwasher
flat
washer
and isolating washer
.Put assembled
screws in a pi ace where they can be easily accessed for
use in the following steps. See the figure for assembly
sequence order.

CAI~jiON:

INST 960

Install Automatic Cartridge Loader (continued)

CAUTION:
00 not over tighten the screws In Steps 7 or 9 while
installing the automatic cartridge loader mechanical
assembly. Over tightening the screws will crack the
Isolating washer.

D r

Automatic
Cartridge

LO'de~ ~

7. From the rear, while holding the automatic cartridge
loader mechanical assembly in place, fasten it to the
loader assembly [J. at location
using two screws
(screws were assembled in Step 6).

8. Remove the two screws and lock washers
that
secure the tray
Set the tray, mounting screws and
lock washers to the side for later installation.

9. From the fronl of the drive, install one screw
location

1m at

r1:

11
\1

Rear View

m. (Screw was assembled in Step 6).

10. Continue on the next page.

While installing the automatic cartridge loader mechanical
assembly in the next step, carefully position it to prevent damage
to the cover seals.

1. Carefully lift the automatic cartridgn loader.

shipped
with this 80M, on the loadei assembly,
ensuring
that the isolating bushings
and
are in place and
not damaged.

2. Place the support bracket D so it is located over the

front top surface of the toader assembty
The
bracket provides support for the automatic cartridge
loader mechanical assembly during installation.
Note: In the next step, the bottom of the automatic
cartridge loader mechanical assembly is similar
to the drive drawer cover and can be held by
either two screws, or by two pins. If the drive has
pins, go to Step 3. If the drive has screws, go to
Step 5.
3. From the front of the loader assembly, guide the bottom
cover pins into the holes of the boUom cover
while
at the same time lifting from the bottom and guiding the
automatic cartridQ! loader mechanical assembly on to
the locating pins D on the front of the loader assembly.

1m,

4. Go to Step 6.

TA90 MG EC C13764

Install Automatic Cartridge Loader (continued)

INST 960

Install Automatic Cartridge Loader (Continued)

II connector to the loader assembly motor
IJ·
12. Connect "8" fJ connector (8 label side down) to the loader
11. Connect "P"
connector

II.

13. Remove cable clamp
and route loader assembly motor
drive cable
and motor complete sensor cable
through the cable clamp.

14. Route excess loader assembly motor drive cable' behind
the support bracket then install the cable clamp
(See
the Figure for correct cable routing.)

15. Connect" A"
connector to the loader assembly feed
complete sensor

II.

16. Remove the file protect switch cable clamI'.
then route
the loader assembly feed complete cable &through the
cable clamp and reinstall the cable clamp.
17. Verify the cables are properly routed to ensure the cables
will not be damaged by the loader assembly mechanism,
automatic cartridge loader mechanism or covers.

18. Remove cable clamp

INST 970

Install Automatic Cartridge Loader (continued)

INST 970

DANGER

Installation Instructions (continued)

assembiy motor complete sensor connector

Install Automatic Cartridge Loader (continued)

Check the connectors and terminals 10 ensure they
are matched. You could Injure yourself and
damage the machine when powering up the tape
unit If the connector. and terminals are not matched
when doing the next step,

m m,

26. Connect the power cable connectors
and
(numbered 1,2,3,4) to the matching numbered fuse
connectors
Ensure that the power cable connectors
(numbered 1,2,3,4) are connected to the matching numbered
fuse connectors.

HI.

Note: Verify the cables are properly routed to ensure the
cables will not be pinched by the load assembly
mechanism, automatic cartridge loader mechanism
or covers.
27. Close the front cover
fasteners

II.

m and latch it by tightening the

28. Replace the tray removed in Step 8, INST 960.

from the cartr!Sle latched sensor
then route the file protect switch cable II, feed complete
sensor cable
and cartridge latched sensor cable
through the cable clamp and reinstall the cable clamp.

Note: There is only one wire used in the in the "P5/J5"
connector. Plug as keyed in the following step. The
second wire is used on tape transport units without
the automatic cartridge loader feature.
19. Connect "PS" _connector to the cartridge latch solenoid
connector J5"II

ED.

20. Connect the power cable connector "P3"
connector" J3"

HI.

m to the card

21. Open the front cover
by loosening the two fasteners
one-fourth turn, then swing the cover up.

22. Open the card gate
by loosening the one-fourth turn
fastener
and swing the card gate outward to allow
access to the rear of the card.

iii

23. Route the signal cable
installed on INST 950, through
the top rear of the automatic cartridge loader mechanical
assembly
to card connector" J1"

24. Connect the signal connector" AL-P1"
connector" J1"

25. Close card gate

m·

II to the card

HI and tighten the one-fourth turn fastener

TA90 MG EC C04824

(

Install Automatic Cartridge Loader (continued)

Install Automatic Cartridge Loader (Continued)

INST 980

Installation Instructions (continued)

Install the Drive Clear Plastic Cover
1. Replace the clear plastic cover. (See CARR-OR 2-5.)

2. Close the drh,'e drawer.
3. Set the Drive Power switch to On.
4. Set Online/Offline switch to Online.

5. Return to Section "Details Of Installation," on INST 910
Step 2, if this is the first automatic cartridge loader
installed and install the automatic cartridge loader on
the other drive.

Itj

Go to "'Test Procedure".

Test Procedure

Auto

System
Manual

II D

Note: Both drives in this tape transport uni t should be updated
prior to testing. Ensure that you test both drives.
1\ ".t'l"".;"""-", I

1. Set the loader swi tch to Auto.
2. Insert six cartridges and press Start. The first cartridge
should load. After the load completes,
3. Unload the drive. The first cartridge should unload, drop
down, and the second cartridge should load:
4. Repeat rei all six caitridges.
If error code E701 occurs, go to "Check latch Solenoid
Cable," otherwi se, go to step 5.

r*\ ...

"I;ji:II".\J"

"",,...;,..~ .. ,....,.

Il'~'~"'U' ~

Start

II
(t

---...~I!~IfI~IP,.,...II...,...II!-!II-III-Il..,..,lil...,..lil-III..,!

1111
II

!...-I Power

II
I I

, I

Ii
II

TU·DO/l·PA
Power Amplifier Board Connectors

I I

Automatic Cartridge
Loader Operator
Panel •

101

I\l

5. Close the front cover.
6. Return the drives just tested to the customer.

Check Latch Solenoid Cable
You are here due to error code E701 occurring during final test
procedure. Wires one and two in the "P4" connector are not
correctly installed. 00 the following steps to correct:
1. Reverse wire 1 (one) and 2 (two) in the power amplifier
board connector P4
using pin removal tool to extract
pins from the connector.

2. Ensure that pin latches (tabs on side of pin) are reformed
to approximately 30 degree angle to ensure that pins will
be securely latched when reinstalled into the connector.
3. Return to "Test Procedure"

TA90 MG EC C13764

Install Automatic Cartridge Loader (continued)

INST 980

Contents

INSP 1

Contents

INSP 1

Contents
General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
10
Needed Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ir.spection Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Tape Transport Unit and Tape Control Unit Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Tapa Transport Unit inside
20
Tape Transport Unit- DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Tape Transport Unit Inside - Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Tape Control Unit Inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Tape Control Unit- AC Primary Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Tape Control Unit - DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Tape Control Unit Inside - Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Powered Off with Power Cable Disconnected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Safety ECs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Power Off and On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Automatic Cartridge Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 56
AC Grounding Diagram (Tape Control Unit SO Hz and 60 Hz)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

AC Grounding Diagram (Tape Transport Unit and Drive 50 Hz and 60 Hz) . . . . . . . . 70

TA90 MG EC C04824

Notes

TA90 MG EC C04824

Notes

INSP 2

Notes

INSP 2

General Instructions
General Instructions

Needed Materials

This safety checklist is to ensure that a machine that has not
been under a service contract has the necessary safety Items
installed and that no other changes were made that would make
it :..insafe. Each machine, as it was designed and assembled. had
needed safety items installed to protect the owners, operators,
and service personnel from injury. This checklist verifies only
those items.

The following items are needed or will be useful during the
inspection.
•

logic/wiring diagrams

•

Parts catalog

•

Machine history

General Instructions

INSP 10

General Instructions

INSP 10

This checklist should be performed before the normal inspection
for a service contract. The machine should be suspected to be
unsafe and you should think It unsafe until you verity that it is
safe. If any unsafe conditions are present, you must decide how
serious the hazard could be and whether you can continue
without first correcting the problem.
Think about these conditions and the safety hazards they
present:
•

Electrical, especially primary power, for example: an
electrically charged frame can cause serious or lethal
electrical shock.

•

Explosive, for example: damaged or expanding capacitors
can cause serious injury .

Mechanical hazards, such as a cartridge latch assembly
cover missing, can cause injury to the body.

Some of the pages are for features and need not be checked if
the features are :1ct !:1sta!!ed en the machine.

TA90 MG EC C04824

Inspection Procedures

Inspection Procedures
Note: See INSP 15 and INSP 16 for the following locations.

3. That all hinges and latches are in acceptable operating
condition. not broken or corroded.

Preparation

4. That the tape transport unit displays rotatuithout binding
and the mechanical stops are not broken II.

Note: The displays have detented stop positions.

CAUTION: TILT HAZARD
Do NOT open both drives of a tape transport unit that is not
bolted on to another tape transport unit or tape control unit. With
the automatic cartridge loader feature Installed and both drive
drawers fully extended, a tape transport unit that is not bolted to
another unit will tilt forward with about 20 Ibs. of force applied to
the top of either automatic cartridge loader.

Tape Control Unit

On the Tape Control Unit
Check and Correct As Needed
1. That the machine is stable, that there are no defective
casters or pedestals.

Start the checklist with the machine powered off and with all
electrical power removed rrom the machine.

2. i~t the caster lock thumbscrews are in the two rear casters

1. Power off the subsystem.

3. That all hinges and latches are in acceptable operating
condition. not broken or corroded.

2. Have the customer open the CB/CP (circuit breaker/circuit
pane!) to the outlet supplying power to the subsystem.

4. !':'~iit gth:.~~~!.~~gli~~;~ does not have frayed or damaged

3. Check the customer's plug housing to building ground.

5. That the power cable is 10 gauge, 4 wire for 60 Hz and
50 Hz Japan, or 10 gauge 5 wire for other 50 Hz machines.

•

There should be no voltage present.

•

Resistance should be less than 0.1 ohm.

win

d~ un::: J.lIU

'CIIU

iii.

• If the power cable is not marked, measure the diameter

4. Unplug the power cable.

of a wire in the cord with the insulation removed. The
diameter of a 10-gauge wire is 2.588 millimeters (0.102
inches).

5. Unplug the STI cables from the tape conlrol unit See LOC 1.
6. Disconnect the read/write bus connectors and the thermal
connector
and the ac power connector
between the
Tape Control Unit and the first tape Iransporfunit and
between all the tape transport units.

INSP 15

6. That the power plug type is R&S· 3760
(60 Hz only). This
plug will mate with the R&S 3754 receptacle.

Tape Transport ~nit

7. That the power plug type is Hubbell connector 532P6W
(Digital PIN 12-14379-06) (SO Hz only). Thi s plug will mate
with the Hubbell receptacle 532RSW (Digital PIN
12-14378-06).
* R&S is Trademark of Russell & Stoll

7. Check that there is no equipment plugged into any of the
convenience outlets in the tape control unit They are
located on the left front of the ac power supply CU-PS-O t.

8. Obtain the items that are needed or will be useful before
. starting the inspection.

Tape Transport Unit and Tape Control Unit
Outside
Powered off with power cable and system attach cables
disconnected.

I. Ii
ReadlWrite Bus Connectors
D and
Thermal Connector

II
I

On the Tape Transport Unit
Check and Correct As Needed

1. That the machine is stable, that there are no defective
casters or pedestals.
2. That the caster lock thumbscrews are in the two rear casters

IJ·

TA90 MG EC C13764

Inspection Procedures

INSP 15

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

INSP 16

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

INSP 16

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

Tape Control Unit

Tape Transport Unit

Rear Yie~··

.m~------r'<

TA90 MG EC C04824

Inspection Procedures (Continued) -

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

INSP 20

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

INSP 20

Nota: Saa INSP 21 for tha following locations.

Tape Transport Unit Inside
Powered Off with Power Cable Disconnected
Check and Correct As Needed
1. That all ground jumpers (normally green/yellow) are tightly
attached by frame ground screws

II.

That all nQrm~1 safety covers {operator and service areas}
are in place including those protecting mechanical devices
and hot surfaces - no sharp corners or edges should be
unprotected.
a. The ac CB 1 safety cover is correctly in place

II.

b. The ac power cap is present for each tape transport unit
and securely attached to the safety cover

II.

c. The logic board 02A-A1 covers (pin and card side) are in
place

II.

d. The drive and tape path safety cover is in place
e. The blower safety cover is in place

f. The ac terminal block cover is in place

fJ.
,

g. The limited customer access covers are in place

TA90 MG. EC C04824

II.

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

INSP 21

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

T~pe-Transport Unit Front with SafeiY- Cover

Inspection Procedures (Continued)
TA90 MG EC C04824

INSP 21

Notes

INSP 24

TASO MG EC C04824

Notes

INSP 24

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

INSP 25

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

INSP 25

Tape Transport Unit Inside (Continued)
Check and Correct As Needed
1. That all safety labels are located where indicated:
a. That all labels reading "LINE VOLTAGE PRESENT WITH
POWER OFF" are attached in the following locations:

•

Terminal strip at lower rear

•

Main tape transport unit circuit breaker

II·

b. That a label reading "Unit Weight 101 LB (46 KG)" is
located on the dc power supply TU-P5-01

fJ.

2. That the thermal switches are not bypassed. See CARR-DR
1100 and CARR-DR 820 for a procedure to get access to the
thermal switches.
3. No metal filings, dirt or contaminants, water or other fluids,

or marks of earlier smoke or burning are present.

If there are any marks of earlier smoke or burning, ensure
the cause has been corrected before applying power to the
unit.

Front View

Tape Transport Un_i~ Rear

TA90 MG EC C04824

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

INSP 32

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

INSP 32

Tape Transport Unit-DC Power Supplies
Powered Off with Power Cable Disconnected
Check and Correct As Needed
1. That all power supplies are attached tightly. The dc power
supply TU-PS-01 has two screws

2. That all grounded metal has good ground continuity (less
than 0.' ohm) - covers, housings, metai box sides, and so on.

3. The power wiring for frayed or damaged wiring.
4. That the following acldc CBs and fuses are the correct size:

CBl AC
Fl/2
F3/4

F5!6
F7/8

F9/1G
Fll/12
Fl3/l4
FlS

Drive frame 19 A
Drive Gil
12 A Medium blow
Drive Gil
5 A Long blow
Drive 9/1
1 A Long blow
Drive Gil
3 A Long blow
Drive G/l
8 A Medium blow
Drive Gil
.75 A Immediate blow
Drive Gil
15 A Medium blow
2 A Long blow

These values can be EC sensitive, so check the fuses and
CBs against the machine logic.

Tape Transport Unit Inside-Miscellaneous
Powered Off with Power Cable Disconnected
Check and Correct As Needed
1. All cables, connections. plugs, and so on for frayed or
damaged wiring.
2. All connections, plugs and so on for damaged latches and/or
clamps.

rape Transport Unit Rear

TA90 MG EC C04824

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

In~pectlon Procedures (Continued)

INSP 35

Tape Control Unit Inside
Powered Off with Power Cable Disconnected
C:1eck and Correct As Needed

1. That all ground jumpers (normally green/yellow) are tightly
attached by frame ground screws
See !NS? 65 for the
AC groundi ng di agram.

2. That all grounded metal has good ground continuity (less
than 0.1 ohm) - covers, housings, metal box sides, and so on.
3. That all hinges and latches are in acceptable operating
condi tion - not broken or corroded.
4. That all normal safety covers (operator and service areas)
are in place including those protecting mechanical devices
and hot surfaces - no sharp corners or edges should be
unprotected.
•
•

iii.

The logic gate card covers (Al, A2) are in place
All three gate DC voltage strip (T8) covers are in place

O·

The AC safety cover is in place
Both limited customer access covers are in place

5. That all safety labels are located where indicated.
•

Labels reading, "Hazardous Area, etc..... must be
located on the frame members at
and

6. Mark the customer's circuit breaker/circuit panel (C8/CP)
number for the circuit controlling AC power to subsystem at
CB1 (main line CB)
and on the main line power cable
plug.

7. That the thermal switches are not bypassed. These are
located at the top and the bottom of 01-A gate and on the STI
(01 B) gate. See CARR-TCU 1430 for a procedure to get
access to the 01-A gate thermal switch, and CARR-TCU 9050
for the 01-B (STI) gate switch.

8. That no obvious non-Digital ECO changes have been made.
9. That the fan safety screens on the fans on the bottom of the
At gate are in place

10. That drip screen-guard

1m is in place.

11. That no metal filings, dirt or contaminants, water or other
fluids, or marks of earlier smoke or burning are present
12. If there are marks of earlier smoke or burning, ensure the
cause has been corrected before applying power to the unit

TA90 MG EC C13764

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

INSP 35

Inspection Procedures (Continued)
Note: See INSP 40 and INSP 41 lor the following locations.

Inspection Procedures (Continued)
7. The resistance from the frame ground to DC ground at:
•

T81-5

•

TB1-6

•

T81-7

•

TB1-8

•

TB2-5

1. That the ac power supply is attached in place tightly. The
power supply has two mounting screws

•

TB2-6

•

T82-7

2. That all ground jumpers (normally green/yellow) are
strongly attached by frame ground screws
The system
attach ground wires are not present if feature is not installed.

•

TB2-8

Tape Control Unit - AC Primary Power
Powered Off with Power Cable Disconnected
Check and Correct As Needed

II.

To check the shield ground of the power cable, you must
remove the left side safety cover
and the ac input filter
cover on the power supply
Leave these covers off, you
will need to return to this area later.

II.

8. That all acldc CBs and fuses are the correct size:

59 Hz

CBl
CB2
CB3
F1

S9 Hz

eSl
CB2
CB3
F1

AC
AC
AC
DC

Main Line

Main line
Conv./24 V
Cony.

AC
AC
DC

Cony.
24 V
24 V

24 V

25 A
5A
1A
5 A Long Blow
25 A
5A
7A
5 A Long Blow

These values can be EC sensitive, so check the fuses and
CBs against the machine logic.

and to the ground pin on:
•

Logic board 01 A-A 102008

•

Logic board 01A-A202D08
Th@ resistance should not be more than 0.1 ohm.

3. That all grounded metal has good ground continuity (less

Mainline Breaker

than 0.1 ohm) - covers, housings. metal box sides, and so on.

.
.
"
.
ri

II.

5. That all ac service outlets are safe

&. Measure from

Convenience Outlet

~;:-:-"'
I I?-==~
RMrQ] _... Iw' I~~
~ @~I !~E~: I:::: ~

4. That the ac mainline cord has no frayed or damaged wiring
at the ac power supply CU-PS-01

INSP 40

Tape Control Unit

ground pin to frame. The resistance should not be more
than 0.1 ohm.
Note: That the service outlets are for temporary use of
service equipment only.

----."

r---' ..·_ . ·. .·

___ ~ 'L

:FI'AllUIlE

___

..1'

0 A::.":...
~

11111'

6. The resistance from the line cord ground pin and housing to

AC Power Supply 60 Hz and 50 Hz Japan

all frames and to all power assembly grounds as follows:
•

Line cord ground pin to frame ground.

•

Line cord housing to frame ground .
. The resistance should not be more than 0.1 ohm.

Mainline Breaker

c.:~Z!..

I.~"

r~Ol

r-----\--OVERCUAIIE!lT ,..OTECTIO .. - - - - - ,
MAU'~III' IIIEAKER

CIZ SA
COIIV.

tiol/TUT

ell

-ltv co ..
TIIAIISFIJII"E~

.,ev callno~

rlirrum
. "s'O....u ~ SA ZtV rJ!i~a::::AP11
~lOIlGnO

5UU7

'~Z'

=.-:::~.:,..:.c::.~.. ~z I~: ~!~ LIIIEt

~",,!:::'
m
r-----, 51 .........
~ ".... "".C
r ------ : !
I"~
f
... Utll!tI._
•• _;
L _____ ..1 0
'--......
--.--..1
(I

~ _______ ...J

\9 C)

231112''''''C

'AIWIIE

Front

TA90 MG EC C04824

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

INSP 40

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

INSP 41

Tape Control Unit

Left Side

AC Input Filter Cover

1:1

60 Hz, and 50 Hz Jap.an
Tape Control Unit Left Front with
Access to AC Power Supply Left Side
AC/DC distribution to TCU System

AC Power Supply 60 Hz and 50 ~z Japan

AC/DC distribution to TCU
)~-----4-- Neutral

Phase 3

Left Side

50 H~,.;x~pV_~PC!n_

-- Tape Control Unit L~ftFront with_ _.
Access to AC Power Supply Left Side

---- ------

----- --

-. . .-.

-.. - -.

AC Power Supply 50 Hz (Except Japan)

TA90 MG EC C04824

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

INSP 41

Inspection Procedures {Continued}
Inspection Procedures (Continued)

INSP 45

Tape Control Unit - DC Power Supplies
Powered Off with Power Cable Disconnected
Check and Correct As Needed
,. That a/l grounded metal has good ground continuity (less
than 0.' ohm) - covers, housings, metal box sides, and so on.
2. AI! power wiring for frayed or damaged wires,
3. That the dc power supply is attached in place tightly. The
power supply has two mounting screws

4. That the STI dc power supply (PS03)
tightly.

II is attached in place

5. That all ac/dc CBs and fuses are the correct size:

CBl
CB2
CB3
CB4
F1

AC
DC +5
DC +5
DC -5
+8.5
+ 24

v
v

v
v
v

Ie A
65 A
45 A
12 A
5 A medium blow
2 A long blow

These values can be EC sensitive, so check the fuses and
CBs against the machine logic,

CU·PS03 STI DC Power Supply

TA90 MG EC C04824

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

INSP 45

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

Inspection Procedures (Continued)
Tape Control Unit Inside - Miscellaneous

9. Turn ac CB1 and the Unit Emergency Power Off switch on,
and put the Local/Remote switch in the Local position.
Depress Local Power Enable to restore power.

Powered Off with Power Cable Disconnected

10. With power up, ensure that the machine will power down
with the Unit Emergency switch.

Check and Correct As Needed

11. Reset the Unit Emergency switch. Depress Local Power
Enable to restore power.

INSP 55

1. All cables, connections. plugs. and so on for frayed or
damaged wi ring.
2. All connections. plugs, and so on for damaged latches
and/or clamps.

+24 V control

Power Off and On

Mainline Breaker

1. Check the customer plug housing to the ground pin. There
should be no voltage present and the resistance should be
less than 0.1 ohm.
2. Set CB1 off and plug in the power cable.
3. Have the customer close the CB/CP (circuit breaker/circuit
panel) that supplies the outlet to which the subsystem is
attached.

4. Does machine power label
match customer power?
Measure with the volt/ohm meter at the ac input filter

D·

5. Have the customer open the CB/CP that supplies the cutlet to
which the subsystem is attached and unplug the power
cable.
6. Reinstall the covers over the ac input filter.
7. Reinstall all covers and set CB1 off and plug in the power
cable.

8. Have the cus10mer close the CB/CP to the outlet that
supplies the subsystem.

Phase 1
·Phase 2

Shield

j}-tt.------~~- Neutral

)~"""-----...!.-Phase 3

Phase 3

Left Side

AC Input Filter Cover

Tape Control Unit AC Power Supply 50 Hz (Except Japan)

TA90 MG EC C04824

left Side

AC Input Filter Cover

Tape Control Unit AC Power Supply 60 Hz, and 50 Hz Japan

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

INSP 55

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

Drive

INSP 56

Drive

INSP 56

Automatic Cartridge Loaders _
Check and Correct As Needed
•

That the lower automatic cartridge loader safety cover is in
place

•

That all components are mounted correctly and all cable
clamps are installed.

•

Inspect all cables. connectors. and plugs for frayed or
damaged wiring.

•

Inspect all connections and plugs for damaged latches
and/or clamps.

•

Inspect the automatic cartridge loader base plate for correct
installation of the fuse labels

•

That the two fuses are the correct value as shown on the
labels
on the automatic cartridge loader base plate.

II.

F1 + 24 V dc 1.SA Slow Blow
-

F2 + S V dc SA Instantaneous Blow.

TA90 MG EC C04824

(

AC Grounding Diagram (60 Hz Tape Control Unit)

INSP 65

Not••:
1. All wires shown are green/yellow.

2. Blocks are for adiacent frame attachment. Thev are used for
.
frame ground and stability.

ITEM DESCRIPTION

AWG

14
II AC-24V DC CIA
EJ Cont. gate fan CIA 18

II Cont. AC fan CIA

II Jumper

legend

Jr:X: External tooth lockwasher/starNasher
Logic gate

IT Metal to metal wi th sel f tappi ng scre'lis
Welded connection
~

Connector with grounding pin

Tapped holes for screw attachment

Ooubl e crimp

JX·X Ground pin in conneo: tor

-. -

AC box

STI Adapter Cage
.

..-

- STI
DC Supply

System ac main power

AC Grounding Diagram (60 Hz Tape Control Unit)
TA90 MG EC C04824

INSP 65

AC Grounding Diagram (50 Hz Tape Transport Unit and Drive)

INSP 70

Notes:
1. All wires shown are green/yellow.
2. Threaded block for adjacent frame attachment, frame ground
and stability.

... i i-ri

Tape
Transport
Unit. Blower

I.H....H .. fi.l.r I .I. VI

A/C Input cable Asm 12
60 and 50 Hz Japan

A/C Input cable Asm 12

14
Power supply Ale
input ~able assembly

Ale box assembly,

N/A

A/C box assembly,

N/A

Ground Jumper Asm

Cable Asm compressor 16

Pneumatic supply

N/A

Ground jumper Asm

50 Hz WTC

60 and 50 Hz Japan

59 Hz WTC

Legend

i[][
Cl
J:[

External tooth lock~asherlstarwasher
Tapped holes for screws attachment
Metal to metal self tapping screws
Weld

Connector with ground pin

Double crimp

JX·X

Ground pin in connector

PANELAJ14

TA90 MG EC C04824

AC Grounding Diagram (50 Hz Tape Transport Unit and Drive)

. INSP

INDEX 1

Index

! Special Characters I
+1.7 V dc regulator, O1A-A1-T2 MAP 410 PWR 410-1
+24 V control transformer ac voltage taps location, tape control unit ac
power supply Lac: 55, LOC 60
-r24 V control voltage
diagram PWR 40
local mode MAP 110 PWR 110-1
MAP PWR 130-1
remote mode MAP 120 PWR 120-1
+5 V dc (J5 through J12) locations, tape control unit dc power
supply LOC 35
+5 V de distribution diagram, tape control unit PWR 42
+8.5 V de distribution diagram, tape control unit PWR 48
-5 V dc distribution diagram, tape control unit PWR 46

abbreviations GLOSS 1
ae grounding diagram
tape control unit I NSP 65
tape transport unit INSP 70
ac input and output locations (J1 and J3), tape control unit dc power
supply LOC 35
ae input filter cover location, tape control unit ae power supply LOC 55,
LOC 60
ac It ne cord, tape contro' unit
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1490
ae power circuit breaker, drive
description PANEL 15
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2180
ae power supply
ae power connector LaC 45
cable, removal and replacement CARR-OR 750
distribution diagram PWR 32
jumper checks INST 56
power off and on procedures CARR-TeU 5
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1440
safety inspection INSP 40
tape control unit
local mode diagram PWR 36
panel PWR 15
remote mode diagram PWR 38
50 Hz except Japan
location LOG 60
voltage tolerance table PWR 20
60 Hz and 50 Hz Japan
location LOC 55
voltage tolerance tables PWR 20
ae/dc distribution location, tape control unit ac power supply LOC 55,
Lex:: 60
action messages INST 5
adapter card
clocks EAD 80
introduction INTRa 50
location, drive LOC 15, Lex: 130
logical components OPER 40
Switch setting procedure CARR-TCU 1189
addmg tape transport units to an installed subsystem INST 135
additional tape transport unit installation INST 20
6::ldress and register selection chart, scope loop utility MO/SDISK 1100
address cross-reference tables, external register OF 5
address in line operation, channel to tape cootrol unit
interface OPER 190

TA90MG

EC C04824

address in line operation, tape control unit to drive
interconnection OPER 190
address out line operation, channel to tape control unit
interface OPER 100
address out line operation, tape control unit to drive
Interconnection OPER 100
address, sync (scope loop utility) MD'SOISK 1100
addresses, setting the
drive PANEL 12
drive, logical INST 50
drive, physical INST 50
tape control unit INST 40, PANEL 12
addressing
external register OPER 65
introduction INTRO 10
adjustments
cartridge latched sensor CARR-OR 110
file protect switch CARR-DR 00
pressure regulator PNEU 5
tach sensor A, after replacement CARR-DR 2250
tach sensor B, after replacement CARR-OR-2260
tach sensors A and B CARR-DR 40
tape path sensor A CARR-DR 50, CARR-DR 120
tape path sensor B CARR-DR 10, CARR-DR 40, CARR-DR 70
vacwm PNEU 5
air fitting location, drive LOC 120
air pressure hose clamp, illustration of PLAN 6
air pressure loss analysis procedure
air pressure loss PNEU 10
pneumatic problem on a single drive PNEU 20
air pressure test hose assembly
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2620
alert sequence from the drive to the tape control unit EAO 42
alert sequence, tape control unit to drive operation OPER 185
area of subsystem served by cable group, cable group list FSI 200,
FSI 201
assembly
feed CARR-OR 2950
input stack CARR-DR 2003, LOC 171
left input rail CARR-DR 2930
load CARR-OR 2820, CART 17
loader mechanical CARR-OR 2850, Lac: 170, LOC 171, OPER 240
output stack CARR-OR 2970, Lac: 171
right input rail CARR-DR 2940
assigned elsewhere sense bit SENSE 110
attaching additional tape transport units INST 20
aUachineriftool forleader block replacerl'ft!nt, Illustration of PlAN 6
attention indicator OPER 240, PANEL 40
attention status bit SENSE 205
automatic cartridge loader INSP 56, LGNO 46, LGND 47, LGNO 48,
PANEL 40

bar LEOs (Indicators) description PANEL 15
basic tape control unit test
E010 description DIAG 2
hoW to run MDlSDISK 530
baSic tape motion test, diagnostic routine EEA2
BCPH
See buffer channel pointer high register
BCPL
See buffer channel pointer low register

BCSE
See butter channel status and error register
BCSS

DIAG 500

See buffer channel SARS register
BD30
See buffer diagnostic 0 register
B[x;1
See buffer diagnostic 1 register
BDPH
see buffer device pointer high register
BDPL
see buffer device pointer low register
BCSE
See buffer device status and error register
beginning-or-tape sense bit SENSE 110
block diagram
dual tape control unit subsystem, theory INTRO 35
single tape control unit subsystem, theory INTRO 25
tape control unit theory INTRa 15
tape transport unit theory INTRO 45
block 10 position indicator for error recovery sense bit SENSE 110
blower assembly 1 and 2, tape control unit
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1500
blower assembly, drive
location Lac: 120
removal and replacement CARR-DR 200
board and cable interconnection failures EAD 5aXl
branch circuits CB check INST 6, I NST 306
buffer (local/remote) communication path from channel
adapter OPER 140
buffer adapter card
location Lac: 15
operation OPER 20
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1110
buffer adapter, cable group from channel adapter FSI 200
buffer area clocks EAD 20
buffer channel SARS (BCSS) bit dennitions OF 20
buffer channel status and error register (BCSE) bit definitions OF 15
buffer control card
clocks EAD 20
location LOC 15
operation OPER 20
removal and replacement CARR-TeU 1110
buffer control extemal registers DF 5
buffer device pointer high register (BDPH) bit definitions OF 30
buffer device pointer low register (BDPL) description DF 30
buffer device status and error register (BOSE) bit dennltions OF 20
buffer diagnostic 0 (B[x;O) bit definitions OF 25
buffer diagnostic 1 register (8001) bit definitions OF 25
bUffer memoryre~rence CARR-TCU 7
buffer page 0, 1, 2, and 3, MD support diskette channel RAM
display M[),SDISK 116
buffer regi sters
buffer channel pOinter high register (BCPH) OF 15
buffer channel pointer low register (BCPL) OF 15
buffer channel SARS register (BCSS) OF 20
buffer channel status and error register (BCSE) DF 15
buffer device pointer high register (BOPH) OF 30
buffer device pointer low register (BDPL) OF 30
buffer device status and error register (BCSE) OF 20
buffer diagnostic 0 register (9000) OF 25
buffer diagnostic 1 register (B001) OF 25
buffer wrap register (BWRP) OF 30
buffer storage cards
location Lac: 15
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1110
buffer storage operation OPER 20
buffer wrap register (BWRP) bit definitions DF 30
buffer, data
controls test, diagnostic routine EE33 DlAG 110
data path test, diagnostic routine EE32 OIAG 100

Introduction INTRO 20
operation OPER 20
buffered write mode INTRa 22, OPER 100
buffers and 1, MDsupport diskette status store display MD/SDISK 121
bundled lines, how to read graphic format LGNO 70
bus and control lines, graphic symbol LGND 5
bus connectors location, tape control unit read/write LOC 25, LOC 30
bus in line operation, channel to tape control unit interface OPER 100
bus interconnection checks CARR-DR 3-3
bus out check sense bit SENSE 110
bus out line operation, channel to tape control unit interface OPER 190
bus problems, support troubleshooting EAO 5030
buses, MO support diskette tape control unit scan rings MD'SOISK 131
busy status bit SENSE 205
BWRP
See buffer wrap register

cable
ac power distribution
removal and replacement CARR-OR 2180
after using the fault symptom index FSI 2
checking device interconnections CARR-DR 3-3
connectors
dual tape control unit locations LOC 30
from and to, cable group list FSI 200
dc power distribution
internal locations. drive Lac: 140
removal and replacement CARR-OR 700, CARR-DR 791,
CARR-DR 796, CARR-DR 800
drive
read adapter location LOC 145
tach sensor location LOC 155
write adapter location LOC 150
groups, listing of FSI 200
interconnection failures, troubleshooting EAO 5(XX)
location chart, tape transport unit CARR-DR 491
message display de power
removal and replacement CARR-OR 003
power LOC 170
Signal LOC 170
STI cable, Installation INST 90
table, cable groups FSI 201
tachometer sensor
removal and replacement CARR-OR 810
tape control unit
pa.ver, connecti ng INST 60
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 150
tape control unit subsystem diagrams EAO 5030
tape transport unit
removal and replacement CARR-OR 490
cable harness, tape transport unit thennal switch
removal and replacement CARR-DR 830
CAE
See channel adapter error register
card
loader control CARR-DR 2810, LOC 171
card, logic
drive
removals and replacements CARR-DR 640
location charts, hOW to read graphic format LGND 60
locatIon IdenUncatJon

l..OC 10

plug lists, how to read graphic format LGNO 60
tape cortrol unit
removal ancl replacement CARR-TCU 1110

INDEX 1

INDEX 2

Index
CARR-DR section introduction CARR-DR 1-9
CARR-TCU section introduction CARR-TeU 1-9
cartridge failure determination procedure CART 30
cartridge in stack sensor removal and replacement CARR-DR 2910
cartridge latch
assembly
location LOG 100
removal and replacement C!\RR-OR 80
solenoid
location LOG 100
removal and replacement CARR-OR 20
cartridge latched sensor
adjustment CARR-OR 110
introduction INTRO 51
location LOC 100
removal and replacement CARR-DR 110
cartridge loader, automatic INSP 56, LGND 46. LGND 47, LGND 48,
PANEL 40
cartridge present sensor
introduction INTRO 51
location LOC 100
removal and replacement CARR-DR 100
cartridge staged sensor CARR-DR 2920
cartridge, magnetic tape
about CARR-OR 2320
clutch tool illustration PLAN 6
condition when unable to remove cartridge from drive
hoW to Identify CART 10
leader block and threader pin at cartridge latch
assembly CART 10-3
leader block and threader pin in the machine reel
hub CART 10-2
leader block and threader pin stopped in the tape
path CART 10-2
leader block separated, example CART 10-1
tape pulled out, example CART 10-1
description CART 5, INTRO 10
magnetic tape attachment procedure CART 30
recording media characteristics INTRO 5
removal by hand CART 10
CAS
See channel adapter status register
CCA
See channel card register
CCC
See channel card control register
CE messages CElHSC 4
I nformation message CElHSC 4
question message CElHSC 4
request message CElHSC 4
CE panel description CElHSC 8, 10 and 12
center tape guide
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2310
CER
See channel error register
channel adapter
area clocks EAo 10
cable groups FSI 200
cards
clocks EAD 10
locations LOC 15
removals and replacements CARR-TCU 1110
switch locations LOC 50
code, sense bits SENSE 110
communications OPER 15
data handling area OPER 15
description INTRO 30
error register (CAE) OF 33
function test MQ'SDISK 820

TA90MG

EC C04824

interrupt register, MD support diskette channel RAM
display MD'SOISK 116
mUltiple channel adapters failing EAD 5AJ07
oscilloscope information EAD 5008
status register (CAS) DF 35
status, MD support diskette chamel RAM display MD/SDISK 116
tags, MO support diskette channel RAM display MQ'SOISK 116
to buffer (local/remote) communication path OPER 140
to buffer failures, troubleshooting guide EAo 5007
to status store communication path OPER 140
to status store Interconnection EAD 5006
channel adapters, setting Jumpers for on the dc power
supply CARR-TCU 1450
channel bus cable group FSI 200
channel card address register layout OPER 215
channel card control register (CCC) OF 35
channel card control register layout OPER 215
channel card register (CCA) OF 35
channel commands
summary INTRO 55
channel configuration switch location(s) LOC sochannel data register layout OPER 215
channel end status bit SENSE 205
channel error register bit definition OF 35
channel errors, sense error history table OF 145
channel Initial selection OPER
channel Interface OPER 15
channel RAM display diagram, MD support diskette MQ'SDISK 115
channel request register bit definitions OF 40
channel tag cable group FSI 200
channel to tape control unit Interface lines descriptions OPER 190
characteristiCS, operating INTRO 5
characters, message display PANEL 30
checking read/write
offline checkout, dual tape control unit INST 76
offline checkout, single tape control unit INST 72
checking the addresses
offline checkout, dual tape control unit INST 76
offline checkout, single tape control unit INST 72
checking the head connectors CARR-DR 130
checking the Initial microprogram load
offline checkout, dual tape control unit subsystem INST 83
omine checkout, single tape control unit INST 74
checking the switches
offline checkout, dual tape control unit INST 76, INST 78
offline checkout, single tape control unit INST 70
checks
file protect switch CARR-DR 90
offline checkout for a dual tape control unit subsystem INST 76,
INST 78
offline checkout for a single tape control unit subsystem INST 70,
INST 72
pneumatic PNEU 30
pre-installation INST 4
safety INST 6
tape control unit power supply jumpers, installation INST 56
tape IIlter CARR-OR 2160
tape transport unit power supply jumpers, Installation INST 56
CHI( 1 errors OPER 70
CHI< 2 errors OPER 70
CHK 46 air pressure loss analysiS
circuit breaker
safety checks INST 6
tape control unit
locations LOC 35
terminals LOC 65
tape transport unit ac power CB
location LOC 75

panel PANEL 15
terminals LOC 65
clamping procedure for the plenum supply hose CARR-DR 3-1
cleaner block
cleaning CARR-DR 130
location LOC 100
removal and replacement CARR-DR 1610
cleaner vacuum hose
removal and replacement CARR-DR 470
cleaning
cleaner block CARR-DR 130
decoupler CARR-OR 130
tape head guide assembly
manually CARR-DR 130
using the cleaning cartridge PLAN 6
clock
timing chart, control storage EAD 7
to and from the maintenance adapter EAO 70
to channel adapters EAD 10
to status store EAD 10
to the adapter card EAD 80
to the buffer control card EAD 20
to the drive-adapter card EAO 40
to the microprocessor card EAD 6
to the read clock and format card EAD 50
to the read detect cards EAO 30, EAO 50
to the read ECCICORR card EAD 50
to the read skew buffer cards EAo 50
to the status store basic card EAD 60
to the status store communication card EAD 60
to the write data card EAD 30
XR bus and control EAD 8
clutch tool for releasing the cartridge clutch, Illustration of PLAN 6
command out line operation, channel to tape control unit
Interface OPER 190
command reject sense bit SENSE 110
command status table (CST) OF 90
communication cable, dual tape control trllt
installing INST 30
introduction INTRO 40
completion report, Inspection INSP 60
compliant guide, read/write head, removal and
replacement CARR-DR 2nO
compression spring
removal and replacement CARR-OR 180
COMTAB register OF 89
configurations
diagram, tape control unit to tape control unit
communication OPER 145
dual tape control unit OPER 140
single tape control unit OPER 135
status store to status store communication path OPER 145
tape control unit to tape control unit communications OPER 145
connecting
bus and tag cables CARR-TCU 1360
dual tape control unit communications cable INST 30
tape control unit power cable INST 60
connectors, graphic symbol LGNo 5
control
lines, graphic symbol LGNo 5
control card removal and replacement, loader CARR-DR 2810
control card, buffer
clocks EAD 20
location LOC 15
operation OPER 20
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1110
control card, loader LOC 171
control lines, graphic symbol LGND 5

control storage
array card
locati on LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-TCU.1110
clocks timing chart EAo 7
Introduction INTRO 20
tables and logs
device operations table (COT) DF 120
diagnostic hardware error log (OOHELO) OF 117
path group 10 table (PGT) OF 140
path group map (PGM) OF 135
sense error history table (SNERRH) OF 145
control storage to drtve Interconnection OPER 230
control store card
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1110
controls and data, timing chart OPER 230
convenience outlet
+24 V control voltage diagram PWR 40
jumper checks INST 56
location, tape control unit ae power supply LOC 55, LOC 60
MAP PWR 150-1
tape control unit ac power supply panel PWR 15
convoluted bellows
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2230
corrective action, predictive maintenance MSG 350
coupler assembly
covers
drive, removal and replacement CARR-DR 2-5
drive, top, removal and replacement CARR-OR 2-8
tape control unit
front cowl' adjustment CARR-leU 2-2
removals CARR-TCU 2-1
replacements CARR-TCU 2-2
tape transport unit
front COWl' adjustment CARR-OR 2-2, CARR-OR 2-4
removals CARR-OR 2-1, CARR-DR 2-3
replacements CARR-DR 2-2, CARR-DR 2-4
criteria read and write data checks sense bytes SENSE 180
cross-reference tables
elClemal register address
buffer control card OF 5
drive adapter card OF 5
maintenance adapter card OF 5
microprocessor card OF 10
read data now and read control card OF 10
status store card OF 10
write data flow card OF 10
XRA value to register name OF 12
CRR
See channel request register
CST
See command status table
customer engineering panel CElHSC 4
description CElHSC 4
display CElHSC 4
keypad CElHSC 4
location of controls and Indicators CElHSC 4
special function key operations CElHSC 4

CUT

see tape control Unit operations table

INDEX 2

INDEX 3

Index

data analysis, support mai ntenance package SPROC 2
oata Duffer
r:ontrols test, diagnostic routine EE33 DIAG 110
data path test, diagnostic routine EE32 DIAG 100
introduction INTRO 20
operation OPER 20
data bvte count sense byte SENSE 160
data bYte transfer, maintenance adapter card to microprocessor
card EAD 71
data card, write
clocks EAD 30
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1110
dat1 channel path operating characteristics INTRO 5
data check sense bit SENSE 110
data fields DF 3
data flow diagram, read OPER 95
data flow/error detection diagram OPER 75
data flow/error detection external registers OPER 65
data handling functional areas, description of OPER 15
data in line operation, channel to tape control unit interface OPER 190
data movement, description OPER 15
data out line operation, channel to tape control unit Interface OPER 190
data record format, tape OPER 85
data that can be available, support maintenance package SPROC 2
data transfer errors MSG 100
data transfer sequence between the tape control unit and the drive and
WTM, write erase gap sequence EAD 43
data, moving OPER 65
dc power supply
diagram, tape control unit PWR 50
locations LOC 35
overview diagram PWR 34
tape control unit
connector locations LOC 35
dc power complete LED, ac power supply panel LOC 55,
LOC 60, PWR 15
diagnostic MAP 400 PWR 400-1
jumpers, checking INST 56
power indicator description PANEL 10
power indicator location LOC 50
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1450
safety lnspect10n INS?45
voltage tolerance tables PWR 20
tape transport unit
connector locations LOC SO, LOC 90
locations LOC SC, LOC 90
removal and replacement CARR-DR 950, CARR-DR 955
safety Inspection INSP 32
TB cable
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1&XJ
test tool
description PLAN 5
how to use Without tape control unit PWR 10
hem to use without tape transport unit PWR 12
verification procedure PWR 10
verification procedure PWR 12
OCR
See device control register
DDR
See dynamic device reconfiguration facility
deallocate procedure PLAN 55
aecoupler
assembly
location LOC 100

TA90MG

EC C04824

removal and replacement CARR-DR 120
cleaning CARR-DR 130
pressure hose
removal and replacement CARR-DR 420
vacuum hose
removal and replacement CARR-DR 430
depth, tape control unit and tape transport unit INTRa 5
description
adapter card OPER 40
basiC tape control unit test, error displays MDISDISK 1100
basiC tape control unit test, how to run MDJSDlSK 530
basiC tape motion test, diagnostic routine EEA2 DIAG 500
buffer adapter card OPER 20
buffer control card OPER 20
buffer storage OPER 20
buffered read data now OPER 90
buffered write mode OPER 100
cable group list FSI 200
channel adapter OPER 15
channel adapter function test, diagnostic routine EE64 MDlSDISK 820
channel adapter/buffer communications OPER 15
channel adapter/status store communications OPER 15
channel Interface OPER 15
control, tape control unit OPER 30
data buffer
controls test, diagnostic routine EE33 DlAG 110
data path test, diagnostic routine EE32 DlAG 100
description OPER 20
data transfer errors MSG 100
diagnostics, subsystem DlAG 2
digital servo card OPER 40
drive status bits 0-15 DF 150
ERF reports MSG 100
error checking, tape contrOl unit OPER 30
error packet MSG 100
external register bus addressing and data pattem test, diagnostic
routine EE85 DlAG 400
fault symptom index FSI 2
Format 7 MSG 100
Format 8 MSG 100
identification code introduction, diagnostic DlAG 2
initial microprogram load (IML) OPER 00
initial selection, tape control unit to drive operation OPER 185
interrupt level test, diagnostic routine EE13 MDlSDISK 555
logical components of the tape transport unit OPER 40
loop write to read
description OPER 110
long test, diagnostic routine EE54 DlAG 220
short pattern test, routine EE52 DlAG 200
short timing test, diagnostic routine EE53 DlAG 218
loose wrap test, tape OPER 55
maintenance adapter OPER 30
maintenance Information description by volume PLAN 10, PLAN 11
MD serlallzer/deserlallzer OPER 30
message display OPER 40, OPER 130
motion control OPER 1~
operator Information message error code MSG 15
parallel/serlallnterconnectlon OPER 130
pneumatic supply OPER 45
positioning, motion control OPER 130
power amplifier board OPER 40
power overview
tape control unit OPER 30
tape transport unit OPER 40
power sequencing OPER 00
power-on-reseUunder-YOltage detector, tape control unit OPER 30
processor card OPER 40

processor external register test, diagnostic routine
EE14 MD/SDISK 565
read
clOCk/detect cards OPER 2S
description OPER 25
drive data flow OPER 120
ECC/CORR card OPER 25
preampl ifier card OPER 40
skew cards OPER 25
read clock and format card OPER 25
read data now OPER 90
registers, maintenance adapter OPER 30
scope loop utility, diagnostic routine EEFO MD/SDISK 1100
sense data
byte 3, formats 19, 20, and 21 SENSE 115
bytes othrough 2, formats 19, 20, and 21 SENSE 110
bytes 16 through 23, format 21 SENSE 180
bytes 16 through 23, formats 19 and 20 SENSE 150
bytes 24 through 31, format 21 SENSE 190
bytes 24 through 31, formats 19 and 20 SENSE 160
bytes 4 through 7, formats 19, 20, and 21 SENSE 130
bytes 8 through 15, format 21 SENSE 170
bytes 8 through 15, formats 19 and 20 SENSE 140
description SENSE 100
sensor test, tape OPER 55
serial interconnection OPER 1~
status byte
bit descriptions SENSE 205
overview SENSE 200
status store
channel adapter communications OPER 30
desCription, functional area OPER 30
order test, routine EE93 DIAG 460
updating RAM OPER 142
write/read RAM storage test, routine EE92 DlAG 450
STI-FIPS adapter OPER 12
support maintenance package SPROC 2
support procedure, MD MDlSDlSK 100
switches and indicators PANEL 15
cable groups FSI 200
descriptions PANEL 10
SYS$ERRORLOG:ERRORLOO.SYS MSG 100
tape control unit drive to drive serial test, diagnostic routine
EE44 DIAG 170
tape control unit functional areas OPER 15
tape control unit to drive bus and tag test, routine EE43 DIAG 160
tape drtve
data flow OPER 120
thread-load tape OPER 55
transport description OPER 50
unwindtng/unloading tape OPER 55
tape report MSG 100
tape-wrlte-Immedlate mode OPER 100
transfer packet MSG 100
VMS error log messages MSG 100
voltage regulator, tape control unit OPER 30
write
data now card OPER 40
data now description OPER 100
description, fUnctional area OPER 20
write data flow OPER 120
write/read exerCiser, routine EEA3 [)lAG 510
write/read exerCiser, routine EEA4 [)lAG 550
determining the sense data format SENSE 100
developing a fault symptom code, support procedures SPROC 3
device (drive)
aSSignment mask, MD support diskette status store
display M[),SDISK 121

aSSignments. MD support diskette status store
display MD'SDISK 121
bus cable groups FSI 200
command, MD support diskette channel RAM display MCYSDISK 116
condition, MD support diskette ehafWle! RAM display MD/SDiSK; 16
control bus (DCB) bit definitions OF 40
control register (OCR) bit definitions DF 40
device level register (DLR) bit definitions DF 45
end status bit SENSE 205
Interrupt register (DIR) bit definitlorns DF 45
intervention required message format MSG 10
online sense bit SENSE 110
operatiOns table (DOT) OF 120
program nags, MD support diskette status store
display MD'SDISK 121
status/error register bit definitions OF 45
status, MD support diskette channel RAM display MDlSDlSK 116
status, MD support diskette status store display MD'SDISK 121
tag register (DTR) bit definitions OF 50
device Interconnection checks CARR-DR 3-3
OOHELO
See diagnostic hardware error log
diagnostic hardware error log (DGHELO) DF 117
diagnostic test options MO'SDISK 7
diagnostics
basic tape control unit test
how to run MD'SDISK 530
routine E010 description DIAG 2
basic tape motion test, routine EEA2 DlAG 500
channel adapter function test, routine EE64 MD'SDISK 820
data buffer
controls test, routine EE33 DIAG 110
data path test, routine EE32 [)lAG 100
drive command exerciser MDlSD!SK 1220
drive patch load utility, routine, EEF1 M[),SDISK 1120
external register bus addressing and data pattern test, routine
EE85 DIAG 400
Identification code
introduction DIAG 2
table DlAG 3
Interrupt level test, routine EE13 MDlSDISK 555
Introduction DlAG 2
long loop write to read test, routine EE54 DIAG 220
maintenance device/maintenance adapter diagnostic M[),SDISK 520
processor
external register test, routine EE14 MDISDISK 565
400c00ntest,-dtagflOstiorOYtine EE12MD1S01SK 550
processor function test, routine EE12 M[),SDISK 550
routine deserl ptlons DIAG 2
scope loop utility, routine EEFO MD'SDISK 1100
section descriptions DlAG 2
short loop write to read
pattern test, routine EE52 DlPG 200
timing test, routine EE53 DlAG 218
status store
order test, routine EE93 DIAG 460
write/read RAM storage test, routine EE92 DlAG 450
support diagnostic
tape control unlVdrive
tape control unit to drive bus and tag test, routine EE43 DlAG 160
tape control unit to drt ve bus out dri ver wrap test, diagnostic
routine EE42 DIAG 150
tape control unit to drive serial test, routine EE44 DlAG 170
write/read exerCiser, routine EEA3 [)lAG 510
write/read exerciser, routine EEA4 [)lAG 550
diagram, read data now OPER 95
digital servo card
introduction INTRO 50

INDEX 3

INDEX 4

Index
location Lex:: 130
digital serllo card, logical components OPER 40
dimensions, tape control unit and tape transport unit INTRO 5
DIR
See device interrupt register
disable indicator description PANEL 10
disconnect in line operation, channel to tape control unit
interface OPER 100
disconnect! ng tape transport units and tape control unit, relocate or
discontinue subsystem INST 180
dIscontinue sUbsystem INST 140
diskette drive
location LOC 50
operation OPER 220
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 860
diskette drive, tape control unit panel PANEL 10
dismount procedure PLAN 55
display maintenance adapter registers, MO support diskette
utilities MDISOISK 155
display subsystem configuration, MO support diskette MDlSDISK 105
distributIon cable (internal) locations, drive de LOC 140

DlR
See device, device level register

DOT
See device operations table
dot ORs of output lines, how to read graphic format LGNO 75
drive
adapter
description INTRa 30
diagram, single tape control unit subsystem overview INTRO 25
adapter card
docks EAO 40
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1180
setting switches CARR-TCU 1189
switch setting worksheet CARR-TCU 1188
address switch
description PANEL 15
location LOC 75
removal and replacement CARR-OR 1040, CARR-DR 1045
attachment, dual tape control units INTRO 40
blower assembly
location LOC 120
removal and replacement CARR-OR 200
bus cable groups FBI 200
cables location chart CARR-OR 491
command codes sense bytes SENSE 150
command exerciser
commands MDISOISK 1220
control options MDlSDlSK 1220
details MDISOISK 1222
diagram MDISOISK 1221
error messages MDISOISK 1220
introduction OIAG 2
prompting screens MO/SOISK 1225
connector locations LOC 120
covers removal and replacement CARR-DR 2-5
covers, top, removal and replacement CARR-DR 2-8
dc distribution cable (internal) locations LOC 140
deallocate procedure PLAN 55
detected errors sense byte SENSE 190
dismount procedure PLAN 55
drive power switch
description PANEL 15
location LOC 75
removal and replacement CARR-OR 1040
ending operation procedure PANEL 5
error codes sense byte SENSE 150
error recovery procedures code, sense byte 8 SENSE 140

TA90MG

EC C04824

errors, sense error history tabl e DF 145
external registers OF 155
features sense byte SENSE 160
flag 1 sense byte SENSE 150
how to operate PANEL 5
Interconnections
error descriptions EAO 5030
tape control unIt subs';~tem cable diagrams EAD 5030
troubleshooting guide, general EAO 5010, EAO 5030
locations LOC 9S
logic INTRa 50
model number sense byte SENSE 150
online/offline switch locations LOC 75
operator panel
description PANEL 15
location LOC 75
removal and replacement CARR-OR 2-6
power off and on procedures CARR-DR 8
read adapter cables locations Lac 145
ready/not ready switch locations Lac 75
rewind switch locations Lac 75
setting the addresses PANEL 12
setting the logical address INST 50
setting the physical addresses INST 50
status bits 0-15 description OF 150
status/error register (DSE) OF 45
status, message display PANEL 30
switch panel
description PANEL 15
location LOC 75
tach sensor cable locations LOC 155
thermal switch assembly
location LOC 130
removal and replacement CARR-OR 1100
top card connectors locatiOns LOC 130
transport assembly INTRO 51
unload switch locations LOC 75
write adapter cables locations LOC 150
o and 1 locations LOC 75
drive control card
Introduction INTRO 50
removal and replacement CARR-DR 850
drive data now description OPER 120
drive display panel locations LOC 75
drive Interconnections, error descriptions EAO 5030
drive patch load utility, routine EEF1 MDiSOISK 1120
drive to control storage Interconnection OPER 230
OSE
See device (drive) status/error register
OTR
See device tag register
dual tape control unit subsystem
cable connectors location LOC 25, LOC 30
cable group listi ng FSI 200
command sequence OPER 141
communication INTRO 40
configuration diagram OPER 141
diagram, theory INTRO 35
IML procedure PANEL 7
offline checkout INST 76, INST 78
setting tape control unit addresses INST 40
updating status store RAM OPER 142
updating the RAM status byte OPER 142
Writing a message Into address 80 and 83 OPER 142
dual tape control unit, error descriptions EAO 5050

EAO
Introduction EAO 3
EC compatibility problems, possible START 135
emergency power switch location LOC 50
enable communication path signal line, MOto MA communication
path OPER 80
end-of-call actions, support procedures SPROC 4
ending drive operation procedure PANEL 5
ending sequence timing chart, device stop OPER 186
endtng sequence, tape control unit to drive operatton OpER, 86
entry into the fault symptom index FSI 2
equipment check sense bit SENSE 110
ERA and (ERAH)
see error register A bit definitions
erase gap counts sense byte SENSE 190
ERB and (ERBH)
See error register B bit definitions
ERF reports MSG 100
ERP
See error recovery procedures, drive (sense byte 8)
error analysis diagram logic blocks, hc:m to read graphic
symbols LGNO 55
error checking, MO to MA communication path OPER 80
error cheCking, tape control unit OPER 30
error codes
MO support diskette status store display MDlSDlSK 121
sense byte 3, error recovery procedures action
description SENSE 120
table SENSE 115
error indicator description PANEL 10
error match value, MO support diskette utilities, tracelmatch
control MDiSOISK 146
error packet MSG 100
error path Isolation START 400
error recovery procedures, drive (sense byte 8) SENSE 140
error register A (ERA) and (ERAH) bit definitions OF 50
error register B (ERB) and (ERBH) bit definitions OF 55
error registers, MO support diskette register display/alter MO/SDISK 126
error, MO support diskette tape control unit scan rings MO'SOISK 131
error, message display PANEL 30
errors, XR detected OPER 10
ESO grounding wrist strap for electrostatic discharge PLAN 6
external drive address sense bits SENSE 160
external load resistor panel
removal and replacement CARR-OR 360
external register bus addressing and data pattern test, diagnostic routine
EE85 DlAG 400
external registers
address cross-reference tables, description of OF 3
addressing OPER 65
addressing, description of DF 3
bit definitions
buffer channel SARS register (BeSS) OF 20
buffer channel status and error register (BCSE) OF 15
buffer device pointer high register (BDPH) OF 30
buffer device status and error register (BOSE) OF 20
buffer diagnostic 0 register (BDGO) OF 25
buffer diagnostic 1 register (BOG1) OF 25
buffer wrap register (BWRP) OF 30
channel error register (CER) OF 35
channel request register (CRR) bit definitions OF 40
COMTAB register OF 89
device status/error register (OSE) OF 45
error register A (ERA) and (ERAH) OF 50
error register B (ERB) and (ERBH) OF 55

externai register address register (XRA) DF 85
maintenance data In register (MOl) OF 55
maintenance data out register (MOO) OF 60
maintenance status byte register (MSB) OF 60
maintenance tag in register (MTI) OF 60
maintenance tag out register (MTO) OF 62
processor control register (PeR) OF 65
processor error register (PER; OF 65
processor reset register (PRR) OF 65
processor status register (PSR) OF 70
read control register (RCR) OF 70
read diagnostiC control register (ROC) OF 70
read error register (RER) OF 75
read pattern register (RPR) OF 80
read residual count register (RRC) OF 80
read status register (RSR) OF 82
write control register (WCR) DF 82
buffer control card OF 5
data now/error detection OPER 65
diagram, data low/error detection OPER 75
drive adapter card OF 5
drive, description of OF 155
maintenance adapter card OF 5
maintenance control register (MCR) OF 55
maintenance data out register (MOO) OF 60
maintenance status byte register (MSB) OF 60
microprocessor card OF 10
operation OPER 65
read data now and read control card OF 10
status store OF 10
write control register (WCR) OF 82
write data now card OF 10
XRA value to register name cross-reference table OF 12
extractor, card PLAN 5
E010 basic tape control unit tests, description OIAG 2

fall indication, IML PANEL 7
failure lOs
basic tape motion test, routine EEA2 DlAG 500
data buffer controls routine EE33 DlAG 110
data buffer data path test, routine EE32 OIAG 100
external register bus addressing and data pattern test, routine
EE85 OIAG 400
Interrupt level test, routine EE13 MDlSDlSK 555
long loop write to read test, routine EE54 DlAG 3
processor external register test, routine EE14 MDlSDlSK 565
processor fUnction test, routine EE12 MD'SOISK 550
scope loop utility, routine EEFO M[A'SDISK 1100
short loop write to read pattern test, routine EE52 OtAG 200
short loop write to read timing test, routine EE53 DlAG 218
status store order test, routine EE93 OIAG 400
tape control unit to drive bus and tag test, routine EE43 OIAG 160
tape control unit to drive bus out drl...er wrap test, diagnostic routine
EE42 OIAG 150
tape control unit to drive serial test, routine EE44 OIAG 170
write/read exerCiser, routine EEA3 DlAG 510
write/read exerCiser, routine EEA4 OIAG 550
write/read RAM storage test, routine EE92 OIAG 450
fault symptom code
actions to take START 325
caused by other than TAOO hardware failures START 100
determining with ACL LEOs START 300
determining with Fault Indicators START 300
fault symptom code, developing a SPROC 3

INDEX 4

(
INDEX 5

Index
fault symptom index
after using FSI 2
cable group list, using the FSI 200
description of contents FSI 2
table FSI 3
features, optional INTRO 5
feed assembly LOC 171
!eed assembly removal and replacement CARR-DR 2950
field wire net lists, how to read graphic format LGND 80
file protect gauge PLAN 6
fi!e protect sense bit SENSE 110
file protect switch
adjustment CARR-DR 00
check CARR-DR 00
description CART 5
location LOC 95
removal and replacement CARR-DR 00
file reel clutch deSCription CART 5
file reel motor
location Lac 105
removal and replacement CARR-DR 30
file reel tachometer (tach 2) introduction INTRO 51
finai checkout
offline checkout, dual tape control unit subsystem INST 81
offline checkout, single tape control unit INST 74
first tape transport unit installation INST 11
Format 5 error log report
example MSG 200
extended sense information, description MSG 201
field definitions MSG 200
Format 8 error log report
example MSG 205
field definitions MSG 205
format sense data
aescriptIon SENSE 100
format 19
bytes 16 through 23 description SENSE 150
bytes 24 through 31 description SENSE 160
bytes 24 through 31, table SENSE 155
bytes 4 through 7, description SENSE 130
bytes 4 through 7, table SENSE 125
bytes 8 through 15 description SENSE 140
bytes 8 through 15, table SENSE 135
summary SENSE 110
format 20
bytes 16 through 23 description SENSE 150
bytes 24"through 31 descri~on SEf'fSE 100
bytes 24 through 31, table SENSE 155
bytes 4 through 7, description SENSE 130
bytes 4 through 7, table SENSE 125
bytes 8 through 15 description SENSE 140
bytes 8 through 15, table SENSE 135
summary SENSE 110
format 21
bytes 4 through 7, description SENSE 130
bytes 4 through 7, table SENSE 125
summary SENSE 110
format, tape OPER 85
!ormat, tape data record OPER 85
from and to connectors, cable group list FSI 200
FRU listing CARR-OR 1-7
FRU listing by alphabetical sequence CARR-TCU 1-8, CARR-OR 1-7
FRU number, cable group list FSI 200
lunction test
channel adapter MDlSDlSK 820
processor MDlSDlSK 550
functional area external registers, description of OF 3
functions, description of
tape control unit INTRO 15,OPER 12

TA90MG

EC C04824

tape transport unit INTRO 45
fuse (F1l LED, tape control unit ac power supply panel PWR 15
fuses
loader fuses CARR-DR 2880
removal and replacement CARR-DR 960, CARR-TCU 1470
tape control unit
location, ac power supply Lac 55, Lac 00
locations, de power supply LOC 35
tape transport unit dc power supply
locations Lac 80, LOC 00
fuses continue to blow; tape transport unit PWR 30

gate fan cable, tape control unit
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1650
gauge, pressure/vacuum PLAN 5
glossary GLOSS 1
GMP diagnostics CElHSC 14
graphic symbols and lines LGND 5
ground wire check, machine INST 6, INST 306
group number, cable group list FSI 200

hardware error code sense byte SENSE 150
hardware tape contiOl unit information sense byte SEt..'SE 160,
SENSE 100
head and guide assembl y
checking the connectors CARR-DR 130
cleaning manually CARR-DR 130
cleaning without the cleaning cartridge PLAN 6
compliant guide, removal and replacement CARR-OR 2770
location LOC 100
removal and replacement CARR-DR 130
head tape guide
left
removal and replacement CARR-OR 2280
right
removal and replacement CARR-OR 2290
height, tape control unit and tape transport unit INTRO 5
hexaU,MOsupport diskette status store display UOISClSK 121
hex display, MD support diskette tape control unit scan
rings M[},SDISK 131
Hierarchical Storage Controller CElHSC 20
IlEXER CElHSC 20
ILTAPE CElHSC 20
ILTCOM CElHSC 20
hold out line operation, channel to tape control unit interface OPER 190
hose clamp tool for air pressure hoses, Illustration of PLAN 6
hose, clamping the plenum supply CARR-OR 3-1
host response, message display PANEL 30

HSC
See Hierarchical Storage Controller

110 cable j nstallation iNST 110
Identification code table MD'SDISK 3
Identification code table, diagnostic DlAG 3
Identifying parts LGND 10
ILEXER CEJHSC 20
ILTAPE CElHSC 20
ILTCOM CElHSC 20
iilnL
See initial microprogram load (IML)
IML diskette drive
See diskette drive
IML diskette drive. removal and replacement CARR-TCU 860
IML switch description PANEL 10
in stack sensor removal and replacement CARR-DR 2910
indicator
attention OPER 240, PANEL 40
disable PANEL 10
power PANEL 40
indicators and switches PANEL 10, PANEL 15
information supplied by the support diagnostics MD'SDISK 6
initial microprogram load (iML)
description INTRO 10
diskette, aboUt CARR-TCU 2580
operation OPER 60
procedure PANEL 7
writing a message into address 80 and 83 OPER 142
initial microprogram load or power-on reset failure EAD 4000
initiai seiection sequence from the tape control unit to the drive EAD 41
initial selection, tape control unit to drive operation OPER 185
inlet filter
location Lac 120
removal and replacement CARR-DR 330
input stack assembly removal and replacement CARR-DR 2900
Inspection procedures
education INSP 10
general Instructions INSP 10
preparation INSP 15
tape contrOl unit
ae power supply INSP 4O,INSP 65
de power supply INSP 45
inside INSP 35, INSP 55
outside INSP 15
tape transport unit
ae grounding diagram INSP 60, INSP 70
de power supplies INSP 32
Inside INSP 20, INSP 32
outside INSP 15
installation
adding tape transport units to an installed subsystem INST 135
additional tape transport units INST ·20
dual tape control unit communications cable INST 30
first tape transport unit INST 11
overview chart INST 4
radio frequency Interference frame pans and end plates INST 130
reporting with LARS INST 131
STI cable, Installation INST 90
tape controllllit INST 10
testing with ILEXER INST 131
testing With ILTAPE INST 131
tools and test equipment INST 4
Interconnection checks, device CARR-DR 3-3
Interconnection sequence, serial OPER 188
Interface assignments, MD support diskette status store
display MDlSDlSK 121
Interlock spring

removal and replacement CARR-DR 100
Internal clocks on the write data card EAD 30
Interposer cable and connector
removal and replacement CARR-OR 2600
interrupt level test, diagnostic routine EE13 MCVSDISK 555
channel adapter function test, routine EE64 MCVSDISK 820
Interrupt, MD support diskette tape control unit scan rings MDlSDlSK 131
Intervention required sense bit SENSE 110

jumper, power supply
checks, installation INST 55
drive de power supply CARR-DR 950
tape control unit ae power supply CARR-TCU 1440
tape control unit dc power supply CARR-TCU 1450
J1-J2 connectors location, drive Lac 120
J1-J20 locations, tape control unit dc power supply LOC 35

keys, graphic symbol

LGND 5

latch interlock
removal and replacement
latch spring
removal and replacement

CARR-DR 1270
CARR-OR 160

LOT
See logical device table
leader block
description CART 5
rep/acement procedure CART 20
separated from tape, example CART 1~1
leader block and threader pin
at the cartridge latch assembly
cartridge removal procedure CART 16
example CART 10-3
; n rrrachlne reet htIb
cartridge removal procedure CART 12
example CART 10-2
stopped I n tape path
cartridge remova' procedure CART 14
example CART 10-2
leader block replacement kit PLAN 6
LED positions on the message display PANEL 30
left guide beari ng hose
removal and replacement CARR-OR 450
lert input rail assembly removal and replacement CARR-DR 2930
length, tape INTRO 5
lines, MDto/from MA communication path signal OPER 80
listing, FRU CARR-DR 1-7
load assembly CART 17. LOC 170
load assembly removal and replacement CARR-DR 2820
load balancing In a dual tape control unit subsystem OPER 140
load complete sensor removal and replacement CARR-DR 2840
load motor removal and replacement CARR-DR 2830
load time, tape transport INTRO 5
loader

INDEX 5

INDEX 6

Index
automatic cartridge LGND 46, LGND 47, LGND 48,OPER 240,
PANEL 40
control card LOC 171,OPER 240
control panel LOC 170
mechanical assembly LOC 171, OPER 240
loader control card removal and replacement CARR-DR 2810
loader fuses removal and replacement CARR-DR 2880
loader mechanical assembly CARR-DR 2850, LOC 171
loader operator panel removal and replacement CARR-DR 2980
loader signal cable removal and replacement CARR-DR 2860
loader, automatic cartridge INSP 56
loading tape OPER 55
loading the support diskette, MO MO/SDISK 100
local mode diagram, tape control unit ac power PWR 36
local mode MAP 110, +24 V PWR 110-1
local power enable switch description PANEL 10
local/remote power panel
connectors J1 and J2 LOC 50
location LOC 50
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 840
local/remote power switch PANEL 10
local/remote switch, location LOC 50
locate block fI..!!"!ct!on fai!ed sense bit

SENSE 110

locating parts in the TAOO documentation LGND 15
location
locations
cable group list FSI 200
loader mechanical assembly Lac 170, Lac 171
tape control unit cables, listing CARR-TCU 157
tape control oolt logic boards and cards Lac 15
tape transport unit cables CARR-DR 491
logic board
card locations identification Lac 10
layout LOC 5
pin locations LOC 5
tape control unit
card locations LOC 15
removal and replacement, A1 CARR-TCU 1390
removal and replacement, A2 CARR-TCU 1400
voltage regulator card In O1A-A1 INTRO 20
02A-A1, drive
location LOC 130
removal and replacement CARR-OR 580
logic board layout pin side, tape transport unit LOC 135
logiC card
drive
removals and replacements CARR·DR 640
location charts, how to read graphic format LGND 00
location identification LOC 10
plug lists, how to read graphic format LGND 60
tape control unit
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1110
logic diagrams
dot ORs of output lines, how to read graphic format LGNO 75
example LGND 70·
how to read graphic symbols LGND 55
layout description LGND 00
logic pages, cable group list FSI 200
logical address sWitch
cable connector location LOC 120
setting INST 50
logical block position sense bits SENSE 130
logical components of the tape transport unit OPER 40
logical deVice table (LDT) DF 125
logical pins, how to read graphic format LGND 70
logs
diagnostic hardware error log (DGHELO) OF 117
long lOOP write to read test DIAG 220
loop utility, scope MD/SDISK 1100

TA90MG

EC C04824

loop write to read
data flow diagram OPER 115
description, data flow OPER 110
long OPER 110
long test, routine EE54 DIAG 220
short OPER 110
short liming test, routine EE53 DIAG 218
loose wrap test, tape OPER 55

See maintenance adapter
machine ground wire check INST 6
machiner~1

assembly location LOC 100
flange, lower
removal and replacement CARR-OR 50.
f1ange,upper
removal and replacement CARR-OR 540
hub
removal and replacement CARR-OR 610
motor and hub mount
location LOC 105
removal and replacement CARR-OR 40
tach sensor A
adjustment CARR-DR 40, CARR-DR 2250
Introduction INTRO 51
removal and replacement CARR-OR 2250
tach sensor B
. adjustment CARR-DR 40, CARR-DR 2200
Introduction INTRO 51
removal and replacement CARR-OR 2260
tape guide
removal and replacement CARR-OR 2270
magnetic tape
attachment to cartridge procedure CART 30
conditions When unable to remove cartridge from drive
how to Identify CART 10
leader block and threader pin at cartridge latch
assembly CART 10-3
leader block and threader pin in the machine reel
hub CART 10-2
leader block and threader pin stopped in the tape
path CART 10-2
leader block separated, example CART 10-1
pulled out of cartridge, example CART 10-1
drive clocks EAD 80
pulled out of cartridge, example CART 10-1
magnetic tape reattachment to cartridge procedure CART 30
mainline circuit breaker (CB1), tape control unit PWR 15
maintenance adapter
card
clocks EAD 70
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1110
canmands, MDsupport diskette utilities MDiSDISK 100
external registers OF 5
Introduction INTRO 20
operation OPER 30
registers
maintenance data in (MOl) OF 55
maintenance data out (MOO) OF 00
maintenance status byte (MSB) OF 60
maintenance tag In (MTI) OF 60
maintenance tag out (MTO) OF 62

to/from MD communication OPER 80
maintenance control register (MCR) bit definitions DF 55
maintenance data in register (MDI) bit definitions OF 55
maintenance data out register (MOO) OF 60
maintenance device
SeeMD
maintenance device command byte transfer, maintenance adapter card to
microprocessor card EAD 71
maintenance device to maintenance adapter timing EAO 71
maintenance guide description by volume PLAN 10
maintenance Information description by volume PLAN 11
maintenance package summary
description PLAN 25
diagram PLAN 30
product support summary PLAN 50
maintenance starting point' START 10
maintenance status byte register (MSB) OF 60
maintenance summary, TAOO PLAN 5
maintenance tag In register (MTI)
bit definitions OF 60
maintenance tag out register (MTO)
bit definitions OF 62
major bus lines, graphic symbol LGNO 5
making the drive ready PANEL 5
manifold-In pressure hose
removal and replacement, 50 Hz CARR-DR 378
removal and replacement, 00 Hz CARR-DR 370
manifold-in vacuum hose assembly
removal and replacement, 50 Hz CARR-DR 388
removal and replacement, 00 Hz CARR·OR 380
MAPs, power
100, problem determination PWR 100-1
110, +24 V, local mode PWR 110-1
120, +24 V"remote mode PWR 120-1
130, +24 V control voltage PWR 130-1
150, convenience outlet PWR 150-1
100, power restart PWR 100-1
200, drive dc power (Single drive) analysis procedure PWR 200-1
210, drive dc power (same symptom both drives) PWR 210-1
300, STI power check PWR 300
400, tape control unit de power PWR 400-1
410, +1.7Vdcregulator,01A·A1-i2 PWR 410-1
420, tape control unit + 5 Volt CB tripped PWR 420-1
430, tape control unit -5 Volt CB tripped PWR 430-1
440, tape control unit +8.5 Volt fuse blows PWR 440-1
900, automatiC cartridge loader power check PWR 900
marl< in line operation, channel to tape control unit Interface OPER 100
marl< out line operation, channel to tape control unit interface OPER 100
mask value, MD support diskette utilities, trace/match
control MDiSDISK 146
materials needed for inspection INSP 10

MeR
See maintenance control register
MO
cable group to maintenance adapter FSI 200
connector location LOC 50
Internal adapter error detection OPER 80
reference key MDlSDISK 131
serlalizer/deserlallzer OPER ~
to maintenance adapter communication path OPER 80
to maintenance adapter communication path error
checking OPER 80
to maintenance adapter communication path operations OPER 81
to maintenance adapter diagnostic MO'SOISK 520
to maintenance adapter liming EAD 71
MOl
See maintenance data In register
MOO

See maintenance data out register
mechanical assembly removal and replacement. loader CARR-DR 2B50
mechanical assembly, loader LOC 170, OPER 240
message display
board
removal and replacement CARR-OR 600
board to switch board cable
removal and replaCement CARR-OR 2130
cable
removal and replacement CARR-OR 2115
removal and replacement (message display to SLT
Panel) CARR-OR 2110
removal and replacement (SLT Panel to logic
board) CARR-OR 2113
de power cable
removal and replacement CARR-OR 900
description OPER 40
deScription of messages PANEL 30
LEO
description PANEL 1S
removal and replacement CARR-OR 210
meter in line operation, channel to tape control unit Interface OPER 100
microprocessor
card
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1110
clocks EAO 6
commands, MOsupport diskette utilities MDlSDISK 155
control, MOsupport diskette utilities MO'SOISK 140, M[},SDISK 150
external register address register (XRA) OF 85
external registers OF 10
introduction INTRO 20
registers
channel card address layout OPER 215
channel card control layout OPER 215
chaMel data layout OPER 215
error register A (ERA) and (ERAH) OF 50
error register B (ERB) and (ERBH) OF 55
processor control register (PCR) OF 65
processor error register (PER) OF 65
processor status register (PSR) OF 70
to channel adapter operation OPER 200
to status store operation OPER 200
to status store, to channel adapter data now diagram OPER 215
microprocessor/control storage INTRO 20
minor bus I' nest graphic symbol LGND 5
miscellaneous inside Inspection, tape transport unit INSP 32
mode selection switch PANEL 40
mode switch location LOC 50
modes of writi ng data I NTRO 22
motion cootrol
description OPER 130
diagram OPER 125
drive transport INTRO 51
motor
load CARR-OR 2830
motor control, digital servo card OPER 130
mount/dismount error report, description MSG 212
moving data OPER 65
MSB
see maintenance status byte register
MTI
See maintenance tag in register (MTI)
MTO
See maintenance tag out register (MTO)
multiple logic diagrams for one card, how to read graphic
symbols LGNO 60

INDEX 6

(

INDEX 7

Index

net to pin list, how to read graphic format LGND 80
no trouble found EAD 5070
normal/test switch description PANEL 10
!",ut capable sense bit SENSE 110
number of tracks on tape INTRO 5

off-page connectors, graphiC symbol lGNO 5
offline procedure PLAN 55
on-page connectors, graphic symbol LGND 5
onime test/omine test SWitch
description PANEL 15
location LOG 75
removal and replacement CARR-DR 1040
open operation timi ng chart, MD to MA communication path OPER 81
operating characteristics, subsystem INTRO 5
operating systems INTRO 5
operating the drive PANEL 5
operational in line operation, channel to tape control unit
interface OPER 100
operational out line operation, channel to tape control unit
interface OPER 100
operational overview of the tape control unit OPER 15
coer-ations table, tape control unit (CUT) OF 105
oPerations, introduction OPER 5
operator intervention, sense byte 3 SENSE 120
operator panel, drive
removal and replacement CARR-OR 2-6
switch board
removal and replacement CARR-OR 1090
switch locations LOG 75
operator panel, loader CARR-OR 2980
operator panel, tape control unit
location LOC 50
operator setup panel
location LOG 50
tape control unit PANEL 10
optional features INTRO 5
oscilloscope PLAN 5
OSCillOSCOpe scoping procedure PLAN 65
out Of sequence record sense bit SENSE 110
outlet MAP, convenience PWR 150-1
output current selection +5 V dc location, tape control unit dc power
suppi y LOC 35
output filter
location lOC 120
removal and replacement CARR-OR 320
output stack assembly LOC 171
output stack assembly removal and replacement CARR-DR 2970
output stack up position sensor CARR-OR 2960
overrun sense bit SENSE 110

TA90MG

EC C04824

panel
ac power CB, tape transport unit PANEL 15
ac power supply, tape control unit PWR 15
operator, drive PANEL 15
switch, drive PANEL 15
panel, loader operator CARR-OR 2980
oarallellserlal interconnection OPER 130
parity error detection OPER 80
path group
IOtable (PGT) OF 140
map (PGM) OF 135

PeR
see processor control register
PER

See processor error register
permanent error, sense byte 3 SENSE 120
PGM
See path group map
PGT
See path group 10 table
physical address switch
location LOG 120
removal and replacement CARR-DR 1290
setting INST 50
physical pins, how to read graphic format LGND 70
pin to net list, how to read graphic format LGND 80
plenum assembly and pressure SWitch
location LOC 100
removal and replacement CARR-DR 410
plenum suppty hose
removal and replacement CARR-DR 390
plenum supply hose, clamping procedure CARR-DR 3-1
plunger spring
removal and replacement CARR-DR 170
pneumatic system diagram PNEU 3
pneumatics
checkout procedure PNEU 30
failure in the primary pneumatic system PNEU 12
locations LOC 120
operation OPER 45
pneumatic problem on a Single drive PNEU 20
system measurements PNEU 5
'laCwm checks PNEU 30
port buffer adapter cable group from channel adapter FSI 200
positioning
drive transport INTRO 51
motion control OPER 130

power
+1.7 V dc regulator, 01A-A1-T2 MAP 410 PWR 410-1
+24Vdc
diagram PWR 40
local mode MAP PWR 110-1
MAP PWR 130-1
remote mode MAP PWR 120-1
+5 V dc distribution diagram PWR 42
+8.5 V dc distribution diagram PWR 48
-5 V de distribution diagram PWR 46
ac overview diagram PWR 32
ae power supply panel PWR 15
ACL power problems, MAP 900 PWR 900
convenience outlet PWR 150-1
de control diagram PWR 50
de overview diagram PWR 34de test tool
description PLAN 5

used without the tape control unit dc power supply PWR 10
used without the tape transport unit dc power supply PWR 12
verification procedure PWR 10, PWR 12
drive de (single drive) analysis procedure MAP 200 PWR 200-1
drive dc power (same symptom both drives), MAP 210 PWR 210-1
Introduction PWR 5
locations, tape control unit dc LOC 35
mainline circuit breaker (CB1) PWR 15
problem determination, MAP 100 PWR 100-1
restart MAP PWR 100-1
sequencing OPER 60
STI power check PWR 300-1
STI power check, ~AP 300 PWR 300
tape control unit
ac power, local mode diagram PWR 36
ac power, remote mode diagram PWR 38
de power MAP PWR 400-1
functional area description OPER 30
tape transport unit
fuses continue to blow PWR 30
logical component OPER 40
voltage tolerance tables PWR 20
power amplifier board
connector locatiOns LOG 125
Introduction INTRO 50
location LOC 105
operation OPER 40
removal and replacement CARR-DR 590
power cable LOC 170
power cable removal and replacement CARR-DR 2860
power indicator OPER 240, PANEL 40
power off and on procedure
drive CARR-OR 8
tape transport unit CARR-DR 8
power onloff switch and indicator description PANEL 10
power supply
Introduction INTRa 20
see jumper,P<7Her supply
60 Hz and 50 Hz Japan
power-on-resetlunder-voltage detector Introduction INTRD 20
power/PaR card
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1200
power, removing for relocate or discontinue INST 140
preamplifier card
introduction INTRO 50
!ocanon LOC'30
logical components OPER 40
preparation
for installation INST 4
for safety Inspection INSP 15
pressure hose assembly
removal and replacement CARR-DR 340
pressure loss analysis procedure
air pressure loss PNEU 10
pneumatic problem on a single drive PNEU 20
pressure measurement, pneumatic PNEU 5
pressure port cap
location LOC 120
pressure regulator adjustment PNEU 5
pressure sensor
removal and replacement CARR-DR 400
pressure/vacuum gauge PLAN 5
pressure/vacuum kit PLAN 5
primary key, graphic symbol lGND 5
procedures
air pressure loss analysis
air pressure loss PNEU 10

pneumatic problem on a single drive PNEU 20
cartridge removal by hand CART 10
clamping the plenum supply hose CARR-OR 3-1
de test tool verification PWR 10, PWR 12
ending drive operation PANEL 5
error recovery, sense byte 8 SENSE 140
Initial microprogram load (IML) PANEL 7
leader block replacement CART 20
magnetic tape attachment CART 30
no trouble found EAD 5070
offline procedure PLAN 55
operating the drive PANEL 5
pneumatic checkout PNEU 30
pressure measurement, pneumatic PNEU 5
scoping (using oscilloscope) PLAN 65
support SPROC 2
vacuum adjustment PNEU 5
vacuum measurement, pneumatic PNEU 5
processor
card
Introduction INTRO 50
location LOC 130
logical components OPER 40
control register (PCR) bit definition OF 65
error register (PER) bit definition OF 65
external register test, diagnostic routine EE14 MD/SDISK 565
function test, diagnostic routine EE12 MD'SDISK 550
status register (PSR) bit definition OF 70
product support summary diagram, maintenance PLAN 50
PSR
See processor status register
pump motor
location LOC 120
removal and replacement CARR-DR 300
pump to output filter hose
removal and rep! acement CARR-DR 650
push buttons
tape control unit PANEL 10
tape transport unit PANEL 15
put operation timing chart, MDto MA communication path OPER 81

radio frequency interference frame pans and end plates,
installing INSr 1~
rail assembly, left input CARR-DR 2930
rail assembiy, right input CARR-DR 2940
RCR
See read control register

ROC
See read diagnostic control register
read
adapter
cables locations, drive CARR-DR 490, lOC 145
backward test, data buffer controls diagnostic EE33 DlAG 110
blocks
buffered data now description OPER 90
bus cable groups FSI 200
bytes processed sense bytes SENSE 170
card clocks EAD 30
clock and format card
clocks EAD 50
description OPER 25
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1110
clock/detect cards OPER 25

INDEX 7

INDEX 8

Index
controi area iNTRO 20
control register (RCR) bit definitions DF 70
corrected sense byte SENSE 170
data bus INTRO 30
data flow
area clocks EAD 50
control register (RCR) OF 70
diagnostic controi register iRDCi OF 70
error register (RER) OF 75
pattern register (RPR) OF 80
residual count register (RRC) OF 80
status register (RSR) OF 82
data flow and read control card external registers DF 10
data flow description OPER 90
data flow diagram OPER 95
detect card
diagram, area clocks EAD 30. EAD 50
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1110
diagnostic control register (ROC) OF 70
ECCICORR card
description OPER 25
diagram, area clocks EAD 50
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-leU 1110
error register (RER) bit definitions OF 75
forward test, data buffer controls diagnostic EE33 OIAG 110
overrun test, data buffer controls diagnostic EE33 DlAG 110
pattern register (RPR) bit definitions OF 80
processed sense byte SENSE 180
recovery retry count sense byte SENSE 190
residual count register (RRC) bit definitions OF 80
skew cards 1,2, and 3
clocks EAO 50
description, functional area OPER 25
locations. LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1110
status register (RSR) bit definitions OF 82
read backward
data checks sense byte SENSE 170
test, data buffer controls diagnostic EE33 DlAG 110
read bus cable removal and replacement CARR-DR 880
read bus problems EAD 5030
read cards, tape control unit OPER 25
read forward
data checks sense byte SENSE 170
test, data buffer controls routine EE33 DIAG 110
read in signal line, MD from MA communication path OPER 80
read/write bus connectors location, tape control unit LOC 30
read/write bus connectors location, tape transport unit LOC 75
read/write operations diagram OPER 120
reading data INTRO 22
reading speed, tape transport INTRO 5
ready/not ready switch description PANEL 1S
receive message operation, tape control unit to tape control unit
communication OPER 145
rechecking actions, support procedures SPROC 4
record format, tape data OPER 85
reference screen, MD support diskette register
display/alter MDISOISK 126
register display/alter diagram, MD support disl-:ette MQlSOISK 125
registers, external
address register (XRA) OF 85
addressing OPER 65
buffer
channel pointer high register (BCPH) bit definitions OF 15
channel pointer low register (OCPL) bit dennltions OF 15
channel SARS register (BCSS) OF 20
channel status and error (BCSE) bit definitions OF 15

TA90MG

EC C04824

device pointer high register (BOPH) bit definitions OF 30
device pointer low register (BDPL) OF 30
device status and error (BOSE) bit definitions OF 20
diagnostic 0 (BOGO) bit definitions OF 2S
diagnostic 1 register (SO:;1) bit den nltions OF 25
wrap register (BWRP) bit definitions OF 30
channel
adapter error register (CAE) bit definitions OF 33
adapter status register (CAS) bit definitions OF 35
card control register (CCC) OF 35
card register (CCA) OF 35
error register (CER) OF 35
request register (CRR) bit definitions OF 40
COMTAB register OF 89
data now/error detection OPER 65
device
control bus (OCB) bit definitions OF 40
oontrol register (OCR) bit definitions OF 40
device level register (DLR) bit definitions OF 45
interrupt register (DlR) bit definitions OF 45
.
status/error (DSE) OF 45
tag register (DTR) bit definitions OF 50
diagram, data now/error detection OPER 75
drive, description of OF 155
error register A (ERA) and (ERAH) OF 50
error register B (ERB) and (ERBH) OF 55
maintenance
data In (MOl) OF 55
data out (MOO) OF 60
status byte register (MSB) OF 60
tag in (UTI) OF 60
tag out (UTO) OF 62
operation OPER 65
processor
control register (PCR) OF 65
error register (PER) OF 65
read
control register (RCR) OF 70
diagnostic control register (ROC) OF 70
error register (RER) OF 75
pattern register (RPR) OF 80
residual count register (RRC) OF 80
status register (RSR) OF 82
status register (PSR) OF 70
XRA value to register name cross-reference table OF 12
registers, UDsupport diskette tape control unit scan rings MDlSDlSK 131
regulator
adjustment PNEU 5
location LOC 120
removal and replacement CARR-DR 310
relocate or discontinue subsystem INST 140
remote mode
diagram, tape control unit ac power PWR 38
MAP 120, +24 V control voltage PWR 120-1
removals and replacements
ac circuit breaker/cable assembly, tape transport
unit CARR-DR 2180
ac distribution cable (drive) CARR-DR 2180
ac fuse F1, tape control unit CARR-TCU 1460
ac hne cord, tape control unit CARR-TCU 1400
ac power circuit breaker/cable assembly, tape transport
unit CARR-DR 2180
ac power supply cable CARR-DR 750
ac power supply, tape control unit CARR-TCU 1440
ac power to gate cable CARR-TCU 1770
air pressure test hose assembly CARR-DR 2620
blower assembly, tape control unit CARR-TCU 1500
buffer adapter card CARR-TCU 1110

buffer control card CARR-lCU 1110
buffer storage cards CARR·TCU 1110
cables, tape control unit CARR-TCU 150
cables, tape transport unit CARR-OR 490
card, tape control unit, logiC CARR-TCU 1110
cartridge in stack sensor CARR-DR 2910
cartridge latch assembly CARR-DR 80
cartridge latched sensor CARR-DR 110
cartridge present sensor CARR-DR 100
cartridge staged sensor CARR-DR 2920
center tape guide CARR-DR 2310
channel adapter cards CARR-TCU 1110
cleaner block CARR-DR 1610
cleaner vacuum hose CARR-DR 470
compliant guide, readiwrite head CARR-DR 2770
compression spring CARR-DR 180
control storage array card CARR-TCU 1110
control store card CARR-TCU 1110
convoluted bellows CARR-DR 2230
dc fuse F1 or F2, tape control unit CARR-TCU 1470
dc power distribution (drive internal) cable CARR-OR 790
dc power distribution cable CARR-DR 800
dc power supply to gate TBcable, tape control unit CARR-TCU 1600
de power supply, drive CARR-DR 950
de power supply, STI-FIPS adapter CARR-TCU 9)3()
dc power supply, tape control unit CARR-TCU 1450
decoupler assembly CARR-DR 120
decoupler pressure hose CARR-DR 420
decoupler vacuum hose CARR-DR 430
diskette drive CARR-TCU 860
display board to SWitch board cable CARR-OR 2130
drive adapter card (tape control unit) CARR-TCU 1180
drive blower assembly CARR-DR 200
drive control card CARR-DR 850
drive dc fuse CARR-DR 960
drive dc power supply CARR-DR 950
drive logic board (02A-A1) CARR-DR 580
drive logic cards. CARR-DR 640
drive switch panel CARR-DR 1040
drive thermal switch CARR-DR 1100
external load resistor panel CARR-DR 360
feed assembly CARR-DR 2950
'ile protect switch CARR-DR 00
file reel motor CARR-DR 30
fuse, drive de CARR-DR 960
gate fan cable, tape control unit CARR-lCU 1650
head and guide assembly CARR-DR 130
head tape guide (left) CARR-DR 2280
head tape guide (right) CARR-OR 2290
Inlet filter CARR-DR~, CARR-DR 335
input stack assembly CARR-DR 2900
Interlock spring CARR-DR 100
Interposer cable and connector assembly CARR-DR 2690
latch interlock CARR-DR 1270
latch solenoid CARR-DR 20
latch spring CARR-DR 160
leader block CART 20
left guide bearing hose CARR-DR 450
left input rail assembly CARR-DR 2930
left tape head guide CARR-DR 2280
load assembly CARR-DR 2820
load complete sensor CARR-DR 2840
load motor CARR-DR 2830
loader control card CARR-DR 2810
loader fuses CARR-DR 2880
loader mechanical assembly CARR-DR 2850
loader operator panel CARR-DR 2980
loader signal and power cable CARR-DR 2860

local/remote power panei CARR-TCU 840
logic board, tape control unit A1 CARR-TCU 1390
logiC board, tape control unit A2. CARR-TCU 1400
iogic card, tape control unit CARR-TCU 1110
machine reel CARR-DR 40
machine reel flange, lower CARR-DR 50
machine reel flange, upper CARR-DR 540
machine rael hub CARR-OR 610
machine reel tach sensor A CARR-DR 2250
machine reel tach sensor B CARR-DR 2260
machine reel tape guide CARR-DR 2270
maintenance adapter card CARR-TCU 1110
message display board CARR-OR 600
message display cable CARR-DR 2113
message display cable (message display to SLT
Panel) CARR-DR 2110
message display cable (SLT Panel to logic board) CAR R-OR 2113
message display de power cable CARR-DR ~
message display LED CARR-OR 210
microprocessor card CARR-TCU 1110
operator panel printed circuit board CARR-TCU 1420
operator panel switch board CARR-DR 1000
output filter CARR-DR 320
output stack assembly CARR-DR 2970
output stack up position sensor CARR-DR 2960
physical address switch CARR-DR 1290
plenum assembly CARR-DR 410
plenum supply hose CARR-DR 300
plunger spring CARR-DR 170
power ampllner board CARR-DR 500
power/POR card CARR-TCU 1260
pressure hose assembly CARR-DR 340
pressure sensor CARR-DR 400
pump motor CARR-DR 300
pump to output filter hose CARR-DR 650
read bus cable CARR-DR 880
read clOCk and format card CARR-lCU 1110
read detect card CARR-TCU 1110
read ECCICORR card CARR-TCU 1110
read skew bu1'fercard 1 CARR-leU 1110
read skew buffer card 2 CARR-TCU 1110
read skew buffer card 3 CARR-TCU 1110
regulator CARR-DR 310
right guide bearing hose CARR-DR 440
right input rail assembly CARR-DR 2940
right tape head guide CARR-DR 2200
serVice switch assembly CARR-TCU 1620
stack low sensor CARR-DR 2890
status store basic card CARR-TCU 1110
status store communication card CARR-TCU 1110
STI-FIPS adapter CARR-TCU 9000
STI-FIPS gate fans CARR-TCU 9040
STI-FIPS power supply CARR-TCU 9030
STI-FIPS thermal switches CARR-TCU 0050
swttch panel printed circuit board, tape control unit CARR-TCU 1410
taChometer sensor cable CARR-DR 810, CARR-DR 815
tape control unit ac fuse CARR-TCU 1460
tape control unit ac line cord CARR-TCU 1400
tape control unit ac power supply CARR-TCU 1440
tape control unit A1 logic board CARR-TCU 1300
tape control unit A2 logic board CARR-TCU 1400
tape control unit blower assembly CARR-TCU 1500
tape control U'llt cables CARR-TeU 150
tape control unit dc fuse F1 or F2 CARR-TCU 1470
tape control unit dc power supply CARR-TCU 1450
tape control unit dc power supply to gate TB cable CARR-TCU 1600
tape control unit gate fan cable CARR-TCU 1650
tape control unit logic card CARR-TCU 1110

INDEX 8

INDEX 9

Index
tape control unit switch panel printed circuit board CARR-TCU 1410
tape control unit thermal switch. lower CARR- TCU 1430
tape control unit top card connector CARR-TCU 1570
tape liftei solenoid CARR-DR 2160
tape litter solenoid input hOse CARR-DR 2150
tape path sensor A CARR-DR 60
tape path sensor B CARR-DR 70
tape transport unit ac power circuit breaker/cable
assembly CARR-DR 2180
tape transport unit cables CARR-DR 490
tape tiansport unit control box S',.·,itches

CARR-OR 1040

tape transport unit power supply blower, 60 Hz CARR-DR 710
tape transport unit thermal switch CARR-DR 820
tape transport unit thermal switch cable harness CARR-OR 830
tape transport unit thermal switch cable harness (end tape transport
unit) CARR-DR 835
tape transport unit thermal switch cable harness (not end tape
transport unit) CARR-DR 833
TCC (drive) CARR-DR 660
TeU address switch CARR-TCU 1970
tension transducer CARR-DR 140
tension transducer hose CARR-DR 460
tension transducer tape guide CARR-DR 2300
terminator, write bus A CARR-TCU 1995
terminator, write bus B CARR-TCU 1995
thermal switch lower, tape control unit CARR-TCU 1430
thermal switch upper, tape control unit CARR-TCU 2240
threader assembly CARR-OR 10
top card connector, tape control unit CARR-TCU 1570
too card connectors CARR-DR 660
UEPOs....itch CARR~TCU 1980
vacuum distribution tee CARR-DR 2100
vacuum hose assembly CARR-DR 350
vacuum supply hose CARR-DR 2120
vacuum test hose assembly CARR-DR 2630
voltage regulator card CARR-TCU 1110, CARR-TCU 1260
write bus A terminator CARR-TCU 1995
write bus Bterminator CARR-TCU 1995
write data card CARR-TCU 1110
removing dual tape control unit communication cables, relocate or
discontinue subsystem INST 170
removing VO cables, relocate or discontinue subsystem INST 150
replacing subcovers and covers INST 130
request in line operation, channel to tape control unit Interface OPER 100
RER
Se~ read error register
reset switch
description PANEL 15
location LOC 75
removal and replacement CARR-DR 1040
reset tape control unit, MD support diskette register
display/alter MOISDISK 126
restart MAP 190, power PWR 100-1
rewi nd switch description PANEL 15
rewinding tape OPER 55
RFI
See radio frequency Interference frame pans and end plates, installing
See radio frequency Interference shield, installing
right guide bearing hose
removal and replacement CARR-DR 440
right input rail assembly removal ana replacement CARR-DR 2940
RPR
See read pattern register
RRC
See read residual count register
RSR
See read status register
running omlne checkout during Installation
dual tape control unit subsystem INST 76, INST 78

TA90MG

EC C04824

single tape control unit subsystem INST 70, INST 72
MDiSDISK 5

runnmg support diagnostics

safety
checks INST 6
inspection, materials needed for INSP 10
instructions INSP 10
preparation INSP 15
tape control unit
ac groundl ng diagram INSP 65
ac primary power INSP 40
dc power supply INSP 45
inside INSP 35
inside miscellaneous INSP 55
outside INSP 15
tape transport unit
ac groundi ng diagram INSP 70
dc power supplies INSP 32
Inside INSP 20
Inside miscellaneous INSP 32
outside INSP 15
safety inspection procedures
education INSP 10
general instructions INSP 10
preparation INSP 15
tape control unit
ac power supply It'l'SP 40, INS? 65
dc power supply INSP 45
inside INSP 35, INSP 55
outside INSP 15
tape transport unit
ac grounding diagram INSP 60, INSP 70
de power supplies INSP 32
inside INSP 2O,INSP 32
outside INSP 15
sample logic diagram pages LGND 70
scope loop utility, diagnostic routine EEFO UCi'SDiSK 1100
scoping, procedure for using oscilloscope PLAN 65
secondary key, graphic symbol LGND 5
select control options, MD support diskette utilities, trace/match
control MDISDISK 146
select jn line operation. channel to tape control unit interface OPER 190
select match action MDfSDlSK 146
select out line operation, channel to tape control unit interface OPER 190
select out line operation, tape control unit to drive
Interconnection OPER 100
selected Indicator description PANEL 15
send message operation, tape control unit to tape control unit
communication OPER 145
sense
control transfer diagram, drive adapter area clocks EAD 44
error history table (SNERRH) OF 145
sensedata
analysis SENSE 100
byte summary SENSE 102
description SENSE 100
format 19
byte 3, table and error codes description SENSE 115
bytes through 2, description SENSE 110
bytes 0 through 2, table SENSE 105
bytes 16 through 23, table SENSE 145
bytes 24 through 31 descrlrxlon SENSE 160
bytes 24 through 31, table SENSE 155
bytes 4 through 7, description SENSE 1:JJ

bytes 4 through 7, table SENSE 125
bytes 8 through 15 descriptron SENSE 140
bytes 8 through 15, table SENSE 135
summary SENSE 102
format 20
byte 3, table and error codes description SENSE 115
bytes 0 through 2, description SENSE 110
bytes 0 through 2, table SENSE 105
bytes 16 through 23, table SENSE 145
bytes 24 through 31 description SENSE 160
bytes 24 through 31, table SENSE 155
bytes 4 through 7, description SENSE 130
bytes 4 through 7, table SENSE 125
bytes 8 through 15 description SENSE 140
bytes 8 through 15, table SENSE 135
summary SENSE 102
format 21
byte 3, table and error codes description SENSE 115
bytes 0 through 2, description SENSE 110
bytes 0 through 2, table SENSE 105
bytes 16 through 23, description SENSE 180
bytes 16 thrOUgh 23, table SENSE 175
bytes 24 through 31, description SENSE 190
bytes 24 through 31, table SENSE 185
bytes 4 through 7, description SENSE 130
bytes 4 through 7, table SENSE 125
bytes 8 through 15 description SENSE 170
bytes 8 through 15, table SENSE 165
summary SENSE 102
format, how to determine SENSE 100
sensor
cartridge In stack CARR-DR 2910
cartridge staged CARR-DR 2920
load complete CARR-DR 2840
output stack up position CARR-DR 2960
stack low CARR-DR 2890
sensor removal and replacement, stack low CARR-DR 2800
sensors
tape transport, description of INTRO 51
thread path OPER 55
separation test, data buffer controls diagnostic EE33 DIAG 110
sequence timing chart, initial selection OPER 185
serial data in Signal line, MD to MA communication path OPER 80
serial data out Signal line, MD from MA communication path OPER 80
serial interconnection OPER 130
serial interconnection sequence, tape control unit to drive
Opi!!l"aHon OPER'1mt
serial interconnection timing chart OPER 188
serial number location, tape control unit LOC 30
serial sequence drive Interconnections EAD 44
service !n !lne operation. channel to tape control unit Inlerfa<:e OPER 190
service out line operation, channel to tape control unit
Interface OPER 190
service representative Information, message display PANEL 30
service switch assembly
removal and replacement CARR-lCU 1620
set logic card switches
adapter card, tape control unit CARR-TCU 1189
setting addresses
drive PANEL 12
drive. logical INST.50
drive, physical INST 50
tape control unit INST 40, PANEL 12
Shift signal line, MD to MA communication path OPER 80
short loop write to read
description OPER 110
pattem test, routine EE52 DlAG 200
timing test, routine EE53 DIAG 218

signal cable LOC 170
signal lines. MD toJlrom MA communication path OPER BO
single tape control unit subsystem
command execution OPER 135
configuration diagram OPER;35
diagram. theory INTRO 25
IML procedure PANEL 7
offline checkout INST 70, INST 72
operation OPER 135
setting tape control unit addresses INST 40
SNERRH
see sense error history table
software problems, possible START 130
special tools
descriptions PLAN 5
for installation INST 4
stack low sensor removal and replace:-nent CARR-DR 2890
start MAP, power PWR 100-1
start of maintenance section
actions for possible non-FRU caused error codes START 130
actions to take for a fault symptom code START 325
determining a fault symptom code START 300
determining the tape control unit involved START 420
error path isolation START 400
error path sense byte definitions START 400
fault symptom codes caused by other than TPSJ hardware
failures START 100
maintenance starting point START 10
possible channel adarxer hardware or firmware
problems START 135
possible EC compatibility problems START 135
possibie software probiems START 130
start SWitch PANEL 40
starting sur'lOrt procedures SPROC 2
status bits 0-15 deseri pllon, dri ve OF 150
status byte
description SENSE 205
table SENSE 200
updating the RAM OPER 142
status In line operation, channel to tape control unit interface OPER 190
status in signal line, MD to MA canmunication path OPER 80
status modifier status bit SENSE 205
status out sequence, MD to MA communication path OPER 81
status out signal line, MD from MA communication path OPER 80
status store
baSic card clocks EAD 00
cable group from channel adapter FSI 200
card
introduction INTRO 20
locati on lOG 15
removal and replace~ CARR-TeU 1110
card clocks EAD 10
channel request register (CRR) bit definitions OF 40
communication card
locatton LOG 15
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1110
communication card clocks EAD 8)
communications withOut channel adapter OPER 30
diSplay, MD support diskette MDJSDISK 120
error condition theory EAO 5005
error description EAD 5005
external registers OF 10
external system problems EAD 5006
fmctlonal descrl~lon OPER 30
Irtroductlon INTRO 20
order test, routine EE93 [)lAG 460
OSCilloscope Information EAD 5C05
sense data and diagnostic failure 10 analysis EAD 5006

INDEX 9

Index

INDEX 10

status storeJcrlannel adapter diagram Ei\D 5OC6
to channel adapter communications OPER 200
to channel adapter interconnection EAD 5006
to status store communication path OPER 140,OPER 145
troubleshooting guide, general EAD 5000
updating RAM OPER 142
write/read RAM storage test, routine EE92 DIAG 450
C'TI l""lnt:"

...:J i i'i' Ir.,j

ac grounding diagram INSP 65
adapter
removal and replacement CARR-TCU ~
command conversion INTRO 55
command processing OPER 12
description INTRO 10
fault switches, description QPER 12
gate fan
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 9040
inspection procedure INSP 35
interconnections INTRO 15, INTRO 25, INTRO 35,OPER 10
location INSP 45, Lac 45
ports, description OPER 12
power supply
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 9030
PS-Q3
See STI-FIPS power supply
theory of operations OPER 12
thermal switch
removal and replacement CARR-reu 0050
storage cards, buffer
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1110
storage display/alter MD'SDISK 111
storage display/alter diagram MD'SDISK 110
subsystem
characteristics INTRO 5
component descriptions, MDsupport diskette MD'SDISK 105
deallocate procedure PLAN 55
diagnostics DIAG 2
dismount procedure PLAN 55
display/alter, MD support diskette MD'SDISK 105
dump, MO support diskette utilities MDISOISK 140, MDlSDISK 165
error log messages, VMS
description MSG 100
field definitions MSG 200
features I NTRO 5
introduction INTRO 5
offline procedure PLAN 55
operating modes INTRO 5
relocate or discontinue INST 140
subsystem clocks and sequences
buffer area clocks EAD 20
channel adapter area clocks
clocks to channel adapters EAD 10
clocks to status store EAD 10
control storage subsystem clocks
subsystem clocks to the microprocessor card, timing
chart EAD 6
timing chart EAD 7
XR bus and control clocks EAD 8
drive adapter area clocks
alert sequence from the drive to the tape control unit EAD 42
clocks to the drive-adapter card EAD 40
data transfer sequence between the tape control unit and the drive
and WTM, write erase gap sequence EAO 43
initial selection sequence from the tape control unit to the
drive EAD 41
.
sense control transfer EAD 44
serial sequence drive Interconnections EAD 44
drive clocks to the adapter card EAD 80

TA90MG

EC C04824

liuni tape control unit area Clocks
clocks to the status store basic card EAD 60
clocks to the status store communication card EAD 60
maintenance adapter area clocks
clocks to and from the maintenance adapter EAD 70
data byte transfer, maintenance adapter card to microprocessor
card EAD 71
maintenance deviCe comrnand byte transfer, mainienance adapter
card to microprocessor card EAD 71
read data now area clocks
clocks to the read clock and format card EAD 50
clocks to the read detect cards EAD 50
clocks to the read ECC/CORR card EAD 50
clocks to the read skew buffer cards EAD 50
tape control unit Clocks EAD 5
write data now area clocks
clocks to the read detect cards EAD 30
clocks to the write data card EAD 30
internal clocks on the write data card EAD 30
summary
channel commands INTRO 55
maintenance package description PLAN 25
maintenance product support, diagram PLAN 50
sense bytes SENSE 102
TA90 maintenance PLAN 5
support diagnostics
address meaning MDlSDISK 6
common stop addresses MDlSDISK 6
dual-tape control unit SUbsystem MD'SDISK 5
error screen MDISDISK 6
introduction [lAG 2
organization DIAG 2
single-tape control unit subsystem MQlSDlSK 5
status screen MQlSDISK 6
verify M{)'SDISK 6
support diskette, MO
drive command exerciser
commands MD'SOISK 1220
control options MDlSDlSK 1220
detailS MD'SDISK 1222
diagram MDISOISK 1221
error messages MDISDISK 1220
Introduction DIAG 2
prompting screens MDISDISK 1225
maintenance package MO/SDISK 100
plan MDlSDlSK 100
procedure description MD'SDISK 100
relationship to product maintenance package MDISDISK 100
service panel functions
channel RAM display diagram MDlSDISK 115
display subsystem configuration MDISDISK 105
register display/alter diagram MDlSDISK 125
status store display diagram MD'SDISK 120
subsystem display/alter MDISDISK 105
utilities, MDsupport diskette
microprocessor control MO/SDISK 140, MDlSDISK 150
subsystem dump MD'SDISK 140, MD'SOISK 165
trace/match control MDlSDlSK 140
support maintenance package
descrlptlon SPRQC 2
developing a fault symptom code SPROC 3
end-of-call actions SPROC 4
isolation procedures SPRQC 100
rechecking actions SPROC "
support procedures SPROC 2
support troubleshooting, using the fault symptom index FSI 2
suppress out line operation, channel to tape control unit
Interface OPER 19)

sWltcn

mode selection OPER 240. PANEL 40
start OPER 240, PANEL 40
switches and indicators PANEL 10, PANEL 15
switching on the power
offline checkout, dual tape control unit INST 76, INST 78
offline checkout, single tape control unit INST 70
sync address, scope ioop utiiiiy MDiSDiSK 1100
SYS$ERRORLOG:ERRORLOG.SYS MSG 100
system attachment locations, tape control unit ac power supply
Lac 60

tables
command status table (CST) OF 00
device operations table (DOT) DF 120
drive external registers OF 155
external register address cross-reference
buffer control card OF 5
diiva adaptei CGjd DF 5
maintenance adapter card DF 5
microprocessor card OF 10
read data now and read control card OF 10
status store card IF 10
write data flow card OF 10
external register bit definitions OF 15
logical device table (LOT) OF 125
path group 10 table (PGT) OF 140
path group map (PGM) DF 135
sense error history table (SNERRH) OF 145
tape control unit operations table (CUT) OF 105
XRA value to register name cross-reference OF 12
tach sensor cable locations, drive Lex:::: 155
tape cartridge
about CARR-DR 2320
description CART 5, INTRa 10
recording media characteristics INTRO 5
removal by hand CART 10
tape attachment procedure CART 30
tape cleaning cartridge PLAN 6
tape control unit
+ 5 V dc (J5 through J12) locations, dc power supply LOC 35
+5 V dc distribution diagram PWR 42
+8.5 V dc distribution diagram PWR 48
-5 V dc distribution diagram PWR 46
ae fuse 1
location Lac 55, LOC 00
removal and replacement CARR-lCU 1400
ac Input and output locations, dc power supply Lac 35
ac power supply
grounding diagram INSP 65, INSP 165
local mode diagram PWR 36
location Lac 55, Lac 60
overview diagram PWR 32
panel description PWR 15
power off and on procedures CARR-TCU 6
primary Inspection INSP 40, INSP 140
remote mode diagram PWR 38
50 Hz except Japan LOC 00
ac power to gate cable
removal and replacement CARR-lCU 1770
addressing INTRO 10
basic diagnostics test, how to run MDlSDISK 530
blower assembly 1 and 2
location LOC 30

Lac 55,

removal and replacement CARR- TCU 1500
buffer description OPER 20
cable connectors (dual tape control unit) locations La:::: 30
cable groups listing FSI 200
cable location listing CARR-TCU 157
card locations Identification LOC 10
Changing the addresses PANEL 12
Channel adapter INTRO 3O,OPER 15
channel adapters Installed sense byte SENSE 160
channel Interface OPER 15
circuit breakers location, de power supply LOC 35
clocks EAD 5
COMTABregister OF 89
configurations
dual tape control unit OPER 140
single tape control unit OPER 135
control OPER 30
control functional areas OPER 30
covers
front cover adjustment CARR-TCU 2-2
removals CARR-TCU 2-1
replacements CARR-leu 2-2
data blJffer INTRO 20, OPER 20
data now diagram OPER 10
data writing modes
buffered write INTRO 22
tape write INTRO 22
dc power supply
control diagram PWR 50
Indicator location LOC 50
Inspection INSP 45
location LOC 35
overview diagram PWR 34
voltage checki ng without de test tool PWR 10
YOltage jumper installation CARR-TCU 1450
diagram INTRO 15
dlmens:ons INTRO 5
disable Indicator
cable group FSI 200
description . PANEL 10
diskette drive PANEL 10
drive adapter INTRa 20, INTRO 30
dual tape control unit communications cable, connecting INST 30
end status bit SENSE 205
equipment checks sense byte SENSE 170
error checking OPER 30
errors, sense error history table OF 145
external registers, MD support diskette register
display/alter MDlSDlSK 126
features sense byte SENSE 160
functional area description OPER 15
functions I NTRO 15
fuse location, dc power supply LOC 35
hardWare level sense bits SENSE 160, SENSE 100
110 cable Installation INST 110
IDsense bit SENSE 110
I ML procedure PANEL 7
IMLswltch
cable group FSI 200
description PANEL 10
Initial selection description and timing chart OPER 185
Inside Inspection INSP 35
Inside Inspection, miscellaneous INSP 55
Installation INST 10
IntrodUction INTRO 15
logic board
card locations LOC 15
top card connectors LOC 20

INDEX 10

INDEX 11

Index
logic gate terminal strips location LOC 30
mainline circuit breaker (CB1) PWR 15
maintenance adapter INTRO 20,OPER 30
maintenance adapter registers OPER 30
MD connector location LOC 50
MD serializer/deserializer OPER 30
microcode EC level sense byte SENSE 160
microcode error sense bytes SENSE 140
microprocessor/control storage INTRO 20
normal/test switch
cable group FSI 200
description PANEL 10
online/offline switch
cable group FSI 200
description PANEL 10
operations table (CUT) OF 105
operator panel
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1420
operator panel locations LOC 50
operator setup panel locations LOC 50
output current selection (+5 V dc) location, dc power supply LOC 35
outside inspection INSP 15
over-<;urrent protection, circuit breakers location lOC 35
parts definitions and locations LGND 15
power
cable, connecting INST 00
introduction INTRO 20
mode-type SWitch location LOC 50
operation OPER 30
switch location LOC 50
voltage tolerance table PWR 20
power-on-resetJunder-voltage detector OPER 30
read
cards OPER 25
control INTRO 20
data bus INTRO 30
read/write bus connectors location LOC 30
reading data INTRO 22
remove/replace procedures by FRU number CARR-TCU 1-1
scan rings diagram, MD support diskette MDlSDISK 130
serial number high order digit sense bits SENSE 160, SENSE 190
serial number location LOC 30
serial number low order sense bytes SENSE 160, SENSE 190
service switch assembly
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1620
setting the addresses INST 40, PANEL 12
status store OPEti ~
status store/channel adapter communications OPER 30
status store/status store communication INTRO 20
switch panel printed Circuit board
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1410
switches and indicators PANEL 10
tape control unit involved determination START 420
tape control unit to drive bus out driver wrap test, diagnostic routine
EE42 DIAG 150
TCU address switches
cable group FSI 200
locations LOC 50
TCU address switches locations LOC 50
TCUOrrCU1 switch
cable group FS! 200
description PANEL 10
test plug data locations, dc power supply LOC 35
test plug location, dc power supply LOC 35
thermal switch assembly location LOC 30
to drive bus and tag test, diagnostic routine EE4-3 DIAG 160
to drive operation OPER 185
to Orl ve sequences
alert sequence from the drive to the tape control unit EAD 42

TA90MG

EC C04824

data transfer sequence between the tape control unit and the drive
and WTM, write erase gap sequence EAD 43
initial selection sequence from the tape control unit to the
drive EAD 41
sense control transfer EAD 44
serial sequence drive Interconnections EAD 44
to drive serial test, diagnostic routine EE44 DIAG 170
to drive, write operation OPER 187
to tape control unit communications OPER 145
top card connectors locations LOC 20
troubleshooting guide, general EAD 5055
T1 ac voltage taps location, de power supply LOC 35
unit emergency power off cable (UEPO), installing INST 120
unit emergency power switch location LOC 50
unit emergency switch location LOC 50
voltage regulator OPER 30
write OPER 20
write data flow INTRO 20
writing data INTRO 22
tape control unit offline verification procedure CARR-TCU 5
tape data record format OPER 85
tape data transfer error report, description MSG 206
tape drive
ending operation procedure PANEL 5
message display messages PANEL 30
operating procedure PANEL 5
setting the addresses PANEL 12
setting the logical address INST 50
setting the physical address INST 50
tape drive message display INTRO 10
tape drive transport OPER 50
tape format OPER 85
tape guide, head
left
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2280
right
removal and replacement CARR-OR 2290
tape IIlter solenoid
location lOC 100
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2160
response checking procedure MD'SDISK 302
tape IIlter solenoid input hose
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2150
tape lifter solenoid response checking procedure MDISDISK 302
tape loading/unloading, drive transport INTRO 51
tape path sensors
adjustment, sensor A CARR-OR 60, CARR-OR 120
adjustment, sensor B CARR-DR 40, CARR-DR 70
locations LOC 105
removal and replacement, sensor A CARR-DR 60
removal and replacement, sensor B CARR-OR 70
tape removal tool PLAN 5
tape rewinding/unloading OPER 55
tape thread-load OPER 55
tape transport
characteristics INTRO 5
sensors INTRO 51
tape transport unl t
ac grounding diagram INSP 70
ac power CB
location LOC 75
panel PANEL 15
adapter card OPER 40
cable
removal and replacement CARR-DR 490
cables location chart CARR-OR 491
covers
front cover adjustment CARR·DR 2-2, CARR-DR 2-4

removals CARR-DR 2-1, CARR-DR 2-3
replacements CARR-DR 2-2, CARR-DR 2-4
data flow diagram OPER 35
dc power supplies inspection INSP 32
dc power supply
location LOC 75
voltage checking without dc test tool PWR 12
diagram, theory INTRO 45
digital serlJ'O card OPER 40
dimensions INTRO 5
drive
address switch locations LOC 75
display panel locations lOC 75
locations LOC 95
online/omlne SWitch locations LOC 75
povver switch locations LOC 75
ready/not ready switch locations Lac 75
rewind switch locations LOC 75
switch panel location Lac 75
transport assembly description INTRO 51
unload switch locations Lac 75
drive control card
adapter OPER 40
digital servo OPER 40
microprocessor OPER 40
drive logiC INTRO 50
drive transport description OPER 50
ferrite assembly
functions INTRO 45
fuses continue to blcwv PWR 30
inside Inspection INSP 20
installation
additional units INST 20
first unit INST 11
introduction INTRO 45
locations LOC i5
logic board layout, pin side LOC 135
logic location area definitions LGND 35
logical components OPER 40
loose wrap test, tape OPER 55
message display INTRO 50, OPER 40
microprocessor card OPER 40
operator control panel and display location LOC 75
outside inspection INSP 15
pneumatic supply INTRO SO, OPER 45
pneumatics
pneumatics lOC 120
power
amplifier board OPER 40
Introduction INTRO 50
logical components description OPER 40
power off and on procedures CARR-DR 8
power supply
jumper checks, Installation INST 56
locations LOC 90
read preamplifier card OPER 40
rer:noVelreplace procedures by FRU number CARR-DR 1-1
rewinding, tape OPER 55
sensor test, tape OPER 55
setting the addresses PANEL 12
setting the logical address INST 50
setting the physical addresses INST SO, INST 350
switch panel location LOC 75
switches and Indicators PANEL 15
tape threadlload OPER 55
tape unloading/rewinding OPER 55
TB11ocation LOC 75
thermal switch

cable harness removal and replacement CARR-DR 830
removal and replacement CARR-DR 820
threadlload, tape OPER 55
TU-P2 read/write bus connector location LOC 75
write card OPER 40
tape write mode INTRO 22
tape-write-immediate mode OPER 100
TA90 maintenance summary PLAN 5
TCU address switches
Information chart for setting INST 40
switch
cabie group FSi 200
description PANEL 10
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1970
TCUOITCU1 switch description PANEL 10
tension transducer
Introduction INTRO 51
removal and replacement CARR-DR 140
tension transducer hose
removal and replacement CARR-DR 400
tension transducer tape guide
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2300
test equipment
for Installation INST 4
OSCilloscope PLAN 65
pressure/vacuum gauge PLAN 5
test plug data
tape control unit dc power supply locations LOC 35
tape transport unit dc power suppfy locations LOC 90
test tool, dc power supply
description PLAN 5, PWR 12
how to use without tape controi unit P'NR 10
how to use without tape transport unit PWR 12
verification procedure PWR 10, PWR 12
thermal switch assembly
location LOC 130
removal and replacement CARR-DR 1100
thermal switch lower, CU gate
location LOC 30
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1430
thermal switch upper, CU gate
removal and repiacement CARR-TCU 2240
thermal switch, tape transport unit
cable harness
removal and replacement CARR-OR 820
threader arm location LOC 95
tJveader assembl y
location LOC 100
removal and replacement CARR-DR 10
threader motor location LOC 105
threader pi n and leader block
at the cartridge latch assembly
cartridge removal procedure CART 16
example CART 10-3
In machine reel hub
cartndge removal procedure CA RT 12
example CART 10-2
stopped In tape path
cartridge removal procedure CART 14
example CART 10-2
threading tape OPER 55
threading/loading tape OPER 55
timing test, short loop write to read DlAG 218
tool for releasing cartridge clutch, illustration of PLAN 6
tools, special
descrlpUons PLAN 5
for Installation INST 4
top card connectors

INDEX 11

INDEX 12

Index
locations LOC 20
removals and replacements CARR-OR 660, CARR-TCU 1570
trace level 7, MD support diskette utilities, trace/match
control MDISDISK 146
trace/match control, MD support diskette utilities
detailed description MCVSDISK 146
diagram M[)ISDISK 145
overview MD/SDISK 140
transfer packet MSG 100
transitions from GMP to support package SPROC 2
transport, tape
characteristics INTRO 5
sensors INTRO 51
troubleshooting, board and cable Interconnection failures EAD 5(XX)
11 ac voltage taps location, tape control unit dc power supply LOC 35

UEPO cables, removing for relocate or discontinue
UEPOswitch

INST 160

under-voltage detectorJpower-on-reset IN1RO 20
unit check
status bit SENSE 205
timing sense bit SENSE 110
unit emergency power off (UEPO) cable, installing INSl 120
unit emergency power switch
checking for failure INST 60
description PANEL 10
location LOC 50
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1980
unit exception status bit SENSE 205
unload switch description PANEL 15
unload time, tape transport INTRO 5
unloading tape OPER 55
use of support diagnostics M[)ISOISK 4
using the fault symptom index FSI 2
utility, scope loop MDlSDlSK 1100

vacuum adjustment PNEU 5
vacuum distribution tee
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2100
vacuum hose assembly
removal and replacement CARR-DR 350
vacuum measurement, pneumatic PNEU 5
vacuum port cap
location LOC 120
vacuum supply hose
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2120
vacuum test hose assembly
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2630
venturi
location LOC 120
verification procedure, dc test tool PWR 10, PWR 12
VMS error log messages MSG 100
voltage distribution cable
connectors LOC 120
voltage distribution list, how to read graphic format LGND 80
voltage jumper
See jumper, power supply
voltage regulator card
introduction INTRO 20

TA90MG

EC C04824

location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1260
voltage regulator, tape control unit OPER 30
voltage tolerance tables PWR 20
volume content, maintenance guide PLAN 10, PLAN 11

wait Indicator description PANEL 10
WBC top card connector
location LCC 130
removal and replacement CARR-DR 660
OCD top card connector
locatiOn LOC 20
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1570
OCR
See write control register
WE top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1570
\\'FG top Wiid connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1570
when to use the fault symptom index FSI 2
when to use the support maintenance package SPROC 2
width, tape INTRO 5
width, tape control unit and tape transport unit INTRO 5
WKL top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1570
write OPER 20
write adapter cables locations, drive LOC 150
write blocks corrected sense byte SENSE 170
write blocks processed sense byte SENSE 180
write bus terminator
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1995
write bytes processed sense bytes SENSE 180
write card OPER 40
Introduction INTRO 50
location LOC 130
write control register (WCR) OF 82
write data card
clocks EAO 30
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-1CU 1110
write data checks sense byte SENSE 170
write data now
area clocks EAO 30
description OPER 100
diagram OPER 100
extemal registers OF 10
Introduction INTRO 20
write data now description OPER 120
write operation timing chart OPER 187
write operation, tape control unit to drive OPER 187
write operatiOns OPER 100
write overrun test, data buffer controls diagnostic EE33 DlAG 110
write power card
location LOC 130
write signal line, MO from MA communication path OPER 80
write status sense bit SENSE 110
write to read timing test, short loop OIAG 218
writing data INTRO 22
WS top card connector location LOC 20
WSE
See write status/error register

XB top card connector
location LOC 130
removal and replacement CARR-DR 660
XC top card connector
location LOC 130
removal and replacement CARR-DR 660
XCOE top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1570
XFG top carCl connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1570
XKL top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1570
XR bus and control clocks EAD 8
XR detected errors OPER 70
XR Interconnection timing EAD 8
XRA
see extemal registers
XRA decode example OPER 215
XRS top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement CARR-TCU 1570

YB top card connector
location LOC 130
removal and replacement
YBCOtop card connector
location LOC 130
removal and replacement
YCDE top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement
YFG top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement
YHJK top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement
YKL top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement
YP top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement
YRS top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement

ZB top card connector
location LOC 130
removal and replacement
ZSCD top card connector
location LOC 130
removal and replacement
ZCD top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement
ZFG top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement
ZHJK top card connector
ZKL top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement
ZPQ top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement

Numerics

CARR-DR 660

CARR-TCU 1570

02A-A1 logic board pin side locations, dri ve LOC 95
50 Hz and 60 Hz voltage tolerance tables PWR 20
50 Hz except Japan, ac power
voltage tolerance table PWR 20
60 Hz and 50 Hz Japan, ac power
voltage tolerance table PWR 20
CARR-DR 660

CARR-DR 660

CARR-TCU 1570

CARR-DR 660

CARR-TeU 1570

CARR-TCU 1570

INDEX 12

(

TA90 MG EC C04824

Notes

INDEX 13

Notes

INDEX 13

TA90/E Magnetic Tape Subsystem Maintenance Guide
EK·PTA90·MG·OO2

READER'S COMMENTS

TA90/E Magnetic Tape Subsystem Maintenance GuIde

READER'S COMMENTS

EK·PTA90·MG·002

Your comments and suggestions will help us In our eHorts to Improve the quality of our publications.

Your comments and suggestions will help us In our efforts to improve the quality of our publications.

1. How did you use this manual? (Circle your response.)

(a) Installation
(b) Operation/use

(e) Training
(f) Other (Please specify) - - - - - - - - - -

(a) Installation
(b) Operation/use

(e) Training
(f) Other (Please specify) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

2. Did the manual meel your needs? Yes:J No:::J Why?

2. Did the manual meet your needs? Yes:J No

3. Please rate the manual on the following categories. (Circle your response.)

3. Please rate the manual on the following cate"gories. (Circle your response.)

Excellent
Accuracy
Clarity
Completeness
Table of Contents. Index
Illustrations. examples
Overall ease of use

5
5
5
5
5
5

Good
4
4
4
4
4
4

Fair

Poor

3
3
3
3
3
3

2
2
2
2
2
2

Unacceptable
1

1
1
1
1
1

Accuracy
Clarity
Compl eteness
Table of Contents. Index
Illustrations. examples
Overall ease of use

Why?

Excellent
5
5

5
5
5
5

Good
4
4
4
4
4
4

4. What things did you like most about this manual?

5. What things did you like least about this manual?

5. Whallhings did you like least about this manual?

6. Please list and describe any errors you found in this manual.

Page

Description/location of Error

Fair

Poor

3
3
3
3
3
3

2
2
2
2
2
2

Job Title

Name

Job Trtle

S:reet

Company

Street

Comt'any

City

Department

City

Department

State/Country

Telephone Number

StateiCountry

Teiephone Number

Postal (ZIP) Code

Date

Postal (ZIP) Code

Oa!e

rPlease do not use this form to order manuals. Contact your representative at Digital Equipment Corporation
or (in the USA) cal! our DECdirect'" department at this toll-free number: 800·258-1710.

1
1
1
1

Description/location of Error

Name

THANK YOU FOR YOUR COMMENTS AND SUGGESTIONS

Unacceptable
1

THANK YOU FOR YOUR COMMENTS ANC SUGGESTIONS
Please do not use this form to order manuars. Contact your representative at Digital Equipment Corporation
or (in ~he USA) call our DECdirect"'" department at this toll·free number: 800-258·1710.

FOLD HERE AND TAPE. DO NOT STAPLE

FOLD HERE AND TAPE. 00 NOT STAPLE

mamaama·
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS

?EFUv'iT NO. 33

MAYNARD. MA.

NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES

IIII

mamaama

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FI RST CLASS

?E~MiT NO. :33

MAYNARD, MA.

PCS~AGE WI:'L BE P~I:J BY ~foIE A:l~R:SS:E

PCSTAGE W::'L BE P~:::l BY ~foIE A!:)!:)RESS:E

DIGITAL EQUIPMENT COR?ORAiION
Educational ServicesiQuaiity Assurance
'2 Crosby Drive BUO/E08
Bedford, MA 01730· j ~93

DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CCR?ORAiION
Educational Services/Quaiity Assurance
12 Crosby Drive eUO/E08
Bedford. MA 01730· j :93

USA

11111111111111.11111.1111111111,',.11.11.111111111.11
FOLD HERE AND TAPE. 00 NOT STAPLE

1111111111111111111111111111111.11111111111111111.11
FOLD HERE AND TAPE. 00 NOT STAPLE

NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UN!TEO STATES